Nokia E66 User Manual
Nokia E66 User Guide
DECLARATIO N OF CONFORMI TY Hereby, NOKIA CORPORA TION declares that this RM-343 product is in compliance with the essential requir ements and other relevan t provisions of Directive 19 99/5/EC. A copy of the Decla ration of Con formity can be found at http:// www.nokia.com/phones/decla ration_of_conformity/ . é 2008 Nokia. All rights reserved. Nokia, Nokia Connecting Peop le, Nokia Origi nal Enhancements logos, Eseries, E66, and Vi sual Radio are tradem arks or registered trademarks of Nokia Corporation. Nokia tune is a sound mark of Nokia Corporation. Oth er product and company names mentioned herein may be trademark s or tradenames of their respective owners. Reproduction, tr ansfer, distrib ution, or st orage of part or all of the co ntents in this d ocument in any form without the prior written permission of Nokia is prohibited. US Patent No 5818437 and other pending pa tents. T9 text input software Copyright é 1997-2008. Te gic Communications, Inc. All ri gh ts reserved. This product includes software licens ed from Symbian Software Lt d é1998-2008. Symbian and Symb ian OS are trad emarks of Symbia n Ltd. Java and all Java-based marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. Portions of the Nokia Maps softwar e are é1996-2008 The FreeType Pro ject. All rights reserved. This product is licensed un der the MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfolio Licen se (i) for personal and noncommercial use i n connection with information which has been encoded in compliance with the MPEG-4 Vi sual Standard by a consum er engaged in a person al and noncommercial act ivity a nd (ii) for use in connection with MPEG-4 vid eo provided by a licensed video provid er. No license is granted o r shall be impl ied for any other use . Additional information, including that r elated to promotion al, internal, an d commercial uses, ma y be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC. See http://www.mpegl a. com Nokia operates a policy of ongoing developm ent. Nokia reserves the right to make chan ges and improvements to any o f the product s described in this document without prior no tice. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERM ITTED BY APPL ICABLE LAW, UNDER NO CI RCUMSTANCES SHALL NOK IA OR ANY OF ITS LICEN SORS BE RESPONSIB LE FO R ANY LOSS OF DATA OR INCOME OR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES HOWSOEVER CAUS ED. THE CONTENTS O F THIS DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDE D "AS IS". EXCEP T AS RE QUIRED BY APPLICABL E LAW, NO W ARRANT IES OF ANY KIND, EIT HER EXP RESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LI MITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY A ND FITNESS FOR A PARTICU LAR PURPOSE, AR E MAD E IN RELATION .
TO THE A CCURACY , RELIAB ILITY OR CONTENT S OF THIS DOCUMEN T. NOKIA RESERVES THE RIG HT TO REV ISE THIS D OCUMENT OR WITHDRA W IT AT A NY TIME WITHOUT PRIO R NOTICE. Reverse engineering of any software in the Nokia dev ice is prohibited to the extent permitted by applicable la w. Insofar as thi s user guide contains any limitations on No kia's representations, warranties, damages an d liabilities, such limita tions shall lik ewise limit any repr esentations, wa rranties, damages and liabilities of Nokia's licensors. The availability of particula r products and applications and services for these products may v ary by regi on. Please ch eck with your Nokia dealer for details, and a vailabili ty of language o ptions. Export controls This device may contain commodit i es, technology or software subject to export la w s and regulations from the U S and other countr ies. Div ersion contrary to law is prohibited. FCC/INDUSTRY CANA DA NOTICE Your device may cause TV or radio interference (for example, wh en using a tel ephone in close proximity to receiving equipment). The FCC or Industry Canada can require you to stop using your telephone if su ch inte rference cannot be eliminated. If you require assistance, conta ct your local serv ice facility. This device complies wi th part 15 of the FCC rul es. Operation is sub ject to the followin g two conditions: (1) This de vice may not cause ha rmful interference, and (2) this dev ice must accept any int erference received, including interference that may cause undesired operat ion. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by Nokia could void the user's authority to operate this e quipment.
Contents Safety................. .................. .............. ........10 About your device.................................................. .......10 Network services.............. .............................................11 Battery removing..........................................................12 E66 in brief..................................... ............13 Key features...................................................................13 Keys and parts...............................................................14 Key moves........................................................ ..............15 Auto mati c di spla y rot ati on...... ........ ........ .......... .......1 5 Silence the device.... ................................... ................15 Scroll key lights....... .................. ................... ...............16 Slide function. ........................................ .....................16 Set up your device......................... .............17 Insert the SIM card and battery................... ........... .....17 Charge the battery................................................ ........18 Insert the memory card......... .............................. .........18 Eject the memory card.............. .................... ................19 Connect the headset................................................ .....19 Attach the wrist strap...................................................19 Antennas........................................................................20 Get started......... .......... ........ ........ ........ ......21 First start-up..................................................................21 Welcome......................................................... ...............21 Settings wizard............................... .................... ..........22 Home screen..................................................................22 Menu......................... ................................ ......................23 Tran sfe r con ten t fr om ot her dev ices .........................23 Tran sfer con ten t bet wee n de vice s.... ........ ......... ......2 4 View transfer log........................................................24 Synchronise, retrieve, and send data.......................24 Com mon a ctio ns in se vera l ap pli cat ions .......... ..........2 5 Display indi cators................. .............................. ...........25 Volume control..............................................................27 Memory.............................................. ............................27 Free memory..................... ....................... ...................27 Memory card...............................................................28 MicroSDHC............................... ..................................28 Use a memory card.................... ..............................28 Write text...................... .................................................28 Traditional text input. ................ .................... ............28 Predictive text input..................... ............. ............... .29 Chan ge t he w riti ng l angu age ........ ......... ............ ......29 Further information........................................... ...........29 New from Eseries............. ....... ......... ........ ..31 Access tasks quickly .................... ................. .................31 Home screen..................................................................31 Navigate in the home screen............................ ........31 Work on the home screen........................ .................31 Switch home screens............................. ................. ...32 One-touch keys........... .................................... ...............32 Home key......................... ..................... ......................32 Contacts key...................................................... ..........33 Contents
Calendar key........... ................ .................... ................ .33 E-mail key..................... .......................... .....................33 Nokia Calendar for Eseries............. ....................... ........33 Calendar views............. ...................... .................. .......33 View calendar information...... ...................... ............34 Create calendar entries........ ......................................34 Calendar settings...... .......................... ........................35 Nokia Contacts for Eseries............................................3 5 Add contacts.................................... ........................ ...35 Contact groups....... ................ ................ ................... ..35 Search for contacts.................. ...................................35 Manage contacts direct ories................ ............. ........36 Add ringi ng tone s fo r con tac ts..... .......... ............ ......36 Change contacts settin gs.................. .........................36 Multitasking.............................. .....................................36 Personalisation..................................... .....38 Profiles..................................................... ......................38 Select ringing tones......................................................38 Customise profiles.................. ..................... ..................39 Personalise the home screen.......................................39 Change the display theme....... ................... ..................40 Download a theme....... ..................... ............... .............40 3-D ringing tones........................................... ...............40 Media............. ............... ............... ...............41 Camera............................................. ..............................41 Capture an image.......................................................41 Scenes........................... ................................. ..............41 Capture images in a sequence.......................... ........42 View captured image.................................................42 Record videos................. ................. .................... .......42 Play a video clip.................... ......................................43 Image settings......... ............................... ....................43 Video settings.............................................................43 Nokia Podcasting............................. .................. ...........44 Play and manage podcasts ............................... .........44 Directories.................................... ...............................44 Search podcasts................................ ..........................45 Podcasting settings.......... .......................... ................45 Music player...................................................................45 Pla y a so ng or a po dca st e piso de.. ............ .......... .....45 Playlists............................... ............................ ............46 Nokia Music Store ......................................................46 Transfer music from PC..............................................46 Tran sfe r wi th W indo ws Medi a Pl aye r......................47 Preset frequency sett ings..........................................47 Share online............... ......................... ...................... .....48 Share images online..................... ............ ........... ......48 Recorder............................................. ............................48 Record a sound clip....................................................48 Play a recording............ ...................... ..................... ...48 Recorder settings............................... ................. .......49 Gallery............................ ...................... ..........................4 9 Work wit h med ia f ile s and fol ders ...... ............ ......... 49 View images.......... ................... ............... ............... .....49 Manage image files....................................................50 RealPlayer....................................................... ...............50 Play video clips and stream lin ks..............................50 Send aud io f ile s and vid eo cli ps. ....................... .......51 View inf orma tion abo ut a m edi a cl ip......................51 RealPlayer settings........ ..................................... ........51 Flash player............ ............................. ........................... 51 Manage flash files.......... ...................... ....................... 51 Contents
Radio................................... ...................................... .....52 Listen to the radio................ ......................................52 View visual content..... ...............................................52 Saved stations.... ............... ................... ................ .......53 Radio settings........... ..................................................53 Internet radio................................................................53 Listen to internet radio stations...............................53 Search for stations.................... ............... ................. .54 Save stations....... ............................ ............................54 Internet radio settings ................... ................ ............54 Internet......................................................56 Web............................................ ................................... .56 Connection security........... ........................ .................56 Browse the web........... ............... ................ ................57 Bookmarks..................................................................57 Clear the cache.................. .................. ........................57 Feeds and blogs........................ ..................................57 End a connection........................................................57 Web settings...............................................................58 Browse the intranet ....... ..............................................58 Download!......... ................ ................ ................ .............58 Manage items..................................... ........................58 Subscriptions....................................... .......................59 Download! search......... .................. ......................... ...59 Purchase history.........................................................59 Download! settings....................................................59 Internet access points..................... .......... .......... .........59 Set up an internet acce ss point for packet data (GPRS)..................................................... .....................60 Advanced internet access point settings for packet data (GPRS)............... ................. ..................... .............60 Set up an access point for WL AN manually....... .......61 Adva nce d ac cess poi nt se ttin gs f or W LAN ...............61 Connect PC to web......... ................ ................... .............62 Messaging................ .................. ............. ...63 Messaging folders.............................. .................. .........63 Organise messages........................................ ...............64 Message reader............................... ................... ...........64 Speech............................................................................64 Edit the voice properties ............. ........ .......... ........ ...64 E-mail messages... ....................... ....................... ...........65 Nokia Email.................................................................65 Mail for Exchange................................... ....................66 Regular POP or IMAP e-mail ..................... ................. .67 Set up POP or IMAP e-mail...................... .............. ..67 Connect to a remo te mailbox.................................68 Rea d an d rep ly to e-ma il.. ........ .......... ......... ........ ...68 Write and send e-mail...... ................ ..................... ..69 Delete messages......................................................69 Subfolders in your remote e-mail..........................69 Text messages. ..............................................................69 Write and send text messages ..................................70 Sending options for text mes sages............... ...........70 Text messages on the SIM ca rd.................................70 View picture messages....................................... .......71 Forward picture messages....................... ................ .71 Multimedia messages...................................................71 Crea te a nd se nd mu lti medi a mes sag es...... .............71 Rece ive and rep ly to mul time dia mess age s............72 Create presentations......... .........................................73 View presentations................................... .................73 Vie w and sav e mul tim edi a att ach men ts.................73 Contents
Forward a multimedia message...............................74 Send a sound clip........................ .................. .............7 4 Sending options for multimedia messages.............74 Instant messaging................................ ..................... ...75 Define IM settings.. ................. ................. ................. ..75 Start a conversati on...................................................75 IM groups.................................... ................................7 6 Block users........................................................... .......77 IM application settin gs.................. ............. ...............7 7 Special message types................................................. .77 Service messages...... ............... .................. ............... ..77 Send service commands............................ ................7 8 Cell broadcast............................................. ...................78 Messaging setti ngs.................... .................. ............... ..78 Text message settin gs.......................... .....................7 9 Multimedia message settings....................... ............79 E-mail account settings................... .......... .............. ..80 Connection settings. ........................ ................... .....80 User settings................................. ...........................8 0 Retrieval settings............ ...................... ...................81 Automatic retrieval settin gs............................ .......81 Service message settings................ ........ .......... ........8 1 Cell broadcast settings.... ...........................................82 Other settings.............................................................82 Phone................................................... ......83 Voice calls................ .................. ....................... ..............83 Answer a call.......................... .....................................83 Make a call..................... .................... ......................... .83 Make a conference call.......................... .....................84 Video calls......................................................................84 Make a video call............................ ........................... .84 Share a video............................................ ..................85 Rece ive a vi deo shar ing invi tat ion. .......... .......... ......85 Net calls........................... .......................... .....................85 Create a net call profile....................................... .......86 Connect to the net call service.................... ............ ..86 Make net calls................................ ..................... ........87 Net call service settings .................................... .........87 Speed dialling.............. ............................................. .....88 Call divert.......................................................................88 Call barring............... ................. .................... ................ .88 Bar net calls...................................... ......................... ....89 Send DTMF tones.......................................................... .89 Voice mail....................... ........................ .................... ...90 Voice aid................... .................... ...................... ............90 Voice commands...........................................................90 Make a call..................... ......................... .................... .91 Launch an application.. ................... ..................... ......91 Change profil es.................................................. .........91 Voice command settings................... ............... .........92 Push to talk.................. ............................................. .....92 PTT settings............................. ................ ...................9 2 Log in to PTT service........................................ ..........92 Make a PTT call.................... ............. ................ ..........92 Created PTT calls.................. .............................. .........93 Manage PTT con tacts.................. ............ .............. .....93 Create a PTT channel............................. .....................93 Exit PTT................................. .......................................93 Log...................................................... ............................93 Call and data regist ers..................... ................... .......94 Monitor all communications.................. .......... .........94 Call and send messages from L og............. ................94 Log settings.............................. .................. ................94 Contents
Travelling.................................................. .96 Abou t GP S and sat ell ite sign als .......... ............. ............ 96 Positioning settings...... ................................................97 Maps.......................................... .....................................97 About Maps.......................................... .......................98 Move on a map..................................... ......................98 Display indicators.......................................................99 Find locations....................... ..................... ................. 99 Plan a route............ ................. .................... ................99 Walk to your destination........... ........................... ...100 Drive to your destination................... .......... ...........100 Traffic information................ .................................. .101 Travel guides................................... ........................ .101 GPS data....................................................................... 101 Use GPS data.............................................................102 Landmarks...................................................................102 Create a landmark....................................................102 Edit landmarks............. ................. ................ ............102 Landmark categories...............................................103 Receive landmarks............................................... ....103 Noki a Off ice Too ls...... ............ ........... .......1 04 Active notes.................................................................104 Create and edit notes .... ................. ..................... ....104 Sett ing s for Act ive not es... ........ ........... ......... ....... ...10 4 Calculator.....................................................................105 File manager........... ................... ......................... .........105 Quickoffice...................................................................105 Work with files........................................ .................106 Converter......................... ........................... .................106 Conv ert mea sure men ts.... ........ ........ ........ ......... ...... 106 Set b ase cur renc y an d ex cha nge r ate ....................106 Zip manager............................. ..................... ..............107 PDF reader..................... .................. ....................... .....107 Printing........................................................................107 Print files ...................................... ............................107 Printing options............................. ..................... .....108 Printer settings... ............................... ...................... .108 Clock............................................................. ................108 Alarm clock............... ................... ............... ...............108 World clock..................... ................................... .......109 Clock settings...................... ............................... .......109 Notes............................................................................109 Write and send notes....... .................. ............... .......109 Nokia Wireless Keyboard.............. ........ ........ ......... ....109 Connectivity............ .......... .......... .......... ...111 Fast downloading................................................ .......111 Nokia PC Suite....... ................ ................... ................ ....111 Data cable....................................................................111 Infrared........................................................................112 Bluetooth.................................................................... .112 About Bluetooth.......................................................113 Se nd an d r ec ei v e d at a w it h B l ue too th ... .......... .....1 1 3 Pair devices............................. ..................................114 Security tips..............................................................115 SIM access profile........................................................115 Wireless LAN................................................................116 WLAN connections................... ............. ............. ......116 See WLAN availability........................ ........... ...........116 WLAN wizard...................... ................ .................... ..117 Modem.................................................. .......................118 Connection manager.......................... ............. ...........118 View and end active connections...........................118 Contents
Search for WLAN.......................................................119 Se c ur i t y an d d at a m a na g e me n t ........... ...1 2 0 Lock the device.................. ........................ ..................120 Memory card security...................... .............. .............120 Encryption................. ............................ .......................121 Encrypt device memory or memory ca rd...............121 De cr yp t d ev ic e m e mo ry or me mo ry c ard .............. 1 21 Fixed dialling...............................................................122 Certificate manager....................................... .............122 View certificate details......................... ...................123 Certificate trust settings..........................................123 Security modules........... ................ ................... ...........123 Vie w and edi t sec uri ty m odul es. ............. ............ ...12 4 Back up data.......................................... ......................124 Remote configuration......................... ................ .......124 Application manager..................................................125 Install applicati ons................. ...................... ............126 Installation settings. ................................................126 Java security settings. ..............................................126 Activation keys............................................................127 Use activation keys....................... ............ .............. .127 Data synchronisation. ............................... ..................128 Create a synchronisation profile.... .........................129 Sel ect a ppl ica tion s to sync hro nise ........ .......... ....... 129 Synchronisation connection setting s.....................129 Mobile VPN................................... ................................130 Manage VPN..............................................................130 Create VPN access points.........................................130 Us e a VP N c on ne c tio n i n an ap pl i ca ti on .......... ...... 13 1 Barcode reader............................................. ...............131 Settings............................... .....................133 General settings................................................. .........133 Personalisation settings..........................................133 Display settings........................... ................ ..........133 Standby mode settings.........................................134 Tone settings................................................ .........134 Language setting s.................................................134 Notification light....................................... ............135 Settings for One-touch keys.............. ......... ......... .135 Date and time setting s.............. .................... ..........135 Slide settings............................................... .............135 Enhancement settin gs............................................ .136 Common enhancement settin gs..........................136 E-mail key settings.......................................... .........136 Security settings. ..................................................... .136 Device and SIM card security............................... .136 Restore original settings................................. ........137 Telephone settings........................................ .............137 Call settings...... ....................... ................. ................. 137 Network settings........ ........................... ...................137 Connection settings....................................................138 Access points...................... ................ ..................... .138 Pac ket d ata (GP RS) s ett ings ....... ........ ........... .......... 139 WLAN settings........................ ................. ............. ....139 Advanced WLAN settings.........................................139 WLAN security sett ings............................................140 WEP security settings .................... ................. ..........140 WEP key settings......................................................140 802.1x security setting s.......... ........ ........ ........ ........140 WPA security setting s.................... ................. .........141 Wireless LAN plugins. ................ ................. ..............141 EAP plug-ins............................................. ..............141 Contents
Use EAP plug-ins................................................ ....141 Se ss io n i ni ti a ti on pr ot oc ol ( SI P) se tt in gs ..............1 42 Edit SIP profiles.................. ............ ............. .............142 Edit SIP proxy servers..................... ................ ..........142 Edit registration servers............................... ...........143 Net call settings.......... ................................. .............143 Configuration settings.............................................143 Restrict packet data.......................................... .......143 Application settings...... ..............................................144 Shortcuts.................................... ..............145 General shortcuts........................................................ 145 Glossary.......................... ..........................147 No ki a o ri g in al en ha nc e me nts .................15 1 Battery......... ................ ................ ...................... ...........151 Trou ble shoo ti ng... ......... ........ ......... ....... ..152 Battery and charger infor mation.............155 Batt ery and cha rger inf orm ati on...... .......... ......... .....1 55 Nok ia ba tte ry au the nti cati on gu idel in es................ .156 Authenticate hologram.................... .............. .........156 What if your battery is no t authentic?...................157 Care and main tena nce... .................. ........1 58 Addi tio nal s af ety i nfo rmat ion ............. ....159 Small children... ....................... .............................. ......159 Operating environment... ..................... ......................159 Medical devices................. ..................... ................ .....159 Implanted medical devices................ ........... ......... .159 Hearing aids........ .......................... ...................... ......160 Vehicles........................................................................160 Pote nti all y ex plo sive env iron men ts.........................1 61 Emergency calls.......................... .................................161 CERT IFICA TION INFO RMATIO N (S AR)... ................ ........1 62 MANU FAC TURE RâÂÂS LIM ITED WARR ANT Y......1 63 Warranty period........ ................................ ..................163 How to get wa rra nty serv ice.. ......... .......... ......... .......1 64 What is not covered?..................................................164 Other important notices.......... ......................... ..........165 Limi tat ion of No kia 's li ab ilit y..... .......... .............. ....... 166 Statutory obligations ..................... ........................ .....166 Index........................................................168 Contents
Safety Read these simple guidelines. Not following them may be dangerous or illegal. Re ad the complete user guide for further information. SWITCH ON SAFELY Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. INTERFERENCE All wireless devices may be suscepti ble to interference, which could affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN R ESTRICTED AREAS Follow any restrictions. Switch the device off in aircraft, near medical equipment, fuel, chemicals, or blasting area s. QUALIFIED SERVICE Only qualified personnel may install or repair this product. ENHANCEMENTS AND BATTERIES Use only approved enhancements and batteries. Do not conn ect incompatible products. WATER-RESISTAN CE Your device is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. About your device The wireless device described in this guide is approved for use on the (E)GSM 850, 900, 1800, and 1900 networks, and UMTS 900/2100 HSDPA networks. Contact your service provider for more information about netw orks. When using the features in this device, obey all laws and respect local customs, privacy and legitimate rights of others, including copyrights. Copyright protection may pr event some images, music, and other content from being copied, modified, or transferred. Your device supports severa l methods of connectivity. Like computers, your device may be exposed to viruses and other harmful content. Exercise caution with messages, con nectivity reques ts, browsing, and downloads. Only install an d use services and other software from trustworthy sources that offer adequate security and protection against harmfu l software, such 10 Safety
as applications that are Symb ian Signed or have passed the Java Verified⢠testing. Co nsider installing antivirus and other security software on your device and any connected computer. Your device may have preinstalled bookmarks and links for third-party inte rnet sites. Yo u may also acce ss other third-party sites throu gh your device. Third-part y sites are not affiliated with Nokia, and Nokia does not endorse or assume liability for them. If you choose to access such sites, y ou should take precau tions for security or content. Warning: To use any features in this device, other than the alarm c lock, the device m ust be switched on. Do not switch the device on when wireless device use may cause interference or danger. The office applications support common features of Microsoft Word, PowerPoint, and Excel (Microsoft Office 2000, XP, and 2003). Not all file formats can be vi ewed or modified. Remember to make ba ck-up copies or keep a wr itten record of all important information stored in your device. When connecting to any other device, read its user guide for detailed safety in structions. Do not connect incompatible products. The images in this guide may differ from your device display. Network services To use the device you must have service from a wireless service provider. Many of the features require special network features. These features are not available on all networks; other networks may require that you make specific arrangements with your service provider before you can use the network services . Using network services involves tr ansmission of data. Check with your service provider for details about fees in your home network and wh en ro aming on other networks. Your service provider can give you instructions and explain what charges will a pply. Some networks ma y have limitations tha t affect how you ca n use network services. For instance, some networks ma y not support all language-d ependent charact ers and servic es. Your service provider may have request ed that certain features be disabled or not activated in your device. If so, these features will not appear on your device menu. Your device may also have a s pecial configurati on such as changes in menu names, menu order, and icons. Contact your service provider for more information. This device supports WAP 2.0 protocols (HTTP and SSL) that run on TCP/IP protocols. Some features of this device, such as e-mail, browsing, and multimedia messaging (MMS), require network support for these technologies. 11 Safety
Battery removing Always switch the device off and disconnect the charger before removing the battery. 12 Safety
E66 in brief Model number: Nokia E66-1 (RM-343). Hereinafter referred to as Nokia E66. Key features Your new Eseries dev ice helps you manage your business and personal inform ation in and out of office. Some of the key features are highlighted here: Switch from business to personal mode. Browse the internet, find blogs and receive news feeds with Web . Listen to mu sic with Musi c player . Get podcasts to your device with Po dcastin g . Add new applications to your device with Downloa d! Find points of interest with Maps . Access your e-mail while on the move. Stay up-to-date and plan your meeti ngs with Calendar . Manage your busine ss partners and free ti me friends with the new Co ntacts application. Make calls using voice over IP services with Internet tel . . Connect to WLAN with WLAN wiz. . View documents, spreadsheets, and presentations with Quickoffice . 13 E66 in brief
Keys and parts 1 â Power key 2 â Earpiece 3 â Light sen sor 4 â Selection key. Press the selection key to perform the function shown abov e it on the display. 5 â Call key 6 â Press the key for a few secon ds to switch on Bluetooth connectivity. When writ ing text, press the key and select More symbols to access special characters. 7 â Microphone 8 â Camera (video calls only) 9 â Navi⢠scroll key, hereafter ref erred to as the scroll key. Press the scroll key to enter a selection, to scroll left, right, up, and down on the display. A long press left, right, up, or down accelerates the scrolling. 10 â End key. Press the end key to reject a call, end active calls and held calls, and with a long keypress, end data connections. 11 â Backspace key. Press the key to delete items. 12 â Shift key. When writing text, press and hold the key and select the text with the scroll key . Press this key for a few seconds to toggle between the Silent a nd General profiles. 13 â Charger connector 14 E66 in brief
1 â Volume up key 2 â Voice key. Press the voice key to mute and unmute the active call. This key is also used in the Voice commands and Push to talk applications. 3 â Volume down key 4 â Capture key 5 â Release button 6 â Headset connector 7 â Micro-USB port 8 â Infrared port 1 â Home key 2 â Contacts key 3 â Calendar key 4 â E-mail key Key moves Your device rotates the display automatica lly when you move it and responds to tapping and turning. Scroll key lights notify you of even ts, and the slide enables answering and ending calls and lock ing the keypad. Automatic display rotation In all applications, the s creen rotates automa tically from portrait to landscape when you turn the de vice to the left. For example, if yo u are browsing the web and turn the device to t he left, the image rota tes accordingly and changes to full scre en. To display the control and status p anes, press e ither select ion key. The image changes to full screen in RealPlayer, browser, and image viewer. To turn off t he automati c display ro tation or changing to full screen, select Menu > To ols > Settings > General > Personalisation > Display > Disp lay rotation or Turn to full view . Silence the device To set calendar and clock alarms t o snooze and to silence incoming calls, turn the device face down. You can also silence the device by ta pping it twice. T o turn on silencing by tapping, select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Person alisation > Tones > Tap to silence > On . 15 E66 in brief
To turn off silencing by tapping or turning, select Menu > To ols > Settings > General > Personalisation > Tones > Tap to silenc e or Turn to silence . Scroll key lights When you receive a message or miss a call, the scroll key starts b linki ng to indi cate the event. When the display light turns off, th e scroll key starts blinking slowly. To set the leng th of time for blinking for mis sed events or to select of which events you want to be notified, select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > Notification light . To turn off slow blinking, select Menu > Tools > Profiles and a profile. Select Personal ise > Breathi ng li ght . Slide function When the device or keypad is locked, calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. To open or close the full-size keypad, push the slide up or down . To lock the keypad, close the slide. To unlock the keypad, open the slide. Tip: To unlock the keypad without opening the slide, press the left and then the right selection key. To answer a call, open the slide. To end the call, close the slide, un less you have a headset connected to the device, or you select Options before closing the keypad. To change the slide settings, select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Slide handli ng . The keypad of your device locks automatically to prevent the keys from bein g accidentally pressed. To change the period after which the keypad is locked, select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Security > Phone and SIM card > Keypad autol ock period . 16 E66 in brief
Set up your device Set up your E66 followi ng these instructions. Insert the SIM card and battery 1. With the back of the device facing you, press the release buttons (1) and slide the back cover off (2). 2. If the battery is inserted , lift the battery in the direction of the arrow to remove it. 3. Insert the SIM card. Make sure that the contact area on the card is facing th e connectors on the device and that the bevelled corner is facing the top of the devic e. 4. Insert the battery. Align the conta cts of the battery with the corresponding connectors on the battery compartment and insert in the direction of the arrow. 17 Set up your device
5. Slide the back cover back to place. Charge the battery 1. Connect a compatible charger to a wall outlet. 2. Connect the power cord to the device. If the battery is completely discharged, it may take a while before the charging indicator starts scrolling. 3. When the battery is fully charged, disconnect the charger from the device, th en from the wall outlet. Your battery has been precharged at the factory, but the charging levels may vary. To reach the full operation time, charge th e battery until it has been fully charged according to the battery level indicator. Tip: If you have old compatible Nokia chargers, you can use them with the Nokia E66 by attaching the CA-4 4 charger adapter to the old charger. The adapter is av ailable as a separate enhancement. Insert the memory card Use a memory card to sav e the memory on your device. You can also back up information from your device to the memory card. Memory card may already be inserted in your device. Memory cards are also availa ble as separate enhancements. 1. With the back of the device facing you, press the release buttons (1) a nd slid e the back cover off (2). 18 Set up your device
2. Insert the memory card in the slot with the contact area first. Make sure that the contact area is facing the connectors on the device. 3. Push the card in until it locks into place. 4. Close the back cover. Eject the memory card Important: Do not remove the memo ry card in the middle of an operation when the card is being accessed. Removing the card in the middle of an operation may damage the memory card a s well as the device, and data stored on the card may be corrupted. 1. Press the power key briefly, and select Remove memory card . 2. Press the release buttons and slide off the back cover. 3. Press the end of the memory c a r d t o r e l e a s e i t f r o m the memory card slot. 4. Close the back cover. Connect the headset Warning: When you use the heads et, your ability to hear outside sounds may be a ffected. Do not use th e headset where it can endanger your safety. Connect the comp atible headset to the headset connector of your device. Attach the wrist strap Thread the wrist stra p as shown, an d tighten it. 19 Set up your device
Antennas Your device may have intern al an d external antenn as. As with any radio transmi tting device, avoid touching the antenna area unnecessa rily while the antenna is transmitting or receiving. Contact with such an antenna affect s the commun ication quality and may cause the device to operate at a higher power level than otherwise needed an d may reduce the battery life. 20 Set up your device
Get started After you have set up your device, switch it on and start to explore what is new in Eseries. First start-up 1. Press and hold the power key . 2. If the device asks for a PIN code or lock code, enter the code, and select OK . 3. When prompted, enter the country in which you are located and t he current date and time. To find you r country, enter the first letters of the country name. It is important to select the correct country, because scheduled calendar entries may change if you change the cou ntry later and the new country is located on a different time zone. The Welcome application opens. 4. Select from the various options, or Exit to close the application. To configure the various settings in your device, use the wizards available on th e home screen and in the Settings wizard application. When you swi tch the device on, it may recognise the SIM card provider and configure some settings automatically. You can also contact your service provider for the correct settings. You can switch the device on without inserting the SIM card. The device star ts up in the offline mode, and yo u cannot use the network-dependent p hone functions. To switch the device off, press and hold the power key. Welcome When you switch on your device for the first time, the Welcome application opens. Select from the following: ⢠Tutorial provides information about your device and shows you ho w to use it. ⢠Switch enables you to transfer content, such as contacts a nd calendar entries, from a com patible Nokia device. See "Transfer content between device s" , p. 24 . ⢠E-mail settings helps you configure e-mail settings. ⢠Sett. wizard helps you configure various settings. See "Settings wizard" , p. 22 . 21 Get started
⢠Operator contains a link to your operator's home portal. To open the Welcome application later, select Menu > Help > Welcome . The available items may vary between regions. Settings wizard Select Menu > Tools > Sett. wizard . Settings wizard configures your device for settings based on your network operator information. To use these services, you may have to cont act your service provider to activate a data connection or other services. The availability of t he di fferent settings items in Settings wizard depends on th e features of the device, SIM card, wireless service provider, and the availability of the data in t he Sett ings wizard database. If Settings wizard is not av ailable from your service provider, it may not appear in the menu of your device. To start the wizard, s elect Start . When you use the wizard for the first time, you are g uided through the settings configuration. If there is no SIM card inserted, you need to select the home country of your service provider, and your service provider. If the country or service provider suggested by the wizard is not correct, select the correct one from the list. If the settings configuration is interrupt ed, the settings are not defined. To access the main view of the Settings wizard after the wizard has finished the se ttings configuration, select OK . In the main view, select Options and from the following: ⢠Operator â Configure operator-specific settings such as MMS, internet, WAP, and stream ing settings. ⢠E-mail setup â Configure e-mail sett ings. ⢠Push to talk â Co nfigure push- t o-talk settings. ⢠Video sharing â Configure video sharing setti ngs. If you are not able to use Setting s wizard, visit the Nokia phone settings web site. Home screen From the home screen you can quickly access features that you use the most, and see at a glance any missed calls or new messages. 22 Get started
You can define two s eparate home screens for different purposes, such as on e screen to show your busin ess e- mail and notification s, and another to sh ow your personal e-mail. This way, you do not have to see business-related messages outside office hours. Menu Select Menu . The menu is a starting point from which you can open all applications in the device or on a memory card. The menu cont ains applications and folders, which are groups of similar applications. All applications you install in the device yourself are by default saved in the Installations folder. To open an application, scroll to it, and press t he scroll key. To view the applications in a list, select Options > Change Menu view > List . To return to the grid view, select Options > Change Menu view > Grid . To view the memory consumption of different applications and data stored on the device or memory card and to check the amount of free memory, select Options > Memory details . To create a new folder, select Options > New folder . To rename a new folder, select Options > Rename . To rearrange the folder, scroll to the application you want to move, and s elect Options > Move . A check mark is placed beside the application. Scroll to a new location, and select OK . To move an application to a different folder, scroll to the applicati on you want to move, an d select Options > Move to folder , the new folder, and OK . To download applications from the web, select Options > Download applications . Transfer content from other devices Select Menu > Tools > Switch . You can transfer content, such as contacts, from a compatible Nokia device t o your new Eseries device using different connectivity methods. The typ e of content that can be tran sf erred depends on the device model. If the other device supports synchronisation, you can also s ynchronise data between the two devices or send data from this device to the other device. When you transfer data from your previous device, it may require you to insert the SIM card. Your new Eseries 23 Get started
device does not need a SI M c ard when transferring data. Content is copied from the memory of the other device to the corresponding location in your device. Copying time depends on the amount of data to be transferred. You can also cancel and continue later. The necessary step s for data transfer may v ary depending on your device, and whether you h ave interrupted data transfer ea rlier. The items that you can transfer vary depending on the other device. Transfer content between devices To connect the two devices, follow the instructions on the display. For some de vice models, the Switch application is sent to the ot her device as a messag e. To install Switch on the othe r device, open the message, and follow the instructions on the display. On your new Eseries device, select the content you want to copy from the other device. After the da ta transfer , you can sav e the short cut with the transfer settings to the ma in view to repeat the same transfer later. To edit the shortcu t, select Options > Shortcut settings . View transfer log A transfer log is shown after every tran sfer. To view the transfer details, scroll to the tran sferred item in the log, and select Options > Details . To view the log of a previous transfer, scroll to a transfer shortcut, i f availa ble, in the main view, and select Options > View log . Any unresolved transfer conflicts are also displayed in the log view. To start so lving conflicts, select Options > Solve conflicts . Synchronise, retrieve, and send data If you have previously transferred data to you r device with the Switch application, select from the following icons in the Switch main view: Synchronise data with a compatible device if the other device supports synchronisation. With synchronisation, you can keep the data up-to-date in both devic es. Retrieve data from the other device to your new Eseries device. Send data from your new Eseries device to your other dev ice. 24 Get started
Common actions in several applications You can find the following actions in several applications: To change the profile, or switch off or lock the device, press the power key briefly. If an application consists of several tabs (see figure), open a tab by s crolling right or left. To save the settings tha t you have configu red in an application, select Back . To save a file, select Options > Save . There are different saving options depending on the application you use. To send a file, select Options > Send . You can send a file in an e-mail or multimedia message, or us ing different connectivity methods. To copy, press and hold the shi ft key, and select the text with the scroll key. Press and hold the shift key, and select Copy . To paste, scroll to where you want to paste the text, press and hold the shift key, and select Paste . This method may not wo rk in applications that have their own c opy and paste commands . To select different items, such as message s, files, or contacts, scroll to the item you want to select. Select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark to select one item or Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark all to select all items. Tip: To select al most a ll items, first select Option s > Mark/Unmark > Mark all , then select the items you do not want, and Options > Mark/Unmark > Unmark . To select an object (for example, an attachment in a document) scroll to the object so that square markers appear on each side of the object. Display indicators The device is being us ed in a UMTS network (network service). The battery charge level. The higher the bar, the stronger the char ge in the battery. You have one or more unread messages in the Inbox folder in Messaging. You have received new e-mail in the remote mailbox. 25 Get started
There are messages waiting to be sent in the Outbox folder in Messaging. You have one or more missed phone calls. The keys of the device are locked. An alarm is act ive. You have selected the Si lent profile, and the device does not ring for an incoming call or message. Bluetooth is active. Data is being transm itted using Bluetooth connectivity. When the indica tor is blinking, your device is trying to connect w ith another device. An infrared connection is active. If the indicator blinks, your device is trying to connect to t he other device, or the connection has been lost. A GPRS packet data co nnection is available (network service). If the icon is , the connection is active. If the icon is , the connection is on hold. An EGPRS packet data connection is available (network service). If the icon is , the connection is active. If the icon is , the connection is on hold. A UMTS packet data connection is available (network service). If the icon is , the connection is active. If the icon is , the connection is on hold. High-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA) is supported and available (network service). The icon may vary between re gions. If the icon is , the connection is active. If the icon is , the connection is on hold. You have set the device to scan for WLANs, and a WLAN is available. A WLAN connection is active in a network th at does not have encryption. A WLAN connection is active in a network th at has encryption. Your device is connected to a computer with a USB data cable. The second phone line is being used (network service). 26 Get started
All calls are forwarded to another number. If you have two phone lines, a number indicates the active line. A headset is connected to the device . The connection to a headset with B luetooth connectivity has been lost. A hands-free car kit is connected to the device. A loopset is connected to the device. A text phone is connected to the device. Your device is synchronising. You have an ongoing pu sh-t o-talk connection. Your push-to-talk connection is in the do not disturb mode, because the ringing type setting of your device is set to Beep once or Silent , or you have an incoming or ongoing phone call. In this mo de, you canno t make PTT calls. Volume control To adjust the earpiece vo lume during a phone call or the volume of th e media ap plications, use the volume keys. Memory There are two types of memo ry into wh ich you can sav e data or install applica t ions: device memory and memory card. Free memory To see how much memory is currently in use, how much free memor y remains, and how much mem ory is consumed by each data type, select Menu > Options > Memory details > Phone memo ry or Memory card . Tip: To ensure that you have adequate memory, transfer data regularly to a memory card or computer, or use File manager to delete files you no longer need. After you install app lications to a compatible memory card, installation files (.sis, .sisx) remain in the device memory. The files may use large amounts of memory and prevent you from storin g other files. To maintain sufficient memory, use Nokia PC Suite to back up installation files to a comp atible PC, then use the file manager to rem ove the inst allation files from the 27 Get started
device memory. If the .sis file is a message attach ment, delete the message from the Messag ing inbox. Memory card Select Menu > Tools > Memory . If you cannot use a memory card in your device, you may have the wrong type of memory card, the card may not be formatted for your device, or the card has a corrupted file system. Your Nokia device supports the FAT16 and FAT32 file system for memory cards. MicroSDHC This device uses microSD and microSDH C memory cards. To ensure interope rability, use only compatible memory cards with this device. Check the compatibility of a memory card with its manufacturer or provider. Other memory cards than microSD and microSDHC cards are not compatible with this device. Using an incompatible memory card may damage the memory card as well a s the device, and data stored on the incompati ble card may be corrupted. Use a memory card To format a memory card for your device, select Options > Format memory card . When a memory card is formatted, all d ata on the card is lost permanently. Consult your retailer to find out if you must format the memory card before you can use it. To change the name of the memory card, select Options > Memory card name . Write text The input methods provided in the device may vary according to different sales markets. Traditional text input is shown on the top right of the display when you are writing text using traditional text input. and indicate the selected case. indicates that the first letter of the sen tence is written in uppercase and all the other letters are autom atically written in lowercase. indicates the number mode. To write text with the keypad, press a number key 2-9 repeatedly until the desired character appears. There are more characters available for a number key than are printed on the key. If the next letter is located on the same key as the pr esent one, wait until the cursor appears, and enter the letter. To insert a number, press and hold the number key. To switch between the uppe r and lower case mode and the number mode, press # . To erase a character, pres s the backspace key. Press and hold the backspace key to erase more than one character. 28 Get started
To access the most common pu nctuation marks , press the 1 key. Press 1 repeatedly to reach the desired punctuation mark. To add special char acters, press * . Scroll to the desired character and press the scroll key. To insert a space, press 0 . To move the cu rsor to the next line, press 0 three times . To switch between the differe nt character cases, press # . Predictive text input 1. To activate predictive text in put, press # twice quickly. This activates predictive te xt input for all editors in the device. The indicator is shown on the display. 2. To write the desired word, press 2-9 . Press each key only once for one letter. 3. When you have finished writing the word and it is correct, scroll right to confirm it, or press 0 to add a space. If the word is not correct, press * repeatedly to view the matching words the dictiona ry has found. If the ? character i s shown after the word, the word you intended to write is not in the dictionary. To add a word to the di ctionary, select Sp ell , enter the word (up to 32 letters) using tra ditional text input, and select OK . The word is added to the dictionary. When the dictionary is fu ll, the new word replaces the oldest added word. Write the first half of a compound word; to confirm it, scroll right. Write the la st part of th e compound w ord. To complete the compound word, press 0 to ad d a space. To switch predictive text input off for all e ditors in the device, press # twice quickly. Change the writing language When you are writing t ext, you can change th e writing language. For example , if you press the 6 key repeatedly to reach a specific character, ch anging the writing language gives you access to charac ters in a different order. If you are writing text usin g a non-Latin alp habet and want to wri te Latin charac ters, for example e-mail or web addresses, you may need to ch ange the writing language. To change th e writing language , select Options > Writing language , a nd a writing language that u ses Latin chara cters. Further information Instructions in yo ur device To read instructions for th e current view of the open application , select Options > Help . To browse the help topics an d conduct searches, s elect Menu > Help > Help . You can select categories for 29 Get started
which you want to see instru ct ions. Sel ect a categ ory, such as Messaging, to see what ins tructions (hel p topics) are available. Whil e you are reading the topic, scroll left or right to s ee the other topics in that category . To switch between the application and help, press and hold the home key. Tutorial The tutorial provides you information about your device an d shows yo u how to use it. Sele ct Menu > Help > Tutorial . 30 Get started
New from Eseries Your new Eseries device contains new versions of the Calendar and Contac ts applications, as well as a new home screen. Access tasks quickly Whenever you see the icon on the home screen, or in the Contacts or Calendar applications, scroll right to access a list of available actions. To close the list, scroll left. When you navigate in thes e applications, to go back to the previous level, scroll left. Home screen From the home screen you can quickly access featur es that you use the most, and s ee at a glance any missed calls or new messages. Navigate in the home screen To access the home screen, press the home key briefly. The home screen consists of: ⢠application shortcuts (1) To access an application quickly, scroll to its shortcut and press the scroll key. ⢠information area (2) To check an item displayed in the information area, scroll to the item a nd press the scroll key. ⢠notifications (3 ) To view the notifications, scroll to a box. Each box is only visi ble if there are items in it. To hide the boxes, press the backspac e key. Work on the home screen To check your received messages, scroll to the message box in the notification area . To read a message, scroll 31 New from Eseries
to it and press the scroll ke y. To access other ta sks, scroll right. To view your missed calls , sc roll to the calls box in the notification area. To return a call, scroll to a call and press the call key. To send a text messag e to a caller, scroll to a call, scroll right and select Send text msg. from the list of available actions. To listen to your voice mail, sc roll to the voice mail box in the notification area. Scroll to the desired voice mailbox and press the call key to call it. Switch home screens You can define two home screen modes for different purpos es, such a s on e mod e to show your bu siness e- mail and notifications, and another to show your personal e-mail. This way, you do not have to se e business-related mes sages outside office hours. Your operator may have set you a third home screen with operator-specific items. To change from one home screen mode to another, scroll to and press the scroll key. One-touch keys With the One-touch keys you can a ccess applications and tasks quickly. Each key has been assigned an application and a task. To change these, select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > One-touch keys . Your network operator may have assigned applications to the keys, in whi ch case you cannot cha nge them . 1 â Home key 2 â Contacts k ey 3 â Calendar key 4 â E-mail key Home key To access the home screen, pr ess the home key briefly. Press the home key briefly aga in to access the menu. To view the list of active applications, press the home key for a few seconds. When the list is open, press the home key briefly to scroll the list. T o open the selected application, press t he home key for a few seconds, or press the scroll key. To close the selected application, press the backspace key. Leaving applications runn ing in the backgr ound increases the demand on battery power and reduces the battery life. 32 New from Eseries
Contacts key To open the Contacts application, press the contacts key briefly. To create a new contact, press t he contacts key for a few seconds. Calendar key To open the Calendar appl ication, press the calendar key briefly. To create a new meeting entr y, press the calendar key for a few seconds. E-mail key To open your default m ail box, press the e-mail key briefly. To create a new e-mail message, press the e-mail key for a few seconds. Nokia Calendar for Eseries Select Menu > Office > Calendar . Create and view scheduled events and appointments, and switch between diffe rent calendar views. Calendar views You can switch between the following views: ⢠Month view shows the current month and the calendar entries of the selected day in a list. ⢠Week view shows the events for the selected week in seven day boxes. ⢠Day view shows the events for the selected day grouped into time slots according to their starting time. ⢠To-do view shows all to-do items. ⢠Agenda view shows the even ts for the selected day in a list. To change the view, select Options > Change view and the desired view. Tip: To open the week view, scroll to a week number and press the scroll key. Tip: To switch between views, press * . To move to the next or the previou s day in month, week, day, and agenda view s, scroll right or left. To change the default view, select Opti ons > Settings > Default view . 33 New from Eseries
View calendar information In the month view, calendar entries are marked with a triangle. Annivers ary entries are also marked with an exclamation mark. The entries of the selected day are shown in a li st. To open calendar entries, open a calendar view , scroll to an entry, and press the scroll key. Create calendar entries You can create the following types of calendar entries: ⢠Meeting entries remind you of events that have a specific date and time. ⢠Memo ent ries are related to the whole day but not to a specific time of the day. ⢠Anniversary entries remind you of birthdays and special dates. They refer to a ce rtain day but not a specific time of the day. Anniversary entries are repeated every year. ⢠To-do entries remind you of a task that has a due date but not a specif ic time of the day. To create a calendar entry, scroll to a date, select Options > New entry and the entry type. Tip: To create a meeting entry, start entering the subject. Create meeting, memo, anniversary, or to-do entries 1. Enter the subject. 2. For meeting entries, enter the start an d end times, or select All-day event . 3. For meeting and memo entries, enter the st art and end dates. For anniversar y entries, enter the date and for to-do entries, enter the due da te. 4. For meeting entries, enter the location. 5. For meeting, anniversary, and to-do entries, you can set an alarm. 6. For recurring meeting entries, set the recurrence time. 7. For to-do entries, set the priority. To se t the priority for meeting entries, select Options > Priority . 8. For memo, annivers ary, and to-do en tries, define how the entr y is handled during syn chronisation. Select Priva te to hide the entry from viewers if the calendar is available o nline, Public to make the entry visible to viewers, or None to not copy the entry to your computer. 9. Enter a description. To send the entry, select Options > Send . 34 New from Eseries
Calendar settings Select Options > Settings . To change the alarm tone, select Calendar alarm tone . To change the view disp la yed when you open the calendar, select Default view . To change the first da y of the week, select We ek starts on . To change the week view title, select Week view title and Week number or Week dates . Nokia Contacts for Eseries Select Menu > Communic. > Contacts . Save and update contact in formation, such as phone numbers, home a ddresses, or e-mail addres ses of your contacts. You can a dd a personal ringing tone or a thumbnail imag e to a contact. You can als o create contact groups, which allow you to commu nicate with several contacts at the same tim e, and send contact information (business cards) to or receive it from compatible devices. Whenever you see the icon, scroll right to access a list of available actions. To close the list, scroll left. Add contacts Select Options > New contact , and enter the contact's information. To copy a contact's information from the memory card, select Options > Copy > Fr om memor y card . Contact groups Select each contact you want to a dd to the contact group, press # to mark it, select Options > Grou p > Add to group > Cre ate new g roup > Group name , and enter a name for the g roup. If you want to make conference calls to the group, define also the following: ⢠Conf. service num ber â Enter the conference call service number. ⢠Conf. servi ce ID â Enter the conference call ID number. ⢠Conf. servi ce PIN â Enter the conference call PIN code numb er. To make a conference call to the group, select the group, scroll right, and select Call conf. service from the list of available action s. Search for contacts To search for contacts, start en tering the contact's name in the search field. 35 New from Eseries
To switch to the predictive search mode, select Options > Acti vate predict. se arch . To search for contacts in the predictive search mode, enter the beginning of the contact' s name in the search field. To move to the next hit with the same alphabetical combination of letters, press * . Manage contacts director ies If you have installed contacts directories, to change the contacts directory, scroll to the top of the names list, press the scroll key, and se lect from the list of available direct orie s. To organise contacts directories, select Options > Organise contact lists and a direc tory. Scroll up to move it to the desired place. Add ringing tones for contacts You can set a ringing tone for a contact or contact group. The ringing tone so unds when the contact calls you. To add a ringing tone for contacts , open a contact, select Options > Ringing tone and a ringing tone. To add a ringing tone for cont act groups, select a contact grou p, Options > Group > Ringing tone and a ringing tone. To remove the assigned ringing t one, sel ect Defa ult tone from the list of ringing tones. Change contacts settings Select Options > Settings . To change the way the cont acts' names are displayed, select Name display . To select which contacts directory opens when you open the Contacts app lication, select Default contact list . Multitasking You can have several ap pl ications open at the same time. To switch between ac ti ve applications, press and hold the home key, scroll to an applicat ion, and press the scroll key. To close the selected application, press the backspace key. Example: When you have an active phone call and want to check your ca lendar, press the home key to access the menu, and open the Calendar application. The phone call remains active in the background. Example: When you ar e writing a messag e and want to check a web site , press t he home key to access the m enu, and op en the Web application. Select a bookmark or enter the web address manually, and select Go to . To return to your 36 New from Eseries
message, pres s and hold the home key, scroll to the message and press the scroll key. 37 New from Eseries
Personalisation You can personalise your device by adjusting the various tones, backgrou nd images, and screen savers, for example. Profiles Select Menu > Tools > Profiles . You can adjust and customis e the ringing tones, alert tones, and other device tones for di fferent events, environments, or caller groups. The profile currently in use is shown at the top of the display on the home screen. However, if the active profile is General, only today's date is shown. To create a new profile, select Options > Create new , and defin e the settings. To customise a profile, select a profile and Options > Persona lise . To change a profile, select a profile and Options > Activate . The Offline profile prev ents your device from accidentally switching on , sending or receiving messages, or using wireless LA N, Bluetooth, GPS, or FM radio; it also closes any i nternet connection that may be in operation when the prof ile is selected. The Offline profile does not prevent you from establishing a wireless LAN or Bluetooth co nnection at a later time, or from re starting the GPS or FM radi o, so com ply wit h any applicable safety requiremen ts when establishing and using these features. To delete a profile that you created, select Opt ions > Delete profile . Yo u cannot delete the predefined profiles. Select ringing tone s To set a ringing tone for a profile, select Optio ns > Personalis e > Ringing ton e . Select a ringing tone from the list, or select Download sounds to open a bookmark folder containing a list of bookmarks for downloading tones using th e browser. Any downloaded tones are saved to Gallery. To play the ringing ton e fo r a select ed conta ct group only, select Option s > Personal ise > Alert for , and select the desired group. Phone calls coming from outside that group ha ve a silent alert. To change the message tone, select Options > Personalis e > Message alert tone . 38 Personalisation
Customise profiles Select Options > Personalise , and define the following: ⢠Ringing tone â Select a ringing tone from the list, or sel ect Download sounds to open a bookmark folder containing a list of bookmarks for downloading tones using the browser. If you have two alternate phone lines in use, you can specify a ringing ton e for ea ch line . ⢠Video call tone â Select a r inging tone for video calls. ⢠Say caller's name â When you select this option and someone from your cont acts list calls you, the device so unds a rin ging tone that is a combi nation of the spoken name of th e contact and the selected ringing tone. ⢠Ringing type â Select how you want the ringing tone to alert. ⢠Ringing volume â Select the volume level of the ringing tone. ⢠Message alert tone â Select a tone for received text messages. ⢠E-mail alert tone â Select a tone for received e- mail messages. ⢠Vibrating alert â Select whether you want the device to vibrate when you receive a call. ⢠Breathi ng li ght â Select whether you want the scroll key to start blinking slowly when the display light turns off. ⢠Keypad to nes â Set the volume level of the device keypad t ones. ⢠Warning tones â Set the warning tones on or off. This setting also affe cts the tones of some games and Java appl ications. ⢠Alert for â You can set the dev ice to ring only upon calls from phone numbers th at belong to a selected contact group. Phone calls coming from outside that group have a s ilent alert. ⢠Profile name â You ca n give a name to a new profile or rename an existing profile. The General and Offline profiles cannot be renamed. Personalise the home screen Select Menu > Tools > Modes . T o c h a n g e t h e n a m e o f t h e current home screen, select Mode name . To select which applicat ions and notifications you want to see on the home screen, select Home screen applicatio ns . To change the theme of th e home screen currently in use, select Theme . To change the background image of the home screen currently in use, select Wallpaper . To change from one home screen to another, select Switch mode . 39 Personalisation
Change the display theme Select Menu > Tools > Themes . To change the theme used in all applications, select the General folder. To change the theme used in the main menu, select the Menu view folder. To change the theme for a particular application, select the application-specific folder. To change the background image of the home screen, select the Wallpaper folder. To select an anim ation for th e screen saver, select the Power saver folder. Download a theme To download a theme, select General or Menu view > Download them es . Enter the link from which you want to download your theme. Once the theme is downloaded, you can preview, activate, or edit it. To preview a theme, select Options > Pre view . To start using the selected theme, select Options > Set . 3-D ringing tones Select Menu > Media > 3-D tones . To enable three-dimensional sound effects for ringing tones, select 3-D ring ing tone effects > On . No t all ringing tone s support 3âÂÂD effect s. To change the 3âÂÂD effect that is applied to the ringing tone, select Sound trajectory and the desired effect. To modify the 3âÂÂD effect, select from the following: ⢠Trajectory speed â Select the speed at which sound moves from one dire ction to another. This setting is not availa ble for all effects. ⢠Reverberatio n â To adjust the amount of echo, select the desired effect. ⢠Doppler effe ct â Select On to have the ringin g tone sound higher when you are closer to your device, and lower when yo u are farther away. This setting is not availa ble for all effects. To listen to the ringing tone with the 3âÂÂD effect, select Options > Play tone . To adjust the volume of the ringing tone, select Menu > Tools > Profil es > Op tions > Personalis e > Ringing v olume . 40 Personalisation
Media Your device contains a variety of media applicat ions for both business and leisure time use. For more information, see th e extended user guide on the web. Camera Select Menu > Media > Camera . Capture an image Your device supp orts an image capture resolution of up to 2048 x 1536 pixels. The image resolution in this guide may appear different. To capture an image, use the display as a viewfinder and press the scroll key. Th e device saves the image in Gallery. To zoom in or out before capturing an image, scroll up or down. This function is available only when the toolbar is not shown. The toolbar provides you with shortcuts to different items and settings before and after capturing an imag e or recording a video. Scroll to a toolbar item and press the scroll key. Switch between the video mode and the image mode. Select the scene. Select the flash mode (images only). Activate the self-timer (images only). Activate the sequen ce mode (ima ges only). Select a colour effect. Show or hide the viewfinder grid (images only). Adjust the white balance. Adjust the exposure compensation (images only). The available options vary depending on the capture mode and view you are in. The settings return to the default after you close the camera. Scenes A scene helps you to find the right colour and lighting settings for the current en vironment. The se ttings of 41 Media
each scene have been set a ccording to a certain style or environment. To change the scene, select Scene modes in t he toolbar. To make your own scene, scroll to User defined , and select Options > Change . To copy the settings of another scene, select Based on scene mod e and the desired scene. To activate your own scene, scroll to User define d , press the scroll key, and select Select . Capture images in a sequence To capture several images in a sequence, if enough memory is available, select Sequence mode in the toolbar and press the scroll key. The captured images are show n in a grid on the display. To view an image, scroll to it and press the scroll key. If you used a time int erval, only the last i mage is show n on the display, and the other images are av ailable in Gallery. To send the image, select Options > Send . To send the image to a caller during an active ca ll, select Options > Send to caller . To switch off the se quence mode, select Sequence mode > Single shot in the toolbar. View captured image The image you captured is au tomatically saved in Gallery. If you do not want to keep the image, select Delete from the toolbar. Select from the following toolbar items: ⢠Send â Send the imag e to compatible devices. ⢠Send to caller â Send the im age to the caller during an active call. ⢠Post to â Send the image to your comp atible online album (network service). To use the image as the background image, select Options > Set as wallpaper . To add the image t o a contac t, select Options > Set as contact call img. > Assign to contact . Record videos 1. If the camera is in the image mode, s elect the video mode from the toolbar. 2. To start recording, press the scroll key. 3. To pause recording at any time, select Pause . Select Continue to resume recording. 4. To stop recording, select Stop . The video clip is automatically saved in Gallery . The maximum length of the video clip depends on the available memory. 42 Media
Play a video clip To play a recorded video clip, select Play from the toolbar. Select from the following toolbar items: ⢠Send â Send the video clip to other compatible device s. ⢠Send to caller â Send the video clip to the caller during an active call. ⢠Post to â S end the video to an online album (network service). ⢠Delete â Delete the clip. To enter a new name for the clip, select Options > Rename video . Image setting s To change the still i mage settings, select Options > Settings and from the following: ⢠Image quality â S et the image quality. The better the image quality, the more memory the image consume s. ⢠Show captured image â To see the image a fter the capture, select On . To continue taking pictures immediately, select Off . ⢠Default i mage nam e â Define the default name for the captured images. ⢠Extended digital zoom â On (continuous) allows the zoom increm ents to be smoot h and continuous betw een th e digital and extended digital zoom, and Off allows a limited amount of zoom while retaining the image resolution. ⢠Capture tone â S e t t h e t o n e t h a t s o u n d s w h e n y o u capture an image. ⢠Memory in use â Choose where to store your images. ⢠Rotate image â Rotate th e images. ⢠Restore camera sett ings â To return the default values to the camera settings, se lect Yes . Video settings To change the video mode setting s, select Opt ions > Settings and from the following: ⢠Video quality â Set the quality of the video clip. Select Sharing , if you want to send the video clip using a multimedia message. The clip is recorded with CIF resolution, in 3GPP format, and the size is limited to 300 kB (approximately 20 seconds). You may not be able to send video clips saved in t he MPEG-4 file format in a multimedia message. ⢠Audio recording â S e l e c t Mute if you do not want to record sound. ⢠Show captured video â View the first frame of the recorded video clip after the recording stops. To view the entire video clip , select Play from the toolbar. ⢠Default video name â Define the default name for recorded video clips. ⢠Memory in use â Select where you want to store your video clips. 43 Media Q
⢠Restore camera settings â Restore the camera settings to the default values. Nokia Podcasting Select Menu > Media > Podcas ting . Download podcasts to your device and listen th em. Play and manage podcasts Podcasting delivers audio or video content over the internet for playback on mobile devices and PCs. With the Nokia Podcasting app lication, you can search, discover, subscribe, and do wnload podcasts over the air; and play, manage, and share podcast s with your devic e. Define the connection and downloading settings before using the applicati on. Select Options > Settings > Connection and Download . To search for new podcast episodes to subscrib e to, select Directories . To search for podcasts us ing keywords and podcast show titles, select Search . To display the available ep isodes from the selected podcast, open the Podcasts folder and select Open . To download the selected episode, select Do wnload . To play the downloaded episode, select Play . To update the selected podcast or marked podcas ts, for a new episode, select Opti ons > Update . To open the web site of th e podcast (network service), select Options > Open web pag e . Some podcasts provide th e opportunity to interact with the creators by commenting and voting. To connect to the internet to do this, s elect Options > View comments . Directories Select Directories . Directories help you find new podcast episodes to which to subscribe. Contents of the directories change. Se lect the desired directory folder to update it (network service). The colour of the folder changes, when the update is complete . To subscribe to a podcast, scroll t o the podcast title and select Update . After you have subscribed to episodes of a podcast, you can download, manage , and play them in the podcasts menu. To add a new directory or folder, select Options > New > We b directory or Folder . Select a title, URL of the .opml (outline processo r markup language) file, and Done . To import an .opml file stored on your device, select Options > Import OPML file . 44 Media
To save a received .opml file , open the file to save the file into the Received folder in Directories. Open the folder to subscribe to any of the links to add t o your podcast s. Search podcasts Search helps you find podcasts by keyword or title. The search engine uses the podcast search service you set up in Podcasting > Options > Settings > Connection > Search service URL . To search for podcasts, select Search , and enter the desired keywords. Tip: Search looks for podca st titles and keywords in descriptions, not specific episodes. General topics, such as foot ball or hip-hop, us ually give better results than a spec ific team or artist. To subscribe to selected ch annels an d add them to your podcasts, select Subscribe . To start a new se arch, sele ct Optio ns > New search . To see the details of a podcast, s elect Options > Description . Podcasting settings To edit the connection settings, select Options > Settings > Connection . To edit the download settings, select Options > Settings > Download . To restore the default settings, open the corresponding settings and s elect Options > Restore default . Music player Warning: Listen to music at a moderate level. Continuous exposure to high volume may damage your hearing. Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may b e extremely loud. Select Menu > Media > Music player . Music player supports files formats such as AAC, AAC , eAAC , MP3, and WMA. Music player does no t necessarily support a ll features of a file format or all the variations of file formats. You can also use Music player to listen to podcast episodes. Podcasting is a me thod for delivering audio or video content over the internet using either RSS or Atom technologies for playback on mobile devices and PCs. You can transfer music from other compatible devices to your device. See "Transfer music from PC" , p. 46 . Play a song or a podcast episode To add all available songs and podcasts to the music library, select Options > Re fresh . 45 Media
To play a song or a podcast epis ode, select Music or Podcasts a nd the desired category, th en scroll to the song or podcast episode and press the scroll key. To pause playback, pres s th e scroll key; to resume, press the scroll key again. To st op playback, s croll down. To fast forward or rewind, press and hold the scroll key to the right or left. To go to the next item, scro ll right. To return to the beginning of the item, scroll left. To skip to the previous item, scroll left again within 2 sec onds after a song or podcast h as started . To modify the tone of the music playback, select Options > Equaliser . To modify the balance and st ereo image or to enhance bass, select Options > Audio settings . To return to the home sc reen and leave the player playing in the backgrou nd, press the end key. Playlists To view and manage playlists, select Music > Playlist s . To create a new playlist, select Options > Crea te playlist . To add songs to the playlist, sele ct the song and Options > Add to a playlist > Saved playli st or New playlist . To reorder songs in a playlist, scroll to the song you want to move, and select Options > Reorder list . Nokia Music Store Select Menu > Media > Musi c store . In the Nokia Music Store (n etwork service) you can search, browse, and p urchase music to download to your device. To purchase music, you need to register for the service. To check the Nokia Music St ore availa bility in your country, visit mus ic.nokia.com. To find more music in the different categories, select Options > Find in Music store . To select the access point to use with the Music Store, select Default acc. pt. . Transfer music from PC To transfer mu sic from your PC, connect you r device to the PC with a compatible USB data ca ble or Bluetooth connectivity. If you are using the US B cable, select Mass storage as the connection mo de. Make sure that a compatible memory card is inserted in the device. If you select Media transfer as the connection mode, you can use Windows Media Player t o synchronise music bet ween your device and PC. 46 Media
Transfer with Windows Media Player Music synchronisation functions may vary between different versions of the Windows Media Player application. For more information, see the corresponding Windows Media Player guides and help. The following inst ructions are for Windows Media Player 11. Manual synchr onisation With manual sy nchronisat ion, you can select the son gs and playlists that you want to move, copy, or remove. 1. After your device is connected with Windows M edia Player, selec t your dev ice in the nav igation pan e on the right, if more than one device is connected. 2. In the left navigation pa ne, browse the m usic files on your PC which you wa nt to synchronise. 3. Drag and drop songs to the Sync List on the right. You can see the amount of available memory in your device above the Sync List . 4. To remove songs or albums , select an item in the Sync List , right-click, and select Remove f rom list . 5. To start the synchronisation, click Start Sync . Automatic sync hronisation 1. To activate the au tomatic synchronisation fu nction in Windows Media Play er, click the Sync tab, select Nokia Handset > Set U p Sync... , and check the Sync thi s device automati cally check box. 2. Select the playlists you want to synchronise automatica lly in the Available playlists pane, and click Add . The selected items are transferred to the Playli sts to sync pane. 3. To finalise the setup for automatic synchronisa tion, click Finish . When the Sync this device automat ically check box is checked and you connect your device to the PC, the music library in your device is automatically updated based on the playlists you se lect for synchronisation in Windows Media Player. If no playlist s have been selected, the whole PC music library is selected for synchronisation. If there is not enough free memory in your device, Windows Media P layer sele cts manual synchronisation automatically. To stop automatic synchronisation, click the Sync tab, and select Stop Sync to 'Nokia Handset' . Preset frequency settings Select Menu > Media > Music player > Options > Go to Now playing > Options > Equaliser . To use a preset frequency setting when playing music, select the frequency sett ing you want to use, and select Options > Activate . To modify the frequency of a preset setting, select Options > Edit , select a frequency band, and scroll up or down to increase or decr ease its value. You hear your frequency adjustment immediat ely in the playback. 47 Media
To reset the frequency bands to their original values, select Options > Reset to defaults . To create your own frequency settin g, select Option s > New pres et . Enter a name for the frequency setting. Scroll up or down to move between the frequency bands and set the frequency on ea ch band. Share online Select Menu > Media > Share o nline . You can share images and video clips in compatible online albums, blogs, or in other compatible online sharing services on the web. You can upload cont ent, save unfinishe d posts as drafts and continue later, and view the content of the albums. The supported content types may vary depending on the service provider. To share files online, you must have an account with an online image sharing service. You can usually subscribe to such a service on the web page of your service provider. Contact your service provider for more information. Share images online To upload a file from Gallery to the online service, select Menu > Gallery , select the desired file and Option s > Send > Post t o web . Recorder Select Menu > Media > Recorder . With Recorder, you can record up to 60 minutes of a voice memo, save the voice recording as a sound clip, and play the sound clip . Recorder supports the A MR file format. You can also press the voice key to open the Recorder application. If you have logged in to push to talk, the voice key works as a push-to-talk key and does not open Recorder. Record a sound clip To record a sound clip, select Options > Record sound clip . Select Pause to pause the recording, and Record to resume recording. When you finish recording, select Stop . The sound clip is automatically saved to the Sound clips folder in Gallery. Play a recording To listen to the sound clip that you just recorded, select Play . The progress bar displays the playing time, position, and length of the clip. Select Stop to canc el the playback. To pause the playback of a r ecorded clip, select Pause . Playba ck resumes when you sele ct Play . 48 Media
Recorder settings Recordings are automatically saved to the device memory unless you chan ge the default loca tion. Recordings that you create or receive after you change the settings are affected. To change the default loca tion of saved recordings, select Options > Settings > Memory in use . To define the recording quality, select Options > Settings > Recording quality . If you select High , the sound clip you record is in waveform file format (.wav) and the maximum length for the clip is 60 minutes. If you select MMS compatible , the sound clip you record is in adaptive multirate fi le format (.amr), and the maximum length for the clip is one minute. Gallery Select Menu > Media > Gallery . Use Gallery to access and use different types of media, including images, videos, music, and sounds. All viewed images and videos, and all received music and sounds are automatically sav ed to Gallery. Sound clips are opened in the Music pl ayer, and video clips and streaming links in the Real Player applicati on. Images are opened in the image viewer. Work with media files and folders To open a file or a folder, sc roll to it, and press the scroll key. To create a new folder, select a file and then select Options > Organise > New folder . Yo u cannot create folders within folders. To copy or move files, select a file and Options > Organise > Move to folder , New folder , Move to memory card , Cop y to me mory ca rd , Co py to phone mem. , or Move to phon e mem. . To download files into Galle ry using the browser, select Downl. graphics , Downld. videos , Downld. tracks , or Downld. sounds . The browser opens, and you can choose a bookmark or enter the address for the download site. To search for a file, select Options > Find . Write the item you are searching for. Files that match the search are shown. View images To open an image fo r viewing, select Optio ns > Open . To open the next or previou s image for viewing, scroll right or left. 49 Media
To enlarge the image on the display, select Opti ons > Zoom in . To reduce the image on the display, se lect Zoom out . To view the image in full screen size, select Op tions > Full screen . To return to normal view, select Opti ons > Normal screen . To rotate the image, select Opt ions > Rotate . Select Right to rotate the image clockwise by 90 degrees, or select Left to rota te the image counterclockw ise by 90 degrees. Manage image files To view detailed information about the image, select Options > View details . To send the image, select Options > Send , and the method for sending. To rename the imag e, sel ect Options > Rename . To set the image as the display background, select Options > Use image > Set as wallpaper . To add the image to a contact, select Options > Use image > Assign to contact . The Contact s application opens, and you can select the conta ct for the image. RealPlayer Select Menu > Media > RealPlayer . RealPlayer plays v ideo clips and audio files that are stored in the device memory or on a memory card, transferred to your device from an e-mail message or a compatible computer, or streamed to your device over the web. Supported fo rmats include MPEG-4, MP4 (not stre aming), 3G P, RV, RA, AMR, and Midi. Rea lPlayer does not necessarily support all variations of a media file format. Play video clips and stream links Warning: Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To play a video clip or audio file, select Options > Open > Most recent clips to play one of the six clips you most recently played, or Saved clip to play a clip or open a web link. Select Play . To play streaming medi a, select a web link that points to a clip, and select Play ; or connect to the web, browse to a video clip or audio file, and select Play . RealPlayer recognises two kinds of links: an rtsp:// URL and an http:// URL that points to a RAM file. Before the content begins streaming, your device must connect to a web site and buffer the content. If a network conn ection problem causes a playback error, RealPlayer attempts automatica lly to reconnect to the intern et access poi nt. 50 Media
To adjust the volum e during p layback, use the volume keys. To fast-forward during play back, scroll up and hold. To rewind during play, scroll down and hold. To stop the playback or streaming, select Stop . Buffering or connecting to t he streaming site stop s, the playback of the clip stops, and the clip rewinds to the beginning. To download video clips from the web, select Options > Download videos . To view the video clip in full-screen size, select Options > Play in full screen . Full screen increases the size of the video to cover the maximum video area possible while the aspect rati o is maintaine d. Send audio files and video clips To transfer a media clip to a compatible device, select Options > Send . Select the sending method. To send a media clip insi de a message, creat e a multimedia messag e, select a cli p to attach and Insert object > Video clip or Sound clip . View information about a media clip To view the properties of a video clip, audio file, or web link, select Optio ns > Clip details . Information may include for example the bit ra te or the internet link of a streaming file. RealPlayer settings You may receive RealPlayer settings in a message from your service provider. To define the settin gs manually, select Opt ions > Settings > Video or Streaming . Flash player Select Menu > Media > Flash Player . With Flash player, you can view, play, an d interact with flash files made for mobile devices. Manage flash file s To optimise the use of Flash Player, insert a memory card in your device. 51 Media
To play a flash file, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To send a flash file to compatible devices, select Options > Send . Copyright protection may prevent the sending of some flash files. To switch between flash fi les saved on your device memory or memory card, scroll to the corresponding tabs. To change the flash fi le quality, select Options > Quality when you are playing the flash file. If you select High , the playback of some fla sh files may appe ar uneven and slow due to thei r original settings. Change the quality setti ng of such files to Normal or Low for improved playback. To organise your flash files, select Options > Organise . Radio Select Menu > Media > Radio . The quality of the radio broadcast depends on the coverage of the radio station in that particular area. The FM radio depends on an antenna other than th e wireless device ant enna. At tach a com patible headset or enhancement to the de vice for the FM radio to function prope rly. Listen to the r adio Warning: Listen to music at a moderat e level. C o n t i n u o u s e x p o s u r e t o h i g h v o l u m e m a y d a m a g e y o u r hearing. Do not hold the device near your ear w hen the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To search for a st ation, select or . To set t he frequency manually, select Options > Manual tuning . To view available st ations based on location, select Options > Station dire ctory (network service). To save the current station to your stat ion list, select Options > Save station . To select a previously saved radi o station, select or . To adjust the volume, use the volume keys. To switch from headset use to listening to the rad io through the loudspeaker, select Options > Activate loudsp eaker . To return to the home scr een and leave the FM radio playing in the background, select Options > Play in background . View visual content To check availability and costs, and to su bscribe to the service, contact your service provider. 52 Media
Before you can view visual co ntent, you m ust have an internet access point defined at Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Acce ss points . 1. To view available v isual content for a t uned station, select Options > Start visual service . If the visual radio service ID has n ot been saved for the station, enter it, or select Retrieve to search for it in the station directory (network service). 2. Select the location nea rest to you from the st ation d i r e c t o r y . I f y o u r d e v i c e f i n d s a s t a t i o n t h a t m a t c h e s the tuned frequency, its visual service ID is displayed. To view the visual cont ent, select OK . Saved stations To open the list of your saved sta tions, select Options > Stations . To listen to a saved station, select Optio ns > Station > Listen . To view available visu al content fo r a station with the Visual Radio service, select Options > Station > St art visual serv ice . To change the station details, select Options > Station > Edit . Radio settings Select Options > Settings and from the following: ⢠Start-up t one â Select whether a tone is played when the application is started. ⢠Auto-start service â Select Yes to have the Visual Radio service start automatically when you select a saved station that offers the Visual Radio service. ⢠Access point â Select the access point used for the data connection. You do not n eed an access point to use the application as an ordinary FM radio. ⢠Current region â Select the region you are currently located in. This se tting is displayed only if there was no network coverage when the application was started. Internet radio Select Menu > Media > Internet radio . Listen to internet radio stations Warning: Listen to music at a moderate level. Continuous exposure to high volume may damage your hearing. Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may b e extremely loud. To listen to a radio station on the internet, select a station from the station directory, search stations by their name from the Nokia Internet Radio service, or select Options > Add station manually . When you have found the correct station, select Listen . 53 Media
To stop the playback, press the scroll key. To resume the playback, press the scroll key aga in. To adjust the volume, use the volume keys. To view station information, select Optio ns > Station information (not ava ilable if you have saved the station manually). If you are listening to a stat ion saved in your favourites, scroll left or right to listen to the previous or next saved station. Tip: You can browse for station links wi th the Web application. Compatible links are automatically opened in the Internet ra dio application. Search for stations To search for radio stations in the Nokia Internet Radio service by their name, select Search . Enter a s tation name or the firs t letters of it in the search field, and select Search . To listen to the station, select Listen . To save the station to your favourites, select Options > Add to Favourites . To make another s earch, select Options > Search again . Save stations To view and list en to your favourit e stations, select Favourites . To add a station manually to favourites, select Options > Add station manually . En ter the web address of the station and a na me that you want to appear in the favourites list. To add the currently playin g statio n to favourites, select Options > Add to Favo urites . To view station information, to move a station up or down in the list, or to delete a station from the favourites, select Options > Station and the desired option. To view only stations begi nni ng with particula r letters or numbers, start entering t he characters. Match ing stations are displaye d. Internet radio settings To select the default access point to con nect to the network, select Options > Settin gs > Defau lt access point . Select Always ask if you want the device to ask for the access point every time you open the application. To change the connection speed for GPRS packet data connections, select Options > Settings > GPRS connection bitrate . 54 Media
To change the con nection speed for 3G packet data connections, select Options > Settings > 3G connection bitrate . To change the connection speed for WLAN connections, select Options > Settings > Wi-Fi connection bitrate . The quality of the radio broadcast depends on the selected connection speed. Th e higher the speed, the better the quality. To avoid buffering, use the highest quality only with high speed connections. 55 Media
Internet With your new Eseries device you can browse both the internet and your company's intran et, and download and install new applications to your device. You can also use your device as a modem and connect your PC to the internet. Web Select Menu > Web . To browse the web (network service), you need to configure the internet access point settings . If you are using a data call or GPRS connection, your wireless network must support data ca lls or GPRS, and th e data service must be activated for your SIM card. Tip: You may receive the internet access point settings from your service provider as a special text message or from th e service provider's web pages. You can also enter the internet access point settings manually. See "Internet access points" , p. 59 . Check the availability of serv ices, pricing, and fees with your service provider. Service providers also give you instructions on how to use their services. If the web page is unread able or not supported and garbage code is found whil e browsing, you ca n try to select Menu > Web > Options > Settings > Page > Default encoding , and select a corresponding encoding. Connection security If the security indica tor ( ) is displayed during a connection, the data transm ission between the device and the internet gate way or server is encrypted. The security icon does not indicate tha t the data transmission between the gatewa y and the content server (or place where the requested resource is stored) is secure. The servic e provider secures the data transmission between the gatewa y and the content server. Security certificates may be required for some services, such as banking services. You are notified if the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the correct security certificate in your device. For more information, contact your service provider. 56 Internet
Browse the web To browse the web, select a bookmark or enter the web address manually, and select Go to . Use only services that you trust and that offer adequ ate security and protection against harmful software. Tip: When you start t o enter the address, the addresses of the pages you have previously visited that match your input a re displayed. To open a page, scroll to its address, and press the scroll key. To move on a web page, use the scroll key, whi ch is shown as a pointer on the page. When you move the pointer over a link, the pointer changes into a hand. Press the scroll key to open the link. On a web page, new links usually appear un derlined in blue and previously visited links in purple. Images t hat act as links have a blue border aro und them. The addresses of th e pages you visit are saved in the Auto. bookmarks folder. Bookmarks To access the bookmarks view whi le browsing, select Options > Bookmarks . To view a bookmarked web page, select the bookmark. To browse to another web page, select Options > Go to web address , enter the web address, and select Go to . To add a bookmark while browsing, select Options > Save as bookmark . To organise your bookmarks, in the bookmarks view, select Options > Boo kmark manager . You ca n move and edit bookmarks, and create new folders. Clear the cache A cache is a memory location t h a t i s u s e d t o s t o r e d a t a temporarily. If you have tried to access or have accessed confidential information requiring passwords, empty the cach e after each use. The information or services yo u have accessed are stored in the cache. To empty the cache, select Options > Clear pri vacy data > Clear cache . Feeds and blogs Select Menu > Web > Web feeds . Feeds usually contain headlines and articles, often about recent news or other topics. Blog is a shortening of weblog, which is a cont inuously updated web diary. To download a feed or blog, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To add or edit a feed or blog, select Options > Manage feed > New feed or Edit . End a connection To end the connection an d view the browser page offline, select Options > Tools > Disconnect . To end 57 Internet
the connection and close the browser, select Options > Exit . Web settings Select Menu > Web > Options > Settings . The web settings are divided into four groups: ⢠General contains access point, home page, and browsing secu rity settings. ⢠Page contains imaging, audi o, and pop-up setting s. ⢠Privacy con tains settings relat ed to your p rivacy. ⢠Web feeds contains settings rela ted to web feeds and blogs. Browse the intranet Select Menu > Office > Intranet . To browse your company's intranet, you must creat e a company-specific VPN policy. Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > VPN . To connect to the intranet, open the I ntranet application, select the connection method and Options > Connect . To define which VPN profile to use in the connection, select Options > Use other VPN policy . To define the sett ings fo r the intranet connection, select Options > Settings . Download! Select Menu > Download! . With Download! (network service), you can browse, download, and insta ll items, such as latest a pplications and related documents, to your device from the web. The items are categorised under catalogs and folders provided by Nokia or independent service providers. Some items m ay be chargeable, but you can us ually preview them free of charge. Download! uses y our networ k services to access the most updated content. For information on additional items available through Download!, con tact your service provider, or the suppli er or manufacturer of the item. Only install and use appl ications and other software from sources that offer adequate secu rity and protection against harmful software. Manage items To open an item or view the content of a folder or catalogue, scroll to it, an d press the scroll key. To buy the selected item, select Options > Buy . To download an item that is free of cha rge, select Options > Get . 58 Internet
To search for an item, select Options > Search . To adjust the settings, select Optio ns > Settings . To view the list of downloaded items, select Options > My items . Subscriptions To view file details of the selected item, select Options > Open . To renew or cancel a subscription, select Options an d the corresponding option. Download! search Scroll to the catalogues from which you want to search for items, select Mark to select them, and enter the search keywords. To start the search, s elect Options > Search . Purchase history To open the selected it em with the corresponding application, select Options > Open . To view file details of the selected item, select Options > View details . To start, pause, resume, or cancel the download of the selected item, select Options and the corresponding option. Download! settings To change the Download! settings, select Op tions > Settings and from the following: ⢠Access point â Select an access point to use to connect to the service provider's server. ⢠Automatic open â Select whether you want the downloaded item or application to open automatically after the download is complet ed. ⢠Preview co nfirmatio n â Select whether you want a confirmation query to be shown before previewing an item. ⢠Buy confi rmati on â Select whether you want a confirmation query to be shown before buying an item. ⢠Subscrip. confirmation â Define whether you want the subscription confirmation query to be shown before subscribing to an item. Internet access points An internet access point is a collection of settings, which define how the device creates a da ta connection to the network. To use e-ma il and multimedia services or to browse web pages, you must first define access points for these services. S o m e o r a l l a c c e s s p o i n t s m a y b e p r e s e t f o r y o u r d e v i c e by your ser vice prov ider, and you may not be able to create, edit, or remove them. 59 Internet
Set up an internet access point for packet data (GPRS) 1. Sele ct Menu > Tools > Settings > Connectio n > Access points . 2. Sele ct Options > New access point to create a new access point, or select an existing access point from the list and then Optio ns > Duplicate access point to use the access point as a basis for the new one. 3. Define the following settings. ⢠Connection name â Enter a descriptive name for the connection. ⢠Data bearer â Select Packet dat a . ⢠Access point name â Enter the name for the access point. The name is usually provided by your service provider. ⢠User nam e â Enter your user name if required by the service provider. User names are often case-sensitive and provided by your service provider. ⢠Prompt pass word â Select Yes to enter your password each time you log into a server or No to save the password in your device memory and automate the login. ⢠Password â Enter your password if required by the service provider. The password is often case- sensitive and provided by the service provider. ⢠Authentica tion â Select Secure t o send your password always encrypted, or Normal to send your password encrypted when possible. ⢠Homepage â Enter the web address of the page you want to display as the home page when you use this access point. 4. After defining the settings, select Options > Advanced settings to define t he advanced settings or Back to save the settings and exi t. Advanced internet access point settings for packet data (GP RS) Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connecti on > Access points . After setting up a basic inte rnet access point for packet data (GPRS ), select O ptions > Advanced s ettings , and define the following advanced setting s: ⢠Network type â Select IPv4 or IPv6 as the in ternet protocol type. The internet protocol defines how data is transferred to and from your device. ⢠Phone IP address â Enter the IP address of your device. Select Automati c to have the network provide the device IP address. This setting is shown only if you select Network type > IPv4 . ⢠DNS address â Select Primary DNS address and Secondary DNS address and enter their IP addresses, if required by your service provider. Otherwise, the name server addresses are provided automatically. ⢠Proxy server ad dress â Enter the address of the proxy server. Proxy servers are intermediate servers 60 Internet
used by some service providers between a browsing service and its users. These servers may provide additional security and sp eed up access to the service. Set up an access point for WLAN manually 1. Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Acce ss points . 2. Select Option s > New access point to create a new access point, or select an exist ing access point from the list and then Options > Duplicate access point to use the access point as a ba sis for the n ew one. 3. Define the following settings. ⢠Connection name â Enter a descriptive name for the connection. ⢠Data bearer â Select Wirel ess LAN . ⢠WLAN network name â To enter the service set identifier (SSID), that i s, the name that identifies the specific WLAN, select Enter manually . To select the network from the WLANs in ra nge, sele ct Search for networks . ⢠Network sta tus â Select Hidden if the network you are connecting to is hidden or Public if it is no t hidden. ⢠WLAN network mode â If you select Infrastruc ture , devices can communicate with each other and with wi red LAN devices through a WLAN access point. If you select Ad-hoc , devices can send and receive data directly with each other, and no WLAN access point is needed. ⢠WLAN security mode â You must select the same security mode that is used in the WLAN access point. If you select WEP (wired equivalent privacy), 802.1x, or WPA/WPA2 (Wi-Fi protected access), you must also config ure the rele vant additional settin gs. ⢠WLAN se curity settings â Edit the security settings for the selecte d security mode. ⢠Homepage â Enter the web address of the page you want to display as the home page when you use this access point. To set up a WLAN access p oint automatica lly, use the WLAN wizard . Select Menu > Connectivity > WLAN wiz. . Advanced access point settings for WLAN Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points . After setting up a basic access point for WLAN, se lect Options > Advanced s ettings , and define the following advanced settings: ⢠IPv4 setti ngs â Enter the device IP and name server addresses for the IPv4 internet protocol. ⢠IPv6 setti ngs â Select or enter the name server addresses for the IPv6 internet protocol. 61 Internet
⢠Ad-hoc channel â The channel is usually chosen automatically. To enter the ch annel number (1-11) manually, select User defined . ⢠Proxy server addres s â Enter the proxy server address. ⢠Proxy port number â Enter the proxy server port number. Connect PC to web You can use your device to connect your P C to the web. 1. Connect the data cable to the USB connec tors of your device and your PC. 2. Sele ct Connect PC to web . The necessary software is automatically installed from your device to the PC. 3. Accept the installation in your PC. If asked, accept also the connection. When the connection to the web is established, the web browser of your PC opens. You must have administrator rights to your PC, an d the autorun opt ion enabled in th e PC. If not, run the setup.exe file from the CD-ROM drive of your PC. 62 Internet
Messaging Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging . In Messaging (netw ork service), you can send and receive text messages, mu ltimedia messages, audio messages, an d e-mail message s. You can also receive web service messages, cell broadcas t messages, and special messa ges containing data , and send service commands. Before sending or receiving messages, you may need to do the following: ⢠Insert a valid SIM card in the device and be located in the service area of a cellular network. ⢠Verify that the networ k supports the messagin g features you want to use and that they are activa ted on your SIM card. ⢠Define the internet access point setti ngs on the device. See "Internet access points" , p. 59 . ⢠Define the e-mail account setti ngs on the device. See "E-mail accoun t settings" , p. 80 . ⢠Define the text messa ge settings on the device. See "Text message setting s" , p. 79 . ⢠Define the multimedia message settings on the device. See "Multimedia message settings" , p. 79 . The device may recognise th e SIM card provider and automatically configure some of the message settin gs. If not, you may need to define the settings manually; or contact your service provider to configure the settings. Messaging folders Messages and data recei ved using Bluetooth connectivity or infrared are stored in the Inbox folder . E-mail message s are stored in Mailbox . Messages that you have been writing can be stored in the Drafts folder. Messages that are waiting to be sent are stored in the Outbox folder, and messages that have been sent, excluding Bluetooth an d infrared messages, are stored in the Sent folder. Tip: Messages are placed in Outbox, for example, when your device is outside network coverage. You can also schedule e-mail messages to be sent the next time you con nect to your remote mailbox. 63 Messaging
Note: The message sent icon or text on your device screen does not in dicate that the message is received at the intended destination. To request the network to send you a delivery report of the text messages and multi media messages you have sent (network service) , select Options > Settings > Text message or Multimedia message > Receive report . The reports are saved in the Reports folder. Organise messages To create a new folder to organise your mes sages, select My folders > Options > New folder . To rename a folder, select Option s > Rename folder . You can only rename folders th at you have created . To move a message to another folder, select the message, Op tion s > Move to fold er , the folder, and OK . To sort messages in a specific order, select Option s > Sort by . You can sort the m essages by Date , Sender , Subject , or Message type . To view the properties of a message, select the message and Options > Message details . Message reader The message reader reads received text and multimedia messa ges aloud. To play a mess age, press and ho ld the left selection key when you receive a message. To start reading the n ext message in Inbox, scroll down. To start reading the message agai n, scroll up. In the beginning of the message, scroll up to hear the previous message. To pause the reading, press the left selection key briefly. To continue, press the left selection key briefly again. To end the reading, press the end key. Speech Select Menu > Tools > Speech . With Speech, you can set the language, voice, and voice properties for the message reader. Edit the voice proper ties To set the language for the message r eader, select Language . To download additional languages to your device, visit the Nokia web site or use the D ownload! application. 64 Messaging
To set the speaking voice, select Voice . The voice is language-dependent. To set the speaking rate, select Voice settings > Speed . To set the speaking volume, select Vo ice settings > Volume . To listen to a voice, open the voice tab, se lect the voice, and select Option s > Pla y voice . E-mail messages Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Mailbox . To receive and send e-mail, you must have a remote mailbox service. This service may be offered by an internet service provider, a network service provider, or your company. Your device is compliant with internet standards SMTP, IM AP4 (revision 1), and POP3, and with different vendor-s pecific e-mail solutions. Other e-mail providers may offer services with different settings or features than th ose described i n this user guide. For more details, contact your service provider or e-mail service provider. You may be able to install the follo wing e-mails to your device: ⢠Regular POP or IMAP e-mail. You need to connect to the mailbox, and downlo ad the e-mails to your device before you can read them. ⢠Nokia Email service. Nokia Email is used with different internet e-mail providers, such has Google e-mail services. The Nokia Email service pushes the new e-mails to your device as long as the N okia Email application is open. ⢠Mail for Exchange. Mail fo r Exchange is usua lly used for accessing work e-mails. Your company's IT department may have furt her instructions on how to install and use Mail for Exch ange with your company's e-mail servers. Other e-mail solution s may be availa ble. If you have defined severa l mailboxes, for example a POP or IMAP e-mail and Mail for Exchange, select one of them as your default mail box. That mailbox is used every time you start composing a new e-ma il message. To define the default mailbox in Messaging, select Options > Settings > E-mail > Default mailbox and the mailbox. Nokia Email The Nokia Email s ervice au to matically pu shes e-mail from your existing e-mail address to your Nokia E66. You can read, respond to, and organi se your e-mails on the go. The Nokia Email service works with a number of internet e-mail providers that are often used for personal e-mail, such as Google e-mail services. The Nokia Email service may not be available in all countries. 65 Messaging
To install the Nokia Em ail applicat ion: 1. In the home screen, scroll to the e-mail wizard, and press the scroll key. 2. Sele ct Start e-mail setup . 3. Read the information on the display, and select Start . 4. Sele ct Yes to allow your device to acce ss the network. 5. Sele ct Nokia Email service . 6. Sele ct Yes to install the Nokia Emai l application. 7. Read the information on the display, and select Continue . After the Nokia Email application has been installed, setup continues automatica lly. To set up the Nokia Email service: 1. Sele ct Yes to allow your device to acce ss the network. 2. Read the information on the display, and select Start . 3. Enter your e-mail addre ss and password, and se lect Next . 4. Ent er your telep hone nu mber in the international format, and select OK . 5. Read the Terms and Conditions, and select Accept . 6. Sele ct OK to finalise e-ma il setup. The Nokia Email application opens and synchronises your e-mai ls from your e-mail address with your device. The Nokia Email service can run on your device even if you have installed other e- mail applications such as Mail for Exchange. However, if you are using Nokia Intellisync Mobile Suite, it must be uninstalled before using the Nokia Email s ervice. Mail for Exchange With Mail for Exchange, you can receive your work e- mail to your Nokia E66. You can read an d reply to your e-mails, view and edit at tachments, v iew calendar information, receive and re ply to meeting requests, schedule meetings, and view , add, and edit contac t information. Mail for Exchan ge can be set up only if your company has Microsoft Exchan ge Server. In addition, your company's IT administrator must h ave activated Mail for Exch ange for your account . Before starting to install Ma il for Exchange, ensure that you have the following: ⢠A corporate e-mail ID ⢠Your office network us er name ⢠Your office network password ⢠Your network domain name (contact your company's IT de partment) ⢠Your Mail for Exchange server name (contact your company's IT de partment) Depending on your company's Mail for Exchange server configurat ion, you may need t o enter other information in addition to those listed. If you do not 66 Messaging
know the correct informa tion, contact your compa ny's IT department. With Mail for Exchange, the use of lock code may be mandatory. The default lock code of Nokia E66 is 12345, but your company's IT administrator may ha ve set a different one for you to use. Depending on your company, the Mail for Exchange installation ma y show you different information popups during the setup process . Read the popups, a nd select Continue , OK, Next , or Yes to continue. To install Mail for Exchange: 1. In the home screen, scroll to the e-mail wizard, and press the scroll key. 2. Select Start e-mail setup . 3. Read the information on the display, and select Start . 4. Select Yes to allow your device to access the network. 5. Enter your e-mail address, and select OK . 6. Enter your password, and select OK . 7. Enter your us er name, and select OK . 8. Select Mail for Exchange . 9 . E n t e r t h e d o m a i n n a m e o f y o u r n e t w o r k , a n d s e l e c t OK . 10. Enter the Mail for Exchange server name, and select OK . 11. Select Yes to install the Mail for Exchange application to your device. After installation, you ma y create your Mai l for Exchange profile by changing the settings . However, depending on your company, the profile may be created automatically. Regular POP or IMAP e-mail Your device can download e-mails from a POP or IMAP e-mail accoun t. POP3 is a version of the post office protocol that is used to store and retrieve e-mail or internet mail messages from a server. IMAP4 is a version of the internet message access protocol that lets you access and manage e-mail messages while the messages are still on the e-mail server. Yo u can then choose which messages to download to your device. Set up POP or IMAP e-mail 1. Go to the home screen, scroll to the e-mail wizard, and press the scroll key. 2. Select Start e-mail setu p . 3. Read the information on the display, and select Start . 4. Select Yes to allow your device to access the network. 5. Select E-mail . 6. Enter your e-mail address, and select OK . 7. Enter your password, and select OK . 67 Messaging
8. If requested, select an in ternet access point that is used for connecting to your POP or IMAP e-mail account. 9. Read the information on the display, and select OK to finalise e-mail setup. The name of your new mailbox replaces Mailbox in the Messag ing main view. Tip: After you have set up a P OP or IMAP e-mail, in the Messaging main view, select Options > Settings > E-mail an d the mailbox to edit the settings, for example a possible s ignature, or the name of your mailbox. Connect to a remote mailbox E-mail addressed to you is not automa tically received by your device, but by your remote mailbox. To read your e-mail, you must first connect to the remote mailbox; then select the e-mail messages you wish to retrieve into your device. 1. To retrieve received e-mail messages to your device and view them, select your mailbox in th e Messaging main view. When the device asks Connect to mailbox? , select Yes . 2. Enter yo ur user name an d password, if prompted. 3. Sele ct Options > Retrieve e-ma il > New to retrieve new messages th at you ha ve neither read nor retrieved, Selected to retrieve only messages you select from the remote mailbox, or All to retrieve all messages no t previously retrieved. 4. To manage your e-mail of fline to save in connection costs and work in conditions that do not allow a data connection, select Options > Disconnect to disconnect from the remote mailbox. Any changes you make in the remote mailbox folders while offline, take effect in your remote mailbox the next time you go on line and synchronis e. Read and reply to e-mail Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. Message s may contain malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. To read a received e-mail, open it from the mailbox. To open an at tachment, select Options > Attachments . Sc roll to the attachment, and press the scroll key. To reply only to the send er of an e-mail, select Options > Reply > To sender . To reply to all recipients of an e-mail, select Opti ons > Reply > To all . Tip: If you reply to an e -mail that conta ins attached files, the attach ments are not included in the reply. If you forward the received e-mail, the attachments are included. To forward an e-mail, select Options > Forward . To attach a file to an e-mail message, select Optio ns > Insert and the attachmen t you want to add. To delete an attachment from an e-mail that you a re sending, select the attachment a nd Options > Remove . 68 Messaging
To set the mess age priority, se lect Options > Send ing options > Priority . To set the sending ti me for the e-mail message, select Options > Sending options > Send message . Select Immediately , o r select When conn . avail. if you are working offline. To call the sender of the e-mail message, if the sender can be found in Contacts, select Op tion s > Call . To reply to the sender of the e-mail with an audio message or multimed ia message, se lect Options > Create message . Write and send e-mail 1. To write an e-mail, select New message > E- mail . 2. Select Option s > Add recipient to select th e recipients' e-mail addresse s from Contacts, or enter the e-mail addr esses in the To field. Use a semicolon to separate entries. Use the Cc field to send a copy to other recipients, or the Bcc field to send a blind copy to recipients. 3. In the Subject field, enter the s ubject of the e-mail. 4. Enter your e-mail message in the text area, and select Options > Send . Delete messages To free up memory space on your device, regularly delete messages from the Inbox and Sent folders, and delete retrieved e-mail messages. To delete e-mail from the device only, and keep the original on the server, select Options > Delete > Phone (header remains) . To delete e-mail both from the device and the remote server, select Options > Delete > Ph one and server . To cancel the deleting, select Options > Restore . Subfolders in your remote e-mail If you create subfolders in your IMAP4 mailboxes on a remote server, you can view and manage these folders with your device when you subscribe to them. Y ou can only subscribe to folders in your IMAP4 mailboxes. To view folders in your IMAP4 mailbox, establish a connection, and select Options > E-mail settings > Retrieval sett ings > Fold er subscriptions . To view a remote folder, select a folder and Options > Subscribe . Every time you go online, the subscribed folders are updated. This may take some time if the folders are large. To update the list of folders, select a folder and Options > Update folder list . Text messages Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging . 69 Messaging
Write and send text messages Your device supports text messa ges beyond the limit for a single messa ge. Longer messages are sent a s two or more messages. Your se rvice provider may charge accordingly. Characters wi th accents or other marks, and characters from some langu age options, take u p more space, and limit the number of characters that can be sent in a single message. 1. To write a text message, select New message > Text message . 2. In th e To field, enter a recipient's number, or press the scroll key to add a recipien t from Contacts. If you enter more than one number, separate the numbers with a semicolon. 3. Enter th e text of th e me ssage. To use a template, select Options > Insert > Te mplate . 4. Sele ct Options > Send . Sending options fo r text messages To select a message cent re to send the message, se lect Options > Sending options > Message centre in use . To have the network send you delivery reports on your messages (network se rvice), select O ptions > Sending options > Receive report > Ye s . To define how long the message centre resends your message (network service) if the first at tempt fails , select Options > Sending opti ons > Message validity . If the recipient cannot be reach ed within the validity period, the message is deleted from the message centre. To convert the message to another forma t, select Options > Sending options > Message sent as > Text , Fax , Paging , or E-mail . Change this option only if you are sure that your message centre is able to convert text messages into t hese other formats. Contact your service provider. Text messages on the SIM card Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > SIM messages . Text messages m ay be stored on your SIM car d. Before you can view SIM messages , you must copy the messages to a folder in the device. After copying the messages to a folder, you can view th em in the folder or delete them from the SIM card. 1. Sele ct Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark or Mark all to mark every message. 2. Sele ct Options > Copy . 3. Select a folder and OK to begin copying. To view SIM card messages, open the folder where you copied the me ssages, an d open a messa ge. 70 Messaging
View picture mes sages The appearance of a picture message may vary depending on the receiving device. To view a picture message, open the message fro m the Inbox folder. To view information about the picture message, select Options > Message details . To save a message in a different folder, select Options > Move to folder . To add the sender of the message to Conta cts, select Options > Save to Contacts . Forward picture messages 1. To forward the message, open the message from the Inbox folder and select Options > Forward . 2. In the To field, enter a recipient's number, or press the scroll key to add a recip ient from Contacts. If y ou enter more than one number, separate t he numbers with a semicolon . 3. Enter the text of your message. To use a template, select Options > Insert > Template . 4. Select Option s > Send . Tip: To remove the picture from the message, select Options > Remove pi cture . Multimedia messages Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging . Only devices that h ave compat ible features can receive and display multimedia me ssages. The appearance of a message may vary depend in g on the receiving device. A multimedia message (MMS ) can contain text and objects such as images, so und clips, or video clips. Before you can send or receive multimedia messages on your device, you must define the multimedia message setting s. Your de vice may have recogni sed the SIM card provider and automatically con figured the multimedia message sett ings. If not, use Se ttings wizard, or cont act your serv ice provider for the correct settings. See "Multimedia message setti ngs" , p. 79 . Create and send multimedia messages Important : Exercise caution when opening messages. Me ssages may conta in malicious softw are or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. 1. To create a new m essage, select New message > Multimedia message . 2. In the To field, enter a recipient's number or e-mail address, or press the scroll key to a dd a recipient from Contact s. If you en ter more than one number or e-mail address, separate them with a semicolon. 71 Messaging
3. In t he Subject field, enter a subject for the message. To change the fields that are visible, select Options > Address fiel ds . 4. Enter the text of the message, and select Options > Insert objec t to add media objects. You can add objects such a s Imag e , Sound clip , or Video cli p . The wireless network may limit the size of MMS messages. If the inserted picture exceeds this limit t h e d e v i c e m a y m a k e i t s m a l l e r s o t h a t i t c a n b e s e n t by MMS. 5. Each slide of your message ca n contain only one video or sound clip. To add more slides to your message, select Op tions > Insert new > Slide . To change the order of slides in your m essage, select Options > Move . 6. To preview a multimedia mes sage before sending it, select Options > Preview . 7. Sele ct Options > Send . To delete an object from a multimedia message, select Options > Remove . To set the sending options for the current multimedia message, select Options > Sending optio ns . Receive and reply to multimedia messages Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. Message s may contain malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. Tip: If you receive multimedia messages that contain objects unsupported by your device, you cannot open them. Try to send these objects to another device su ch as a compu ter, and open them there. 1. To reply to a multimed ia message, open the message, and select Opti ons > Reply . 2. Sele ct Options and To sender to reply to the sender with a multimedia mes sage, Via text message to reply with a text message, Via audio message to reply with an audio messag e, or Via e-mail to reply with an e-mail message. Tip: To add recipients to your reply, select Options > Add recipient to select the recipients of the message from Contacts, or enter the recipients' phone numbers or e- mail addresses manually in the To field. 3. Enter the text of the messag e, and select Options > Send . 72 Messaging
Create pres entations Creating multimedia presen tations is not possible if the MMS creation mode setting is set to Restricted . To change the settin g, select Messaging > Options > Settings > Mult imedia me ssage > MMS cre ation mode > Free . 1. To create a presentation, select Ne w message > Multimed ia message . 2. In the To field, enter a recipi ent's number or e-mail address, or press th e scroll key to add a recipie nt from Contacts. If you en ter more than one number or e-mail address, separate th em with a semicolon. 3. Select Option s > Create pres entation and a presentation t emplate. A template may define which media objects you can include in the presentation, where they appear, and which effects are displayed between images and slides. 4. Scroll to the text ar ea and enter the text. 5. To insert images, sound, video, or notes in your presentation, scroll to the corresponding object area, and select Options > Insert . 6. To add slides, select Insert > New sl ide . To select the background colour for the presentation and background images fo r different slides, select Options > Background settings . To set effects between images or slides, select Options > Effect settin gs . To preview the presentation, select Optio ns > Preview . Multimedia presen tations may only be viewed in compatible devices that support presentations. They may appe ar different in different devices. View presentations To view a presentation, op en the multimedia message from the Inbox folder. Scro ll to the presentation, and press the scroll key. To pause the presentation, press either selection key. To resume playing the presentation, select Options > Continue . If the text or images are t oo large t o fit on the display, select Options > Activate scrolli ng , and scroll to see the entire presentation. To find phone numbers and e-mail or web addresses in the presentation, select Options > Find . You m ay use these numbers and addresses to make calls, send messages, or create bookmarks, for example . View and save multimedia attachments To view multimedia messages as complete presentations, open the message, and select Options > Play presentation . Tip: To view or play a multimedia object in a multimedia messa ge, sele ct View imag e , Play sound clip , or Play video clip . 73 Messaging
To view the name and size of an attachment, open the message, and select Option s > Object s . To save a multimedia object, select Options > Objects , the object, and Options > Save . Forward a multimedia message Open Inbox, scroll to a mu ltimedia notification, and press the scroll key. To send the me ssage to a compatible device without retr ieving it to your device, select Options > Forward . If the server does not support multimedia messag e forwarding, this option is not available. 1. In th e To field, enter a recipient's number or e-mail address, or press the scroll key to add a recipient from Contacts. If you en ter more than one number or e-mail address, separate them with a semicolon. 2. Edit the message, if desired, and select Options > Send . Tip: To edit the delivery settings of the message, select Option s > Sending opt ions . Send a sound c lip 1. To compos e an audio messag e, select New message > Audio message . 2. In th e To field, enter a recipient's number or e-mail address, or press the scroll key to add a recipient from Contacts. If you enter m ore than one number or e-mail address, separate them with a sem icolon. 3. Sele ct Options > Insert sound clip , and select whether to record a sound clip or select one from Gallery. 4. Sele ct Options > Send . Sending options for multimedia messages Select New message > Multimedia message > Options > Sending options and from the following options: ⢠Receive report â S e l e c t Yes if you want to receive a notification when the messag e has been successfully delivered to the recipient. R eceiving a delivery report of a mult imedia message that has been sent to an e-mail address may not be possible. ⢠Message validity â Select how long the messaging centre tries to send the message. If the recipient of a message cannot be reached within the validity perio d, the message is removed from the multimedia messaging centre. The network must support this feature. Maximum time is the maximum amount of time allowed by the ne twork. ⢠Priority â Set the sending priority to Hig h , Normal , o r Low . 74 Messaging
Instant messaging Select Menu > Communic. > IM . Instant messaging (IM) (network service) a llows you to converse with other people using instant messages and join discussion forums (IM groups) with specific topics. Various service prov iders maintain IM servers that you can log in to after you register to an IM service. Service providers may differ in their support of features. If IM is not available from your service provider, it may not appear in the menu of y our device. Contact your service provider for more information about signing up for IM services and costs of services. For more information on IM setting s, contact your service provider. You may receive the settings in a special text message from the service provider that offers the IM service. If not, enter the settings ma nually. Other instan t messaging so lutions, such a s WindowsLive and Yahoo, may be available in Download. Define IM settings To define the IM applic ation settings, select Option s > Settings > IM settings . You can, for example, set your screen name and IM alert tones. To converse with an IM user or users, and to view and edit your IM contacts, you m ust log into an insta nt messaging server. To add an IM server, sele ct Options > Settings > Servers . Ask your service provider for the correct settings. To set the server as the one to whi ch your devi ce automatically lo gs in, select Options > Settings > Default server . To define how your device connects to the IM s erver, select Options > Settings > IM login type . T o establish a connection between your device and the default server automatically, select Automatic . To automate th e connection only when in you r home network, select Auto in home netw. To connect to the server when you open th e IM application, select On app. start-up . To connect to the server manually, select Manual and log into the server in the IM main view by selectin g Options > Log in . Enter yo ur user ID and password at the prompt. You can obtain the user name, password, and other sett ings to log in from your service provider when you register for the service. Start a conversation Open Conver sations . To search for IM users and user IDs, se lect IM contacts > Options > New IM cont act > Search . You can search by User's nam e , User ID , Phone number , and E-mail address . To view a conversation, select a participant. To continue the conversation, enter your message, and select Options > Send . 75 Messaging
To return to the conversa tions list withou t closing the conversation, sele ct Back . To close the conversation, select Options > End conversation . To start a n ew conversation, selec t Options > New conversation . You can start a new conversa tion with a contact while you are inside a n active convers ation. However, you cannot h ave two active convers ations with the same conta ct. To insert an image to an instant message, select Options > Send image , and select th e image you want to send. To save a conversation pa rticipant to your IM contacts , select Options > Add to IM contacts . To save a conversation, while in the conversation view, select Options > Record chat . The conversation is saved as a tex t file that can be open ed and viewed in the Notes application. IM groups Open IM groups . IM groups is available only if you are logged into an IM server, and the server supports IM groups. To create an IM group, select Options > Create new group . To join an IM group or to continue a group conversation, scroll to the group, and press the scroll key. Enter a message, and select Opti ons > Send . To join an IM group that is not on the list, but for which you know the group ID, select Options > Join new group . To leave the IM group, select Opt ions > Le ave IM group . To search for IM groups and group IDs, select IM groups > Option s > Search . You can sea rch by Group name , Topic , and Members (user ID). To add an IM user to the group, select Options > Add member . S elect a user from your IM contacts or enter the contact ID. To remove a member from the IM group, select Options > Remove . To provide members with ed iting rights to the group, select Options > Add editor . Select a user from your IM contacts or enter the ID of the user. IM users with editing rights can edit grou p settings and invite other users to join the group or ban them from the group. To remove editing rights from a group member, select Options > Remove . To prevent IM users from joining the group, select Options > Add to banned list . Select a user from your IM contacts or enter the ID of the user. To allow a banned user to join the group, select Options > Remove . 76 Messaging
Block users Select IM contacts > Options > Blocking optio ns > View blocked list . To find a blocked IM user, enter the first letters of the user's name. Mat ching names appear in a lis t. To allow receiving messages from a blocked IM user, select Options > Unblock . To prevent receiving messag es fr om other IM users, select Options > Block new contacts . Select the IM user from your IM contacts, or enter the user ID. IM application settings Select Options > Settings > IM settings and define the following settings: ⢠Use screen n ame â To change the nam e that identifies you in IM groups, select Yes . ⢠Show my availability â Select whether you allow all other IM users or on ly your IM contacts to see when you are online. Select To no-one to hide y our online status. ⢠Allow messages fro m â Select to receive instant messages from all other IM users, your IM contacts only, or not to receive messages at all. ⢠Allow inv itations from â Select to receive invitations to IM groups from all IM users, your IM contacts only, or not to receive invitations at all. ⢠Msg. scrolling speed â T o d e c r e a s e o r i n c r e a s e t h e speed at which new m essages are displaye d, scroll left or right. ⢠Sort IM contacts â Select to list your IM contacts alphabetically or by their online status. ⢠Availability re loading â To update the online status of your IM contacts automatically, select Automatic . ⢠Offline co ntact s â Select if IM contacts with an offline status are shown in the IM contacts list. ⢠Own messa ge colou r â Select the colour of the instant messages y ou send. ⢠Received msg colour â Select the colour of the instant messages you receive. ⢠Show date/ time info â Select Yes to view the receiving or sending time of each message in an IM conversation. ⢠IM alert to ne â Select the tone that is pla yed when you receive a new insta nt message. Special message types Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging . You can recei ve special messages that contain data, such as operator logos, ringing tones, bookmarks, or internet access or e-ma il account settings. To save the contents of these messages, select Options > Save . Service messages Service messages are sent to your device by service providers. Service messages may contain notifications 77 Messaging
such as news hea dlines, services, or links throu gh which the message conten t can be downloaded. To define the service message settings, select Options > Settings > Servi ce message . To download the service or message content, select Options > Download message . To view information about the sender, web address, expiration date, and other detai ls of the message before downloading it, select Options > Message details . Send servic e commands You can send a service re quest message (also known as a USSD command) to your service provide r and request activation for certain network services. Contact your service provider for the service request text. To send a service request me ssage, select Options > Service command . Enter the service r equest text and select Options > Send . Cell broadcast Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Cell broadcast . With the cell broadcast network service, you can receive messages on various topics from your service provider, such as weather or traffic conditions in a particular region. For available topics and relevant topic numbers, contact your service provider. Cell broadcast messages cannot be received when the device is in the remote SIM mode. A pa cket data (GPRS) connection may prevent cell broadcast reception. Cell broadcast messages cannot be received in UMTS (3G) networks. To receive cell broadcast messages, you may need to set the cell broadcast reception on. Select Options > Settings > Recepti on > On . To view messages related to a topic, select the t opic. To receive messages related to a topic, select Options > Subscribe . Tip: You can set important topics as hot topics. While the device is in the standby mode, you are notified when you rece ive a message related to a hot topic. Select a topic, and select Opt ions > Hotmark . To add, edit, or delete topics, select Option s > Topic . Messaging settings Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings . Fill in all fields marked with Must be defined or with a red asterisk. Your device may recognise the SIM card provider and configure th e correct te xt message, multimedia message, an d GPRS settin gs automatically. If not, 78 Messaging
contact your service provider for the correct settings, order the settings from your service provider in a configuration message, or use the Settings wizard application. Text message settings Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings > Text messa ge . Select from the following: ⢠Message centres â View the available message centres for your device, or create a new one. ⢠Message centre in use â Select a message centre to send the messa ge. ⢠Character encoding â Select Reduce d support to use automatic cha racter conversion to anothe r encoding system when available. ⢠Receive report â Selec t Yes if you want the network to send you delivery reports on your messages (network se rvice). ⢠Message validity â Select how long the message centre resends your message if the first attempt fails (network service). If the recipient canno t be reached within the validity period, the message is deleted from the message centre. ⢠Message sent as â Convert the message to another format, s uch as Text , Fax , Paging , or E-mail . Change this option only if you are sure that y our message centre is able to convert text messages into these other formats. Contact your service provider. ⢠Preferred connection â Select the preferred method of connection when sending text messages from your device. ⢠Reply via s ame cent re â Select whether you want the reply message to be sent using the same text message centre number (network service). Multimedia message settings Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings > Multimedia message . Select from the following: ⢠Image siz e â Select Small or Lar ge to scale images in multimedia me ssages. Select Original to maintain the original image size. ⢠MMS creation mo de â Select Rest ricted to have your device prevent you from including content in multimedia messages that may not be sup ported by the network or the receiving device. To receive warnings about includin g such content, select Guided . T o create a multimedia messa ge with no restrictions on attach ment type, select Free . If you select Restricted , creating mult imedia presentations is not possible. ⢠Access point in use â Select the default access point to connect to the multimedia message centre. You may not b e able to change th e default access point if it is preset in your device by your service provider. 79 Messaging
⢠Multimedia retrieval â Select Always automatic to receive multimedia messages always automatically, Auto in home netw. to receive notification of a new mult imedia message that you can retrieve from the mess age centre (for example, when you are travelling abroad and are outside your home network), Manual to retrieve multimedia messages from the message centre manually, or Off to prevent receipt of any multimedia messages. ⢠Allow anon. msgs. â Select whether you want to receive messages from unknown senders. ⢠Receive adverts â Select whether you want to receive messages defined as advertisements. ⢠Receive re port â Select Ye s to have the status of the sent message to be shown in the log (network service). Receiving a delivery report of a multimedia message that has been sent to an e-mail address may not be possible. ⢠Deny report sending â Selec t Yes to not send delivery reports from your device for received multimedia messages. ⢠Message validity â Select how lo ng the messag ing centre tries to send the message (network service). If the recipient of a message cann ot be reached within the validity period , the messa ge is removed from the multimedia messaging centre. Maximum time is the maximum amount of time allowed by the network. E-mail account settings Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings > E-mail . If you try to edit mailbox settings but hav e not set up an e-mail account, the ma ilbox guide opens and helps you set up your e-mail account. If you have defined a mailbox, scroll to it, and press the scroll key to edit the settings. The settings available for editing m ay vary. Some settings may be preset by your service provider. Connection settings To define the connection settings, select an e-mail account and Options > Edit > Connection settings . To edit the settings for the e-mail you receive, select Incoming e-mail . To edit the settings for the e- mail you send, select Outgoing e-mail . User settings To define the user settings for an e-mail account, select the account, select Opti ons > Edit > User settings , and define the following settings: ⢠My name â E n t er a n a m e t o ap p e a r b e fo r e y o u r e- mail address when you sen d e-mail. ⢠Reply-to â Select whet her you want replies t o be redirected to a different address. Select On , and enter the e-mail address to which you want to direct the replies. You can only enter one address to which replies are directed. 80 Messaging
⢠Delete e- mails f rom â Select whether you want to delete the e-mail messages only from the device or from both the device and the server. Select Always ask if you want to confirm from where the e-mail should be deleted every time you delete an e-mail. ⢠Send message â Select to send the e-mail immediately or when a co nnection is available. ⢠Send copy to s elf â Select whether you want to save a copy of the e-mail to your remote mailbox and to the address defined in My e- mail address in the Outgoing e-mail settings. ⢠Include signature â Select whether you want to attach a signature to your e -mail messag es. ⢠New e-mail alerts â Select whether you wa nt to be notified of a new received e-mail message with a tone and a note. Retrieval settings To define the retrieval settings, select the e-mail account, select Options > Edit > Retrieva l settings , and define the following settings: ⢠E-mail to retrieve â Select whether you want to retrieve only the e-mail header information such as sender, subject and date, e-mail, or e-mail with attachments. This settin g is for POP3 mailboxes only. ⢠Retrieval amount â Select the number of e-mail messages you want to re trieve from the remote server to your mailbox. ⢠IMAP4 folder p ath â Define the folder path for folders to be subscribed. This setting is for IMAP4 mailboxes only. ⢠Folder subs criptions â Subscribe to other folders in the remote mailbox and retrieve content from those folders. This setting is for IMAP4 mailboxes only. Automatic retrieval settings To define the automatic retrieval settin gs for an e-mail account, select the account, select Option s > Edi t > Automatic retri eval , and define the following settings: ⢠E-mail retrieval â Select Enabled to retrieve new e-mail messages automatica lly from your remote mailbox, or Only i n home ne tw. to retrieve new e- mail messages automa tically from your remote mailbox only when you are in your home network and not, for example, travelling. ⢠Retrieval days â Select the days on which e-mail is retrieved to your device. ⢠Retrieval hours â Define the hours between which the e-mail is retrieved. ⢠Retrieval interval â Select the interval between retrieving new e-mail mes sages. ⢠E-mail notifications â Select whether you want to receive notifications on received e-mail. Service message settings Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings > Service message . 81 Messaging
To receive service messages from service providers, select Service mes sages > On . To select how to download services and service message content, se lect Download messages > Automati cally or Manually . If you select Automati cally , you may st ill need to confirm some downloads since not all se rvic es can be downloaded automatica lly. Cell broadcast settings Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings > Cell broadcast . To receive cell broadcast messages, select Reception > On . To select the lang uages in which you w ant to receive cell broadcast me ssages, select Language . To display new topics in the cell broadca st topics list, select Topic detection > On . Other settings Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings > Othe r . Select from the following: ⢠Save sen t messages â Select whether to store sent messages in the Sent folder. ⢠Number of saved ms gs. â Enter the number of sent messages to sa ve. When the limi t is reache d, the oldest message is deleted. ⢠Memory in use â Select where to save your messages. You can sav e messages to the mem ory card only if a memory card is inserted. ⢠Folder view â D efine how you want the messages in Inbox to be shown. 82 Messaging
Phone To make and receive calls, the d evice must be switched on, the device must have a valid SIM card installed, and you must be located in the service area of a cellular network. To make or receive a net call, your device must be connected to a net call service. To connect to a net call service, your device must be in the coverage of a connection network, such as a WLAN access point. Voice calls Note: The actual inv oice for calls and services from your service provider may vary, depending on network features, r ounding off for billing, taxes, and so forth. Answer a call To answer a call, press the ca ll key. To reject a call, press the end key. To mute the ringing tone instead of answering a call, select Silence . When you have an acti ve call and the call waiting function (network service) is activated, press the call key to answer a new incoming call. The first call is put on hold. To end the active call, press the end key. Make a call Important : If the device has been locked, enter the lock code to activate the p hone function. When the device is locked, calls may be possible to the official emergency number. Making an emergency call in the offline profile or when the device is locked requires that the device recognise the number to be an official emergency number. It is advisable to change the profile or unlock the device by entering the lock code before you make the emergency call. To make a call, enter the phone number, including the area code, and press the call key. Tip: For international calls, add th e character that replaces the inter national access code, an d enter the country code, area code (omi t the leading 0, if necessar y), and phone number. 83 Phone
To end the call or cancel the call attempt, press the end key. To make a call using the sav ed contacts, press the contacts key. Enter the first letters of the name, scroll to the name, and press th e call key. See "Nokia Contacts for Eseries" , p. 35 . To make a call using the log, press the call key to view up to 20 numbers that you last ca lled or attempted to call. Scroll to the desired number or name, and press the call key. See "Log" , p. 93 . To adjust th e volume of an active call, use the volume keys. To switch from a voice call to a video call, select Options > Switch to video call . The device ends the voice call and makes a video call to the recipient. Make a conference call 1. To make a conference ca ll, enter a participant's phone number, and press the call key. 2. Whe n the pa rticip ant an swers, select Options > New call . 3. When you have made a phone call to all the participants, select Options > Conference to merge the calls into a conference call. T o m u t e t h e m i c r o p h o n e o f y o u r d e v i c e d u r i n g t h e c a l l , select Options > Mute . To drop a participant from the conference call, scroll to the participant, and se lect Opti ons > Conference > Drop particip ant . To discuss priva tely with a conference call participant, scroll to the participant, and select Options > Conference > Private . Video calls To be able to make a video call, you need to be in the coverage of a UM TS network. For availability of and subscription to video call services, contact your network operator or service provider. While talking, you can see a real-time, two-way video between you and the recipient of the call, if the recipien t has a compatible mobile phone. The video image captured by the camera in your device is shown to the video call recipient. A video call can only be made between two parties. Make a video call Warning: Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To make a video call, enter the phone number or select the recipient of the call from Contacts, and select Options > Call > Video call . When the video call starts, the camera of the device is a ctivated. If the 84 Phone
camera is already in use, video sending is disabled. If the recipient of the call does not want to send a video back to you, a still image is shown instead. You can define the still image in Menu > Tools > Setti ngs > Phone > Call > Image in video call . To disable the sending of audio, video, or video and audio, select Options > Disable > Sending audio , Sending vi deo , or Sending aud. & video . To use the loudspeaker for receiving audio, select Options > Activate loudspeaker . To m ute the loudspeaker and use the earpiece, select Options > Activate handset . To swap the places of imag es, select Options > Change image order . To zoom the image on the display, select Options > Zoom in or Zoom out . To end the video call and make a new voice call to the same recipient, select Opti ons > Sw itch to voi ce call . Share a video Use Video sharing (network service) to send live video or a video clip from your mobile device to another compatible mobile device du ring a voice call. To use this feature, t he device must be within the coverag e of a UMTS network. 1. Make a phone call to the se lected recipient. You can start sharing a video once the phone call is established and your device has been registered to the SIP server. 2. To send live video or a video clip from your device, select Options > Share video > Live or Clip . To preview the clip, select Options > Play . 3. Select the recipient from Contacts, or enter the recipient's SIP a ddress manually to send a n invitation to the recipient. Sharing begins automatically when the recipient accepts th e video sharing. 4. To end sharing th e video, select Sto p . The voice call continues no rmally. Receive a video sharing invitation When you receive a video sh arin g invitat ion, a message is displayed showing the ca ller's name or SIP address. To accept the invitation an d begin the sharing session, select Accept . To reject the invitation, select Reject . The voice call continues normally. Net calls Select Menu > Communic. > Internet tel. . Your device supports voice calls over the internet (net calls). Your device attempts emergency calls primarily 85 Phone
over cellular networks. If an emergency call using cellular networks is not successful, your device attempts an emergency ca ll through your net call provider. Due to the establ ished nature of cellular telephony, you should us e cellular networks for emergency calls, if possible. If you have c ellular network coverage available, make sure that your cellular phone is switched on and ready to make calls before you attempt an emer gency call. The capability for an emergency call us ing internet telephony depends on the availability of a WLAN and your n et call provider's implementation of emergency call capabilities. Contact your net ca ll provider to check the internet telephony emer gency call capability. With the net call service (network service), you can make and receive calls over the internet using the VoIP (voice over internet protocol) technology. Net calls can be established between computers, between mobile phones, and between a VoIP device and a traditional telephone. To make or receive a net call, your device must be within WLAN co verage, for example. The availability of the net call service may vary according to your country or area. Create a net call profile Before you can make net calls, you need to creat e a net call profile. 1. Sele ct Menu > Tools > Settings > Connectio n > SIP settings > Options > New SIP profile , and enter the required information. To make the login to the net call service au tomatic, select Regis tration > Al ways on . Contact your net call provider for the correct settings. 2. Sele ct Back until you return to the Connection settings main view. 3. Sele ct Internet tel. > Options > New profi le . Enter a name for the profile, and select the SIP profile you just created. To set the created profile to be used automatically when connecting to the net call service, select Menu > Communic. > Interne t tel. > Preferred profile . To login to the net call service manually, select Registration > When need ed in the SIP sett ings when creating a net call profile. To make secure net calls, ask your service provider for secure net call set tings. The proxy server selected for the net call profile must support secure net calls. A secure net call is i ndicated with . Connect to the net call service Select Menu > Communic. > Int ernet tel. . To make or receive a net call, your device must be connected to a net call service. If you have select ed automatic login, your device automatica lly connects to the net call service. If you lo gin to the servic e manually, select an available netw ork from the list and Select . The list of networks is re freshe d automatically every 15 seconds. To refresh th e list manually, select Options > 86 Phone
Refresh . Use this option if your WLAN is not shown on the list. To select a net call servic e for outgoing calls if the device is connected to more than one service, select Options > Change service . To configure new services, select Opt ions > Configure service . This option is shown only if there are services that have not been configured. To save the netw ork to which you are cu rrently connected, select Option s > Save network . The saved networks are marked with a star on the list of networks. To connect to a net call service using a hi dden WLAN, select Options > U se hidden n etwork . To end the connection to a net call service, select Options > Disconnect from se rvice . Make net calls You can make a net call from all applications wher e you can make a regular voice call. For example in Contacts, scroll to the desired contact, and select Call > Inte rnet call . To make a net call in the home screen, enter the SIP address, and press the call key. To make a net call to an address that does not start with a digit, press any number key when the device is in the standby mode, then press # for a few seconds to clear the display and to switch the device from the number mode to the let ter mode. Enter the address, and press the call key. To set net call as the preferred call type for ou tgoing calls, select Menu > Communic. > Internet tel. > Options > Settings > Defaul t call type > Inte rnet call . When your device is con nected to a net call service, all calls are made as net calls. Net call se rv ice settings Select Options > Se ttings , scroll to the settings of the desired service, and press the scroll key. To login auto matically to th e net call service, select Login type > Automatic . If you use the automati c login type for WLANs, the de vice periodically scans for WLANs, which increases th e demand on battery power and reduces the battery life. To login manually to the net call service, select Login type > Manual . To view the networks you have saved for the net call service and the networks detected by the net call service, select Saved conn. networks . To define the service-specific settings, select Edit service settings . This option is on ly av ailable if a service-specific software pl ug-in has been installed in the device. 87 Phone
Speed dialling Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Phone > Call > Speed dialling > On . Speed dialling allows you to make a call by pressing and holding a number key when in the home screen. To assign a number key to a phone number, select Menu > Communic. > Speed dial . Scroll to the number key (2 - 9) on the display, and select Opti ons > Assign . Select the desired number from Contacts. To delete the phone number assigned to a number key, scroll to the speed dialling key, and select Options > Remove . To modify a phone number assigned to a number key, scroll to the speed dialling key, and select Options > Change . Call divert Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Phone > Call divert . Divert incoming calls to your voice mailbox or to another phone number. For details, cont act your service provider. Select to divert voice, data , and select from the following options: ⢠All voice calls , All data call s â Divert all incoming vo ice, data. ⢠If busy â Divert incoming calls when you have an active call. ⢠If not answered â Divert incoming calls after your device rings for a specified period of time. Select t he time you let the device ring before di verting the call in the Delay time: list. ⢠If out of reach â Divert calls when the device is switched off or out of network coverage. ⢠If not available â Activate the last three settings at the same time. This op tion diverts calls if your device is busy, not answered, or out of reach. To divert calls to your voice mailbox, select a call type and a diverting option, then select Options > Activate > To voice mailbox . To divert calls to another phone number, select a call type and a diverting option, then selec t Options > Activate > To other number . Enter a n umber in th e Number: field, or select Find to retrieve a number saved in Contacts. To check the current divert ing status, scroll to the diverting option, and select Optio ns > Check status . To stop diverting calls, scroll to the diverting option, and select Opt ions > Cancel . Call barring Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Phone > Call barring . You can bar the calls that ca n be made or received with the device (network servic e). To change the se ttings, 88 Phone
you need the barring password from your service provider. Call barring affects all call types. Call barring and call divertin g cannot be act ive at the same time. When calls are barred, calls may be possible to certain official emergency numbers. To bar calls, select Voice call barring and from the following options: ⢠Outgoin g calls â Prevent making voice calls with your device. ⢠Incoming calls â Prevent incoming calls. ⢠Internati onal call s â Prevent calling to foreign countries or regions. ⢠Incoming calls when abroad â Prevent incoming calls when outside your home country. ⢠International cal ls except to home country â Prevent calls to foreign countries or regions, but allow calls to your home country. To check the status of voic e call barrings, select the barring option and Options > Check status . To stop all voice call barrings, select a barring option and Options > Cancel all barrings . To change the password used for barring voice and data calls, select Voice call barring > Options > Edit barring password . Enter the current code, then the new code twice. The barring password must be four digits long. For details, contact your service provider. Bar net calls Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Phone > Call barring > Internet call barring . To reject net calls from anonymous callers, select Anonymous call b arring > On . Send DTMF tones You can send dual tone mu lti-frequency (DTMF) tones during an active call to control your voice mailbox or other automated phone se rvices. Send a DTMF tone sequence 1. Make a call, and wait until the other end answers. 2. Select Optio ns > Send DTMF . 3. Enter the DTMF tone sequence, or select a predefined sequence. Attach a DTMF tone sequence to a contact card 1. Select Menu > Communic. > Contacts . O pen a contact, and select Options > Edit > Options > Add detail > DTMF . 2. Enter the tone sequence. To insert a pause of about 2 seconds before or between DTMF tones, enter p . To set the device to send the DTMF tones on ly after you select Send DTMF during a call, enter w . 3. Select Done . 89 Phone
Voice mail Select Menu > Communic. > Call m ailbox . When you open the Voice mail application for th e first time, you are asked to enter the number of your voice mailbox. To call your voice mail, select Options > Call voice mailbox . If you hav e configured net ca ll settings to yo ur device and have an internet call mailbox, select Internet call mailbox > Options > Call int ernet call mbx. to call it. To call your voice mail when in the home screen, press and hold 1 ; or press 1 and then the call key. If you ha ve defined an internet call ma ilbox, select whether you want to call yo ur voice mail or internet call mailbox. To change the voice mailbox number, select the mailbox and Options > Change number . To change the internet call mailbox addres s, select the mailbox and Options > Change address . Voice aid Select Menu > Tools > Voice aid . The Voice aid applicati on reads text on the display, allowing you to u se the basic functions of your dev ice without looking at th e display. To hear the entries in your contacts list, select Contacts . Do not u se this option if you h ave more than 500 contacts. To hear information on your missed and received calls, dialled numbers, and frequent calls, select Recent calls . To listen to your voice messages, select Voice mailbox . To dial a telephone number, select Dialler . To use voice commands to make a phone call, select Voice commands . To have your received me ssages read aloud, sele ct Message reader . To hear the current time, select Clock . To hear the current date, scroll down. If the Voice aid application is open when a calendar alarm is due, th e application reads the calen dar alarm content aloud. To hear more options, select Options . Voice commands Select Menu > Tools > Voice comm. . Use voice commands to make phone calls and launch applications, profiles, or ot h er functions on the device. The device creates a voice tag for the entries in Contacts and for the functions de si gnated in the Voice commands application. When a voice command is 90 Phone
spoken, the device compares the spoken words to the voice tag in the device. Voice c ommands are not dependent on a speakerâÂÂs voice; however, the voice recognition in the device adapts to the main userâÂÂs voice to recognise voice commands better. Make a call A voice tag for a contact is the name or nickname that is saved on the conta ct in Contacts. Note: Using voice tags may be difficult in a noisy environment or during an emergency, so you should not rely solely upon voice dialing in all circumstances. To listen to a voice tag, open a conta ct, and select Options > Play voice tag . 1. To make a call using a voice command, press and hold the voice key. 2. When you hear the tone or see the visual display, clearly speak the name saved on the contact. 3. The device plays a synth esised voice tag for the recognised contact in the selected device language, and displays the name and number. Af ter a timeout of 1.5 seconds, the device dials the number. If the recognised contact wa s not correct, select Next to view a list of other matches or Quit to cancel dialling. If several number s are save d under the contac t, the device selects the default nu mber, if it has been set. Otherwise, the device selects the first available number of the following fields: Mobile , Mobile (home) , Mobile (business) , Telephone , Tel. (home) , and Tel. (busines s) . Launch an application The device creates voice tags for the applications listed in the Voice comma nds application. To launch an application using a voice command, press and hold the voice key, and clearly sp eak the name of the application. If the reco gnised application was not correct, select Next to view a list of other matches or Quit to cancel. To add more applications to the list, select Options > New application . To change the voice command of an application, select Options > Change command , and enter the new command. Change profiles The device creates a voice tag for each profile. To set on a profile using a voice command, press and hold the voice key, and say the name of the profile. To change the voice command, select Profiles > Options > Change command . 91 Phone
Voice command settings To switch off the synthes iser that play s recognised voice commands in the se lected device language, select Options > Settings > Synthesiser > Off . To reset voice recognition learning when the main user of the device has changed, select Remove voice adapt s. . Push to talk Select Menu > Communic. > PTT . Push to talk (PTT ) (network service) provides direct voice communication connecte d with the p ush of a key. With PTT, y ou can use your device as a wa lkie-talkie. You can us e PTT to have a conversation with on e person or with a group of people, or join a channel. A channel is like a chat room: you ca n call the channel to see if anyone is online. The channel call does n ot alert the other users; the users just join the channel and start speaking with each other. In PTT communication, one person talks while the other users listen throu gh the built-in loudsp eaker. Users take turn s responding to each other. Because only one user can talk at a time, the maximum durat ion of a speech turn is limited. For details of the speech turn duration for your network, contact your service provider. PTT settings Select Options > Settings and select User se ttings to define your preferences for PTT, or Co nnectio n settings to change the connec tion details. Contact your service provider for the correct settings. Tip: You may also receive the settings in a message from the provider of the PTT service. Log in to PTT service If you have set Application start-up on in Us er settings , PTT au tomatically logs in to the service when started. If not, you mus t log in manually. To log in to the PTT se rvice manually, select Optio ns > Log in t o PTT . When the Ringing type setting of your device is set to Beep on ce or Silent , or there is an ongoing phone call, you cannot make or receive PTT calls. Make a PTT call Warning: Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To make a PTT call, select Option s > Contacts , select one or several con tacts from the list, and press the voice key. Remember to hold the device in front of you during the call so you can s ee the display. The display 92 Phone
informs you when it is yo ur turn to speak. Speak towards the microphone, and do not cover th e loudspeaker wi th your hands. Press and hold the v oice key the entire time you ar e talking. When you have finished talking, release the key. To end the PTT call, press the end key. When you receive a PTT call, press the call key to answer the call or the end key to dismiss the call. Created PTT calls Select Options > PTT lo g > Created P TT , and a call. To make a PTT call to a contact, select Options > Talk 1 to 1 . To send a request to a contact to call you, select Options > Send callback request . To crea te a con tact, sel ect Options > Save to Contacts . Manage PTT contacts To view, add, modify, delete, or call contacts, select Options > Contacts . A lis t of names from th e Contacts application is displayed with informat ion about their login status. To call a selected contact, select Opt ions > Talk 1 to 1 . To make a group call, select several contacts and Options > Talk to many . To send the contact a request to ca ll you, select Options > Send callback request . To answer a callback request, select Show to open the callback request. To make a PT T call to the send er, press the voice key. Create a PTT channel To create a channe l, sel ect Options > New channel > Create new . To join a channel, select th e channel you want to talk to, and press the voice key. To invite a user to a channel, se lect Option s > Send invitation . To view the currently active users of a channel, select Options > Active members . When you log in to PTT, you are automatically connected to the channels that were a ctive when the application was last closed. Exit PTT To exit PTT, se lect Opt ions > Exit . Select Yes to log out and close the service. Select No if you want to keep the application active in the background. Log Select Menu > Log . 93 Phone
Log stores information about the communication history of the device. The device regis ters missed and received calls only if the network supports these functions, the device is switched on and within the network service area. Call and data registers To view recently missed, received, and dialled calls, select Recent calls . Tip: To open Dialled numbers when in the home screen, press the call key. To view the approximate dura tion of calls to and from your device, select Call duration . To view the amount of data transferred during packet data connection s, select Packet data . Monitor all communicat ions To monitor all voice calls, text messages, or data connections registered by th e device, o pen the general log tab. To view detailed information about a communication event, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. Tip: Subeven ts, such as a text me ssage sent in more than one part and p acket data connections, are logged as one communication event. Connections to your mailbox, multimedia messaging centre, or web pages are shown as packet data connections. To add the phone number fr om a communication event to Contacts, select Opti ons > Sav e to Contacts , an d select to create a n ew contact or to add the phone number to an existing contact. To copy the number, for example to paste it to a text message, select Options > Use number > Copy . To view a single type of com munication event or communication events with one other party, select Options > Filter , and select the desired filter. To erase the contents of the log, recent calls register, and messaging delivery re ports permanently, select Options > Clear log . Call and send messages from Log To call back a caller, select Recent calls and open Missed calls , Received calls , or Dialled numbers . Select the caller, and Option s > Call . To reply to a caller with a message, select Recent calls and open Missed calls , Received calls , o r Dialled number s . Select the caller, and select Options > Create message . You can send text messages and multimedia messa ges. Log settings To set the time for keepin g all communication events in the log, select Option s > Settings > Log 94 Phone
duration , and the time. If you select No log , all log contents are permanently deleted. 95 Phone
Travelling Need directions? Looking for a restaurant? Your E series device has the tools to get y ou where you want to be. About GPS and satellite signals The Global Positioning Syst em (GPS) is a worldwide radio navigation system th at includes 24 satelli tes and their ground stations that monitor the op eration of the satellites. Your device has an internal GPS receiver. A GPS terminal receives low-power radio signals from the satellites and measures the travel tim e of the signals. From the travel time, the GPS receiver can calculate its location to the accuracy of metres. The coordinates in the GPS are expressed in degrees and decimal degrees format using the international WGS-84 coordinate system. The Global Positioning System (GPS) is operated by the government of the United States, which is solely responsible for its accura cy and main tenance. The accuracy of location data can be affected by adjustments to GPS satellites made by the United Stat es government and is subject to change wi th the United States Department of D efense civil GPS policy and the Federal Radionavigation Pl an. Accuracy can also be affected by poor satellite geometry. Avai lability and quality of GPS signal s may be affected by your location, buildings, natural obstacle s, and weather cond itions. The GPS receiver should only be used outdo ors to allo w reception of GPS signals. Any GPS should not be us ed for precise location measurement, and you shou ld never rely solely on location data from the GPS receiver and cellu lar radio networks for positioning or navigation. The trip meter has lim ite d accuracy, and rounding errors may occur. Accuracy can also be affected by availability and qualit y of GPS signals. To enable or disable different positioning methods, such as Bluetooth GPS, sele ct Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Positioning > Positioning methods . About satellite signals If your device cannot find the satellite signal, consider the following: ⢠If you are indoors, go outdoors to receive a better signal. ⢠If the numeric keypad slide is closed, open it. 96 Travelling
⢠If you are outdoors, move to a more open space. ⢠Ensure that y our hand does n ot cover the GPS antenna of your device. ⢠If the weather conditions are bad, the si gnal strength may be affected. ⢠Establishing a GP S connec tion may take from a couple of seconds to several mi nutes. Satellite status To check how many satellites you r device has found, and whether your device is receiving satellite signals, select Menu > GPS > GPS data > Posi tion > Options > Satellite status . If your device has found satellites, a bar for each satellite is shown in the satellite info view. The longer the bar, the stronger the satellite signal. Wh en your device has received en ough data from the satellite signal to ca lculate the coordinates of your location, the bar turns black. Initially your device must re ceive signals from at least four satellites to be able to calculate the coordinates of your location. When the in itial calculation has been made, it may be possible to continue calculating the coordinates of your location with three s atellites. However, the accuracy is generally better when more satellites are found. Positioning settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Positioning . To use a specific positioning method to detect the location of your device, select Positioning meth ods . To select a positioning server, select Po sition ing server . Maps Select Menu > GPS > Maps . With Maps, you can see you r current location on the map, browse maps for diffe rent cities and countries, search for addresses and diffe rent points of interest, plan routes from one loca tion to another, and save locations and send them to compa tible devices. You can also purchase licences for extra services, such as travel guides, traffic in formation, and navigation service with voice guidance. These services are not available for all countries or regions. If you browse to an area which is not covered by maps already downloaded in you r device, a map for the area is automatically downloaded through the internet. Some maps may be available in your device or memory card. You can also use the N okia Map Loader PC software to download ma ps. To install Nokia Map Loader to a compatible PC, go t o www.maps.nokia.com. Downloading maps ma y invo lve the transmission of large amounts of data thro ugh your se rvice provider's network. Contact your service p rovider for information about data transm ission charges. 97 Travelling
When you use Maps fo r the first time, you may need to select an access point for downloading maps. To change the access point later, select Options > Tools > Settings > Internet > Default access point . About Maps To connect to the internet automatically w hen you start Maps, se lect Options > T ools > Settings > Internet > Go online at start-up > Yes . To prevent automatic downloading of ma ps, select Options > Tools > Settings > In ternet > Go online at start-up > N . To set the device to ask your permission before connecting to the internet, select Option s > Tools > Settings > Internet > Go online at start-up > Always ask . To be informed when your device registers to a network other th an your home network, select Options > Tools > Settings > In ternet > Roaming w arning > On (shown only when you are online). For details and roa ming costs, conta ct your service provider. Tip: To avoid data transfer c osts, you can also use Maps without an in ternet connection, and browse the maps that are saved in your device or memory card. Almost all digital cartog raphy is inaccurate and incomplete to some extent. Never rely solely on the cartography that you download for use in this device. Move on a map The map coverage varies by country an d region. When you open Maps, the capi tal of the country you are in or the location that was saved from your last session is shown. The map of the lo cation is also downloaded, if needed. To zoom in to your GPS position or your last known location, press the function key and 0 . When the GPS connection is active, shows your current location on the map. T o m o v e o n t h e m a p , s c r o l l up, down, left , or right with the scroll key. The map is oriented towards north by default . To zoom in and out on the map, press the fu nction key and * , or the function key and # . When you browse the map on the display, a new map is automatically downloaded if you scroll to an area which is not covered by maps already downloaded. These maps are free of charge, but downloading may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. For more information on data transm ission charges , contact your service provider. Th e maps are automatically saved in the device memory or on a compatible memory card (if inserted). 98 Travelling o
Display indicators The GPS indicator on the bottom right corner of the display sh ows the avai lability and strength of the satellite signal. One bar is one satellite. When the device tries to find a satellite, the bar is yellow. When the device receives enough da ta from the satellite to establish a GPS conne ction, the bar t urns green. The more green bars , the stronger the GPS connection. Initially, your device must re ceive signals from at least four satellites to calculat e the coordinates of your location. After the ini tial calculation, signals from three satellites may be enough. The data transfer indicator shows the internet connection used and the amount of data transferred since the applicat ion started. Find locations To find a location in the city or area displayed on the map, enter the full or partial address of the location in the search field, and press the scroll key. To find a location in another city, ente r the city and the full or partial address, such as London Oxford Str eet , and press the scroll key. To find a specific address, or an address in another country, select Options > Search > Addresses . Country/Region * and City or post cod e are mandatory. Tip: To search for locations in another country using the search field, enter also the name of the country in the search field: Rome Italy . To import a location a ddress from the Contacts application , select Options > Search > Addresses > Options > Select from Contacts . The search results a re groupe d by categories. To limit the search to one category, select Options > Search . If you search for locations without an internet connection, the search results a re limited to a radius of 50 km (31 miles). Plan a route To plan a route, select yo ur start po int on the map or search for a location, press the scroll key, and select Add to route . To define the destination and add more locations for your route, se lect Options > Add route point , and search for the location. To switch between walking or driving mode, select Options > Settings > Transport mode To show the route on the map, select Options > Show route . To navigate to the destinat ion by car or on foot, if you have purchased a licence for these extra services, select Options > Start dr iving or Start walking . To save the route, select Options > Save route . 99 Travelling
Walk to your destination The walking route ignores any possible limitations t o car navigation, su ch as one-way st reets and turn restrictions, and includ es areas such as pedestrian zones and parks. It al so prioritises walkways and smaller roads, and omits highways and motorwa ys. The route is drawn to the map, and the arrow indicat es the direction. The small dots show in which direction you are walking. The length of a walking route is limi ted to a maximum of 50 kilometres (31 miles) and the travelling speed to a maximum of 30 km/h (18 miles/h). If t he speed limit is exceeded, navigation stop s and is resumed once the speed is back within limits. There is no voice guidance available for pedest rian navigation. To purchase a licence for pedestrian na vigation, select Options > Extras > Walk . The licence is region- specific and can be used only in the selected area. You can pay for the licence through a credit card or in your phone bill, if supported by your service provider. Tip: To try out navigati on for three days with a free licence, press the scroll key, and select Walk to . Maps checks if a free licence is available for your device. To activate the li cence, select OK . You can only use the licence once. To start nav igating, select a loc ation and Options > Walk to . To find an alternative route, select Options > Different route . To stop navigating, se lect Stop . Drive to your destination To purchase a licence for pe destrian an d car navigation with voice guidance, select Opti ons > Extras > Drive & Walk . The licence is regi on-specific and can be used only in the selected area. Tip: To try out navigation for three days with a free licence, press the scroll key, and select Drive to . Maps checks if a free licence is available for your device. To activate th e licence, select OK . You can only use the licence once. To start navigating by car, select a location, press the scroll key, and select Drive to . When you use car navigation for the first tim e, you are asked to select the language of the voice gu idance and download t he related voice guidance file s. To change the language later, in the main view, select Options > Tools > Settings > Navigation > Voice guidance . Voice guidance is n ot available for pedestrian navigation. To switch between different views during the navigation, press the scroll key, and select Manoeuvre view , Bird's-eye view , or Arrow view . To find an alternative route, select Options > Di ff. route . To repeat the voice guidance, select Options > Repeat . 100 Travelling
To stop navigating , select Stop . Traffic information The real-time traffic info rmation service provides information about traffi c events that may affect your travel. The traffic info rmation servic e is an extra service that you can purchase a nd download int o your device, if available in your country or region. To purchase a licence for th e traffic information service, select Options > Extras > Traffic info . To view information about traffic events, select Options > Traf fic info . The events are shown on the map as triangles and lines. To view the details of an event, including possible rerouting options, select the event and Optio ns > Open . To update the traffic i nformation, select Up date traffic info . Travel guides Travel guides provide inform ation about at tractions, restaurants, hotels, and other points of interest. S ome guides contain videos and au dio clips. The guides must be purchased and down loaded before use. Downloading trave l guides may i nvolve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service providerâÂÂs network. Contact your service provider for information about data transmission charges. To purchase and download travel guides, or to view downloaded ones, select Options > Extras > Guides . To browse travel guide categories, select a category, and press the scroll key. If there are subc ategories, select a subcategory, and press the s croll key again. To download a new guide to your device, scroll to the desir ed guide , and s elect Yes . You can p ay for the guides through a credit card or in your phone bill, if supported by your service provider. GPS data Select Menu > GPS > GPS data . With GPS data, you ca n view your current locat ion, find your way to a desired location, and track distance. Select Navigation to view navigatin g information to your trip destination, Pos ition to view positioning information about your current location, or Trip dist. to view your tr avelling information su ch as the distance and duration you have travelled, and your average and maximum speeds. The application must rece ive positioning information from at least four satellites to be used a s a travelling aid. 101 Travelling
The trip meter has limite d accuracy, and rounding errors may occur. Accuracy can also be affected by availability and qualit y of GPS signals. Use GPS data To check the signal strength of the satelli tes that provide the positioning information necessary for navigat ion, op en any of the three views and select Options > Satellite status . To set a landmark or location as the destination of your trip, select Navigation > Options > Set destination . Yo u can also enter the destinati on latitude and longitude coordinates. To remove the destination set for your trip, select Naviga tion > Options > Stop naviga tion . To save your current posi tion as a landmark, select Naviga tion or Po sitio n , and Options > Save positio n . To activate t he trip met er, select Trip distance > Options > Start . To stop the trip meter, select Options > Stop . To reset all fields and start calculati ng the trip again, select Trip distance > Opti ons > Restart . To change the measuring system in use, s elect Options > Settings > Measure ment system > Metric or Imperial . To enter the altitude calibration to correct the altitude received from the positioning satellites, select Options > Settings > Altitude calibrat ion . Landmarks Select Menu > GPS > Landmarks . Landmarks are coordina tes to geographic locations that you can save to your device for later use in different location-based services. You can create landmarks us ing the intern al GPS rec eiver of your device or network (network service). Create a landmark To create a landmark, select Options > New landma rk . Select Current pos ition to make a network request for the latitude and longitude coordinates of your current location, Select from map to select the location from a map, or Enter manually to fill in necessary location inform ation such as a name, category, address, la titude, longitude, and altitude. To show the landmark on the map , selec t Opt ions > Show on map . Edit landmarks To edit a landmark, select Options > Edit > Options and from the following: 102 Travelling
⢠Select categories â Organise the landmark to a group of similar landmark s. Select a ca tegory to modify landmark inform ation such as a name, category, address, latitude, lon gitude, and altitude. ⢠Retrieve current positio n â Request and automatically fill in the ge ographical latitude and longitude coordinates to make a landmark of your current location. ⢠Delete â Remove the landmark. ⢠Landmark icon â Change the icon of the landmark. ⢠Show on map â Show the land mark on the map. ⢠Send â Send the landmark to compatible devices. ⢠Editin g options â Edit the phone numbers and URL addresses assigned to th e landmark. ⢠Writin g language â Change the writing language. Landmark categories You can see the landmark cate gories in two views: one lists categories that alre ady contain landmarks , and the other lists all the categories your device has. To view the landmarks that a category contains, scroll to the category , and press th e scroll key. To create a new category, select Op tions > Edit categories > Options > New category . To move a landmark from one category to another, open the landmarks tab, select the landmark, and Options > Add to category . Select the old category to remove the mark next to it. Select the category or categories to which you want to add the landmark. Receive landmarks Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging . Open a message that conta ins a landmark you ha ve received from another devi ce. Scroll to the landmark, and press the scroll key. To save the landmark in your device, select Op tions > Save . To forward the landmark to compatible device s, select Options > Send . To show the received land mark on the map, select Options > Show on map . To find out how to navigate to the received landma rk, select Options > Show route . 103 Travelling
Nokia Office Tools Nokia Office Tools support mobile business and e nable effective communication with work teams. Active notes Select Menu > Office > Active note s . Active notes allows you to create, edit, an d view different kinds of notes, for example, meeting memos, hobby notes, or shopping li sts. You ca n insert images, videos, and sound in the notes. You can link notes to other applications, such as Cont acts, and send notes to others. Create and edit notes To create a note, start writing. To edit a note, scroll to it, a nd press the scroll ke y. To insert images, sound clip s, video, business cards, web bookmarks, and files, select Options > Insert object . To add new items to the note, sele ct Opti ons > Insert new . You can record sou nd and video clips, and capture images. To add boldface, italics, or underlining to your text or change the font colour, press and hold the shift key and use the scroll key to select the text. Then select Options > Text . To send the no te, select Options > Send . To link a not e to a cont act, select Options > Link note to call > Add contacts . You can see the note on the display of your device when making a call to or receiving a call from the contact. Settings for Active notes Select Settings . To save notes to your device memory, se lect Memory in use > Phone memory . To save them to a memory card, sele ct Memory in u se > Mem ory card . To change th e layout of ac tive notes, select Change view > Grid . To view the notes as a list, select Change view > List . To see a note in the ba ckground when making or receiving phone calls, select S h o w n o t e d u r i n g ca l l > Yes . 104 Nokia Office Tools
Tip: If you temporari ly do not want to see the notes during phone calls, select Show n ote during call > No . This way you do not have to remove the links between notes and con tact cards. Calculator Select Menu > Office > Calculator . This calculator has limited a ccuracy and is designed for simple calculations. To make a calculation, en te r the first number of the calculation. Select a function such as add or subtract from the function map. Ente r the second number of the calculation, and select = . The calculator performs operations in the order they are entered. The result of the calculation remains in the editor field and can be used as the first number of a new ca lculation. The device saves the re sult of the last calculati on in its memory. Exiting the Calculator application or switching off the device do es not clear the memory. To recall the last saved result the next time you open the Calculator application, select Options > Last re sult . To save the numbers or resu lts of a calculation, select Options > Memory > Save . To retrieve the results of a calculation from the memory and use them in a c alculation, select Options > Memory > Recall . File manager With File manager, you ca n mana ge the contents and properties of files and folders on your device memory and memory card. You can open, create, move, copy, rename, send, and search for files and folders. Copyright protection may prevent sending some files. Open the device tab or the memory card tab. To select multiple files, scroll to each file, and select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark . To send the selected files, select Option s > Send . To move or copy files or folders to another folder, select Options > Move to folder or Copy to folder . Default folders such as Sound clips in Gallery cannot be moved. To search for files, select Options > Find . Enter the search text, and press th e scroll key. The folders and files whose names con tain the search tex t are displayed. To view information about the selected file, select Options > View d etails . To view additional information about the file online, select Options > Additional details . Quickoffice Select Menu > Office > Quickoffice . Quickoffice consists of Quickword for Microsoft Word, Quicksheet for Microsoft Excel, Quickpoint for Microsoft 105 Nokia Office Tools
PowerPoint, and Quickm anager for purchasing software. Yo u can vi ew Micr osoft Office 20 00, XP, and 2003 documents (*.doc, *.xls, and *.ppt ) with Quickoffice. If you have the editor version of Quickoffice, you can also edit files. All file formats or feat ures are not suppo rted. Work with files To open a file, scroll to it, and press the sc roll key. To sort files according to the type , select Option s > Sort by . To view the details of a file, select Options > Details . The details include the name, size and location of the file, and the time and date when the file was last modified. To send files to a compatible device, select Options > Send and the send ing method. Converter Select Menu > Office > Converter . The converter has limited accuracy, and rounding errors may occur. Convert measurements 1. Scroll to the Type field, and select Option s > Conversion type to open a list of measures. Select the measure to use, and select OK . 2. Scroll to the first Unit field, and select Options > Select unit . Select the unit from which t o convert, and select OK . Scroll to the next Unit field, and select the unit to which to convert. 3. Scroll to the first Amount field, and enter the value to convert. The other Amount field changes automatically to show the converted v alue. Set base curren cy and exchange rate When you change base curr ency, you must enter new exchange rates because a ll previously set exchange rates are cleared. Before you can make currency co nversions, you must choose a base currency and add exchange rates. The rate of the base currency is always 1. The base currency determines the conversion rates of the other currencies. 1. To set the rate of exchan ge for the unit of currency, scroll to the Type field, and select O ptions > Currency rates . 2. Scroll to the currency type and enter the ex change rate you would like to set per single u nit of currency. 106 Nokia Office Tools
3. To change the base currency, scroll to the currency, and select Options > Set as base currency . 4. Select Done > Ye s to save the changes. After you have inserted all the necess ary exchange rates, you can make currency conversions. Zip manager Select Menu > Office > Zip . With Zip manager, you can create new archive files to store compressed ZIP format ted files; add single or multiple compressed files or directories to an archive; set, clear, or change the archive password for protected archives; and chan ge settings, s uch as compression level, and file name encoding. You can store the archive fi les on the device memory or on a memory card. PDF reader Select Menu > Office > Adobe PDF . With PDF reader you can read PDF documents on the display of your device; search for text in the documents; modify settings, s uch as zoom level and page views; and send PDF files using e-mail. Printing You can print documents, su ch as files, messages, or web pages, from the device, preview a print job, define page layout options, select a printer, or print to a file. You may not be able to print a ll types of docu ments. Print files To configure a printer for your device, select Menu > Office > Printers > Options > Add . Scroll to the printer and select Option s > Set as default . Before you print, make sure your device is properly connected to the printer. To print a document, select Option s > Printing options > Print . To print to a file, select Options > Printing options > Print > Print to file , and determine the location for the file. To change the prin ti ng options, select Options > Printing options . You can select the pr inter you want to use, the number of copi es and the r ange of pages you want to pri nt. To change the page la yout before printing, select Options > Printing options > Page setup . You c an change the paper size an d orientation, define the margins, and ins ert a header or a footer. The maximum length of the header and footer is 128 characters. 107 Nokia Office Tools
To preview a file or messag e before you print, select Options > Printing options > Preview . Printing options Open a document , such as a file or messag e, and select Options > Printing options > Print . Define the following options: ⢠Printer â Select an available printer from the list. ⢠Print â Sel ect All pages , Even pages , or Odd pages as the print range. ⢠Print range â Select All pages in range , Current page , or Defined pages as the page range. ⢠Number of copie s â Select the number of copies to print. ⢠Print to file â Select to print to a file and determine the location for the file. The available options may vary. Printer settings Select Menu > Office > Printers . To add a new printer, select Opt ions > Add . Define the following: ⢠Printer â Enter a name for the printer. ⢠Driver â Select a driver for the printer. ⢠Bearer â Select a bearer for the printer. ⢠Access point â Select the a ccess po int. ⢠Port â Select the port. ⢠Host â Define the host. ⢠User â Enter the user. ⢠Queue â Enter the print queue. ⢠Orientati on â Select the orientation. ⢠Paper si ze â Select the paper size. ⢠Media type â Select the media type. ⢠Colour mode â Select the colour mode. ⢠Printer model â Select the printer model. The available options may vary. Clock Select Menu > Office > Clock . In Clock, you can view your local time and time zone information, set and edit al arms, or modify date and time settings. Alarm clock Open the alarm clock tab. To set an ala rm, select Options > New alarm . When an alarm is a ctive, is displayed. To switch off the alarm, select Stop , or to stop the alarm for 5 minutes, select Snooze . If the alarm time is reached while the device is switched off, the device switches itself on and sta rts sounding the a larm tone. If you select Stop , the device asks whether you want to activate the device for calls. Select No to switch off the device or Yes to make and receive calls. Do not select Yes when wireless phone use may cause interference or danger. 108 Nokia Office Tools
To change the alarm time, select Opt ions > Res et alarm . To remove the alarm, select Op tions > Remove alarm . World clock Open the world clock tab to check the time in different cities. To add a city to the world clock view, select Option s > Add city . To change the city that determines the time and date in your device, select Options > Set as current city . The city is displayed in th e Clock main view, and the time in your device is ch anged according to the city selected. Check that the t ime is correct and matches your ti me zone. Clock settings Select Options > Settings . To change the time or date, select Time or Date . To change the clock shown on the home screen, select Clock type > Analogue or Digital . To allow the mobile phone network to up date the time, date, and time zone information to your device (network service), select Network operator time > Auto-update . To change the alarm tone, select Clock alarm tone . Notes Select Menu > Office > Notes . You can create and s end notes to other comp atible devices, and save received pl ain text files (.txt format) to Notes. Write and se nd notes To write a note, start entering the text. The note editor opens automatica lly. To open a note, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To send a note to other compatible devices, select Options > Send . To synchronise or to define synchronisation settings for a note, select Opti ons > Synchronisation . Select Start to initialise synchronisation or Settings to define the synchronisation settings for the note. Nokia Wireless Keyboard Wireless keyboards are available as separate enhancements. To set up the Nokia Wireless Keyboard or other compatible wireless keyboard supporting the Bluetooth Human In terface De vices (HID) profile for use with your device, use the Wireless keyboard application. 109 Nokia Office Tools
1. Activate Bluetooth connectivi ty on your device: select Menu > Connectivity > Bluetooth > Blueto oth > On . Ma ke sure that you have set My phone's v isibilit y > Shown to all . 2. Switch on the keyboard. 3. Sele ct Menu > Of fice > Wlss. keybd. . 4. To start searching for devices with Bluetooth connectivity, select Options > Find keyboard . 5. Select the keyboard from the list, and press the scroll key to start the connection. 6. To pair the keyboard wi th your device, enter a passcode of your choice (1 to 9 digits) on the device and the same passcode on your keyboard. 7. If you are asked for a keyb oard layout, select it from a list on your device. When the name of the keyb oard appears, its status changes to Keyboard connected , and the indicator of your keyboard blinks slowly ; the keyboard is ready for use. For details on the operation and maintenance of your keyboard, see its user guide. 110 Nokia Office Tools
Connectivity Your device offers several options to connect to the internet, a corporate intran et, or to another device or computer. Fast downloading High-spe ed downl ink pack et acce ss (HS DPA, al so call ed 3.5G, indicated by ) is a network service in UMTS networks and provides high-speed data downloads. When HSDPA support in the device is activated and the device is connected to a UMTS network that su pports HSDPA, downloading data s uch as messag es, e-mail, and browser pages through the cellular network may be faster. An active HSDPA connection is indicated by . The icon may vary between regions. To activate or deactivate HSDPA, select Menu > Tools > Settings > Conne ction > Packet d ata > High speed packet access . Some c ellular networks do not allow incoming voice calls when HSDPA is active, in which case you need to deactivate HSDPA to receive calls. Contact your network operator for details. For availability and subscription to data connection services, contact your service provider. HSDPA only affects the download sp eed; sending data to the network, such as me ssages and e-mail, is n ot affected. Nokia PC Suite You can install Nokia PC Suit e from the CD-ROM or from the web. Nokia PC Suite can be used with Windows XP and Windows Vist a. With Nokia PC Su ite, you can make backups, synchronise your device with a compatible computer, move files between your device and a compatible computer, or use your device as a modem. For more information about Nokia PC Suite, see the Nokia PC Suite guide. Data cable To avoid damaging the memory card, do not remove the data cable in the mi ddle of a data transfer. Transfer data between your device and a PC 1. Insert a memory card to your device and connect the device to a com patible PC with the USB data cable. 111 Connectivity
2. When the device asks which mode is used, select Mass storage . In this mode, you can see your device as a removable hard drive in your co mputer. 3. End the connection from the computer (for example, from an Unplug or Eject Hardware wizard in Windows) to avoid damaging the memory card. To use Nokia PC Suite with your device, install Nokia PC Suite on your PC, connect th e data cable, and select PC Suite . To use your device to connect your PC to the web, connect the data cable, and s elect Connect PC to web . To synchronise the music in your device with Nokia Music Player, install the Nokia Music Player software on your PC, connect the data cable, an d select Media transfer . To change the USB mode you normally use with the data cable, select Menu > Connectivity > USB > USB conne ction mo de and the desire d option. To set the device to ask for the mode each time you connect the USB data cable to the device, s elect Menu > Connectivity > USB > Ask on connection > Yes . Infrared Do not point the infra red (IR) beam at anyon e's eye or allow it to interfere with ot her IR devices. This device is a Class 1 laser product. Use infrared to connect two devices and transfer data between them. With infrared, you can transfer data such as business ca rds, calendar note s, and medi a files with a compatible device. 1. Ensure that the infrared ports of the devices face each other. The positioning of the devices is more important than the angle or distance. 2. Sele ct Me nu > Connectivity > Infrared to switch on infrared on your device. 3. Switch on infrared on th e other device and wait a few seconds until the infrared connection is established. 4. Locate the desired file in an application or File manager, and select Option s > Send > Via infrared . If the data transfer is not started wi thin 1 minut e after the activation of the infrared port, the connection is cancelled and must be started again. All items received through in frared are placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging. Positioning the devices away from each other breaks the connection, but the infr ared light beam remains active on your device until it deactivate s. Bluetooth Select Menu > Connectivity > Bluetoot h . 112 Connectivity
About Bluetooth Bluetooth technology ena bles wireless connections between electronic devices within a range of 10 metres (33 feet). A Bluetooth conn ection can be used t o send images, videos, te xt, business cards, calendar notes, or to connect wirelessly to devices that use Blue tooth technology. Since devices using B luetooth technology communicate using radio wa ves, your device and the other devices do not need to be in direct line-of-sight. The two devices only need to be within a maxim um of 10 metres of each other, although the connection can be subject to interference from obstructions such as walls or other electronic devices. Several Bluetooth conn ections can be active at a time. For example, if your device is connected to a headset, you can also tr ansfer files to another compat ible device at the same time. Features usin g Bluetooth tech nology increase t he demand on battery power an d reduce the battery life. Send and receive data with Bluetooth 1. When you activate Bluetooth for the first time, you are asked to give a name to your device. Giv e your device a uniqu e name t o make it eas y to reco gnis e if there are several Bluetooth devices nearby. 2. Select Bluetoot h > On . 3. Select My phone's visibili ty > Shown to all or Define p eriod . If you select Define period , you need to define the time during which your device is visible to others. Your device and the name you entered can now be seen by other users with devices using Bluetooth t echnology. 4. Open the application wh ere the item you want to send is stored. 5. Select the item and Optio ns > Send > Via Blueto oth . The device searches for other devices using Bluetooth technology within range and lists them. Tip: If you have sent data using Bluetooth before, a list of the pr evious sea rch results is displayed. To search for more Bluetooth devices, select More devices . 6. Select the device wi th which you want to connect. If the other device requires pairing before data can be transmitted, you are asked to enter a passcode. When the connection ha s been established, Se nding data is shown. The Sent folder in the Messa ging application does not store messages sent using Bluetooth connectivity. To receive data using Bluet ooth, select Bluetooth > On and My phone's visibility > Shown to all to receive data from a non-paired device or Hidden to receive data from a paired device only. When you receive data through Blue tooth, depending on the settings of an active profil e, a tone soun ds, and you are asked if you want to accept the message in which the 113 Connectivity
data is included. If you accept, the mes sage is placed in the Inbox folder in the Messaging application. Tip: You can access th e files in the device or on the memory card using a compatible accessory that supports the File Transfer Profile Client service (for example, a laptop computer). A Bluetooth connection is disconnected automatically after sending or receiving da ta. Only Nokia PC Suite and some enhancements such as headsets may maintain a connection even if not actively used. Pair devices Open the paired devices tab. Before pairing, decide on your own passcode (1-16 digits), and a gree with the user of the other device to use the same code. Devices th at do not have a user interface have a fixed passcode. You need the passcode only when you connect the devices for the first ti me. After pairing, it is possible to authorise the connection. Pairing and authorising the connection makes connecting quicker and easier, as you do not have to accept the connection betw een paired devices every time you establish a connection. The passcode for remote SIM access must have 16 digits. 1. Sele ct Options > New paired device . The dev ice starts to search for Bluetooth de vices within range. If you have sent data using Bluetooth before, a list of the previous search results is displayed. To sea rch for more Bluetooth devices, select More devices . 2. Select the device with which you want to pair, and enter the passcode. The same pass code must be entered to the o ther device as w ell. 3. Sele ct Yes to make the connection between your device and the other device automatic, or No to confirm the connection manually every time a connection attemp t is made. After pairing, the device is saved to the paired devices page. To give a nic kname to the pa ired device, select Options > Assign short name . The nickname is only displayed in your device. To delete a pairing, select the device whose pairin g you want to delete and Options > Delete . To delete all pairings, select Opti ons > Delete all . If y ou are currently connected to a devi ce and cancel the pairing with that device, pairing is removed immediately, and the connection is ended. To allow a paired device to connect automatically to your device, select Set as authorised . Connections between your device and th e other device can be made without your knowledge. No separate ac ceptance or authorisation is needed. Use this status for your ow n devices, such as your compatible headset or computer, or devices that belong to someone you trust. If you want to accept connection requests from the other device separately every time, select Set as unautho rised . To use a Bluetooth audio enhancement such as a Bluetooth handsfree or headse t, you need to pair your device with the enhancem ent. See the enhancement user guide for the passcod e and further instructions. 114 Connectivity
To connect to the audio en hancement, switch on the enhancement. Some aud io enhancements connect automatically to your device. Ot herwise open the paired devices tab, scroll to the enha nc ement, and select Options > Connect to audio devi ce . Security tips When you ar e not using Bluetooth connect ivity, select Bluetooth > Off or My phone's visibility > Hidden . Do not pair with an unknown device. SIM access profile With the SIM access profile, you can access the SIM card of your device from a compatible car kit device. This way, you do not need a separate S IM card to access SIM card data and connect to th e GSM network. To use the SIM access profile, you need the following: ⢠Compatible car kit device that suppor ts Bluetoo th wireless technology ⢠Valid SIM card in your device When the wireless device is in the remote SIM mode, you can only u se a compatible connect ed enhancement, such as a car ki t, to make or receive calls. Your wireless device will not make any calls, except to the emergency numbers progra mmed into your devi ce, while in this mode. To make calls from your device, you must first leave the remote SI M mode. If the devic e has been locked, enter the lock code to unlock it first. For more information about car kit devices and compatibility with your device, see the Nokia web site and your car kit user guide. Use the SIM access profile 1. Select Menu > Connec tivity > Bluetooth > Remote SI M mode > On . 2. Activate Bluetoo th in the car kit. 3. Use your car kit to start a s earch for compatible devices. For instructions, see the user guide of your car kit. 4. Select your device from the list of compatible device s. 5. To pair the devices, enter the B luetooth passcode shown on the display of the car kit to your device. Tip: If you have already accessed the SIM card from the car kit with the active user profile, the car kit searches automatically for a device with the SIM card. If it finds your device, and automatic authorisation is a ctivated, the car kit automatically connects to t he GSM network when you switch on the car ignition. When you acti vate the remote S IM access pro file, you can use applications on your device that do not need network or SIM services. To make connections between your device and the car kit without separate acceptance or authorisati on, select Menu > Connectivity > Bluet ooth , a nd open 115 Connectivity
the paired devices tab. Scroll to the car kit, press the scroll key, and enter the Bluetoo th passcode. When the device asks to make the connection automatic, select Yes . If you select No , connection requests from this car kit must be accepted separately every time. To end the remote SIM access connection from your device, select Menu > Connectivity > Bluetooth > Remote SI M mode > Off . Wireless LAN Your device can detect and connect to a wireless local area network (WLAN). To us e WLAN, a netw ork must be available in the location and your device must be connected to it. WLAN connections Important: Always enable one of the available encryption methods to increase th e security of your wireless LAN connection. Usin g encryption reduces the risk of unauthorised access to your data. To use WLAN, you must create an internet a ccess point in a WLAN. Use the access point for applications that need to connect to the inte rnet. A WLAN connection is established when you create a data connection using a WLAN access point. The active WLAN connection is ended when you end the da ta connection. You can al so end the connection manually. See "Connection manager" , p. 118 . You can use WLAN during a voice call or when packet data is active. You can only be connected to one WLAN access point device at a time, but several applicat ions can use the same internet access point. When the device is in the O ffline profile, you can still use WLAN, if available. Remember to comply with any applicable safety requirements when establishing and using a WLAN con nection. If you move the device to another location within the WLAN and out of range of a WLAN acce ss point, the roaming functionality can automatically connect your device to another access point that belongs to the same WLAN. As long as you rema in within range of access points that belong to the same network, your device can stay connected to the network. Tip: To check the unique media access control (MAC) address th at identi fies your device, for example to configure the MAC address of your device to a WLAN router, enter *#6220 9526# on the device keypad. The MAC address is shown on the device display. See WLAN availability To have your device show WLAN availabilit y, select Menu > Tools > Se ttings > Co nnection > Wireless LAN > Show WLAN availability . If WLAN is available, is shown on the display. 116 Connectivity
Tip: You can also scan fo r networks in range. WLAN wizard Select Menu > Connectivity > WLAN w iz. . The WLAN wizard helps you find an d connect to a wireless LAN. When you open the application, your device starts to scan for av ailable WLANs and list s them. To update the list of available WLAN s, select Options > Refresh . To ma r k u p W L A N s in t h e l i st of found networks, select Filter WLAN net works . The selected networks are filtered out the next time the ap plication searches for wireless LANs. To start or continue browsing the web using the access point of the WLAN, scroll to the desired n etwork, and select Options > Start web brows ing or Cont.web browsing . To disconnect the activ e connection to the WLAN , select Options > Disconnect WLAN . To view the details of the WLAN, select Option s > Details . To save the access point of the WLAN, select Options > Define access point . Always enable one of the av ailable encryption methods to increase the security of your WLAN connection. Using encryption reduces the risk of unauthorised access to your dat a. Use the wizard on the home screen On the home screen, the WL AN wizard shows the status of your WLAN connections and network searches. To view the available options, scroll to the row showing the status, and p ress the scroll key . Depending on t he status, you can st art the web browser using a WLAN connection, connect to y our net call service, disconnect from a WLAN, search for WLANs, or set the network scanning on or off. If WLAN scanning is off and you are not connected to any WLAN, WLAN scanning off is displayed on the home screen. To set scanning on and search for available WLANs, scroll to the row sh owing the status, and press the scroll key. To start a search for available WLANs, scroll to the row showing the status, press the scroll ke y, and select Search for WLAN . To set WLAN scanni ng off, scroll to the row showing the status, press the scroll key, and select Switch WLAN scan off . When Start web brows ing or Use for is selected, the WLAN wizard au tomatically creates an access poin t for the selected WLAN. The acce ss point can also be used with other applications re quiring WLAN connection. 117 Connectivity
If you select a secured WLAN, you are asked to enter the relevant passcodes. To connect to a hidden network, you must enter the correct service set identifier (SSID). To use the found WLAN for a net call connecti on, scroll to the row showing the status, and press the scroll key . Select Use for , the desired net ca ll service, and the WLAN to be used. Modem Select Menu > Connectivity > Modem . Together with a compatible computer, you can use your device as a modem to connect to the web, for example. Before you can use your dev ice as a modem ⢠You need an appropriate data communications software on your computer , such as Nokia PC Suite. For more information, see the Nokia PC Suite guide. ⢠You must subscribe to the appropria te network services from your service provider or internet service provider. ⢠You must have the appropriate drivers installed on your computer. You must install drivers for the cable connection, and you may need to ins tall or update Bluetooth or infrared drivers. To connect the device to a compatible computer using infrared, press the scroll key. Make sure the infrared ports of the device and computer are directly facing each other with no ob stacles between them. To connect your device to a computer us ing Bluetooth wireless technology, initiate the connection from the computer. To activa te Bluet ooth in your device, select Menu > Connectivity > Bluet ooth and select Bluetoot h > On . If you use a cable to connect your device to a computer, initiate the connection from the computer. You may not be able to use some of the other communication features when the device is used as a modem. Connection manager Select Menu > Connectivity > Conn. mgr. . View and end active connections To see the open data connections, select Active data connections . To view detailed information about network connections, select a conn ection from the list and Options > Details . The type of information shown depends on the connection type. To end the selected network connection, select Options > Disconnect . 118 Connectivity
To end all active network connections simult aneously, select Options > Disconnect all . Search for WLAN To search for WLANs available within range, select Available W LAN networks . The available WLANs are listed with their network mo de (infrastructure or ad- hoc), signal strengt h, and network en cryption indicators, and whether your device has an active connection with the net work. To view the details of a network, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To create an internet access point for a network, select Options > Define access point . 119 Connectivity
Security and data management Manage the data and software on your device, and t ake care of the security of th e device and its c ontents. Important: Your device can only support one antivirus application. Having more than one application with antivirus functionality could affect performance and operation or cause the device to stop function ing. Lock the device Important: If the device has been loc ked, enter the lock code to activate the phone function. When the device is locked, calls may be possible to the official emergency number. Making an emergency call in the offline profile or when the device is locked requires that the device recognise th e number to be an official emergency number. It is advisable to change the profile or unlock the device by entering the lock code before you make the emergency call. To prevent access to the contents of your device, lock the device when in home screen. Press the power key, select Lock phone , and enter your lock code. The default lock code is 12345. To change the lock code, select Menu > T ools > Settings > General > Securit y > Pho ne and SIM card > Lock code . Enter the old code and then the new code twice. The new code can be 4-255 characters long. Both alphabet s and digits can be u sed, and both uppercase and lowercase alphabets are possible. You can also lock the device remotely by sending a text message to the device. To enable remote locking and to define the text for the message, select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Security > Ph one and SIM card > Allow remote lock > Yes . Enter the remote loc k message and con firm the messag e. The message must be at least 5 characte rs long. Memory card security Select Menu > Tools > Memory . You can protect a memory ca rd with a password to prevent unauthorised access. To set a password, select Options > Set password . The password can be up to 8 characters long and is case-sensitive. Th e password 120 Security and data m anagement
is stored in your device. You do not need to enter it again while you use the memory card on the same device. If you use the memory card on another device, you are asked for the password. Not all memory cards support password protection. To remove the memory card password, select Options > Remove password . When you remove th e password, the data on th e memory card is not protected against una uthorised use. To open a locked memory card, select Opt ions > Unlock memory card . En ter the password. If you cannot recall the password to unlock a locked memory card, you may reformat the card, in which case the card is unlocked and password removed. Formatting a memory card de stroys all data stored on the card. Encryption Select Menu > Tools > Encryption . Encrypt your device or memory card to prevent outsiders from accessing yo ur important information. Encrypt device memory or memory card To encrypt the device memory, select Phone memory . To encrypt the memory card, select Memory card and from the following: ⢠Encrypt without savin g key â Encrypt the memory card without saving the encryp tion key. If you select this option, you cannot us e the memory card in other devices, and if you restore factory settings, you cann ot decrypt the memory card. ⢠Encrypt and save key â Encrypt the mem ory card and save the key manually i n the default folder. For security, store the key to a sa fe place outsi de the device. For example, you can send the key to your computer . Enter a pas s ph rase for the key and a name for the key file. The pa ss phrase should be long and complex. ⢠Encrypt with rest ored key â Encry pt the memory card with a key you have re ceived. Select the key file, and enter the pass phrase . Decrypt device memory or memory card Always remember to decrypt the dev ice memory and/ or the memory card before updating the device software. To decrypt the device memory, select Phone memory . To decrypt the memory card without destroying the encryption key, select Memory card > Decrypt . 121 Security and data m anagement
To decrypt the memory card and destroy the encryption key, select Memory card > Decrypt and turn off enc ryption . Fixed dialling Select Menu > Communic. > Contacts > Options > SIM contacts > Fixed dial contacts . With the fixed dialling serv ice, you can restrict calls from your device to certain phone numbers. Not all SIM cards support the fixed dia lling service. Contact your service provider for more information. When fixed dialling is acti vated, calls may be possible to the official emergenc y number programmed into your device. 1. To restrict calls from your device, select Options > New SIM contact and enter the contact name and phone number to the list of numbers to which calls are allowed, or select Add from Contacts to copy the contact from Contacts. To restrict calls by a country pr efix, enter the country prefix in the list of numbers. All phone numb ers to which calls are allowed must start with this coun try prefix. 2. Sele ct Options > Activate fixed dial ling . You need your PIN2 code to activate and deacti vate fixed dialling or edit your fixed dialling contacts. Contact your service provider if you do not have the code. To cancel the service, select Options > Deactivate fixe d dialling . Tip: To send text messag es to the SIM contacts while the fixed dialling servi ce is active, you need to add the text message centre number to the fixed dialling list. Certificate manager Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Gener al > Security > Certifi cate mana gement . Digital certificates are used to verify the origins of software but do not guaran tee safety. There are four different types of certificat es: authority certificates , personal certificates, trus ted site certificates, and device certificates. During a secure connection, a server may send a server certificate to your device. Upon receipt, it is checked through an authority certif icate stored in your device. You receive notification if the identity of the server is no t authenti c or if you do no t have the correct certificate in your device. You can download a certificate from a web site, or receive a certificate as a message. Certificates should be used when you connect to an online bank or a remote server to transfer confidential information. T h e y s h o u l d a l s o b e u s e d i f y o u w a n t t o r e d u c e t h e r i s k of viruses or other maliciou s software, and to check the authenticity of software when you download and install software to your device. Tip: When you add a new certificate, check its authenticity. 122 Security and data m anagement
View certificate details You can only be sure of the correct identity of a server when the signature and the validity period of a server certificate have been checked. To view certificate details, open a certificate folder, and select a certificate and Options > Certificate details . One of the following notes may appear: ⢠Certificate not truste d â You have not set any application to use the certifi cate. You may want to change the trust settings. ⢠Expired certificate â The period of validity has ended for the sele cted certificate. ⢠Certificate not valid yet â The period of validity has not yet begun for the selected certificate. ⢠Certificate corrupted â The certif icate cannot be used. Contact the certificate issu er. Certificate trust settings Trusting a certificat e mean s that you authorise it to verify web pa ges, e-mail se rvers, software packages, and other data. Only trusted certificates can be used to verify services and software. Important: Even if the use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote conne ctions and software installation consid erably smaller, they must be used correctly in order to benefi t from increased security. The existence of a certificate does not offer any protection by itself; th e certificate manager must contain correct, authentic, or trusted certificates for increased security to be avai lable. Certificates have a restricted lifetime. If "Expired certificate" or "Certificate not valid yet" is shown, ev en if the certificate should be valid, check that the cu rrent date and time in your device are correct. Before changing an y certificate settings, you mus t make sure that you really trust the owner of the certificate an d that th e certificate really belong s to the listed owner. To change the trust sett ings, select a certificat e and Options > Trus t settings . Select an ap plication field and press the scroll key to select Ye s or No . You cannot change the trust setti ngs of a personal certificate. Depending on the certificate, a list of applications that can use the certificate is displayed: ⢠Symbian installatio n â New Symbian operating system application. ⢠Internet â E-mail and graphics. ⢠App. installation â New Java⢠application. ⢠Online certif. check â Online certificate status protocol. Security modules Select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Security > Security module . 123 Security and data m anagement
View and edit security modules To view or edit a security module, scr oll to it, and press the scroll key. To view detailed information about a security module, select Options > Security deta ils . To edit the PIN codes for the security module, select Module PIN to edit the PIN code for the security module or Signing PIN to edit the PIN code for digital signatures. You may not be able to chan ge these codes for all security modules. The key store contains the contents of the sec urity module. T o dele te the key store, se lect Ke y store , select the desired key store , and Opti ons > Delete . You may not be able to delete the key store of all security modules. Back up data It is recommended to back up device memory regularly to the memory card or a compatible computer. To back up information from the device memory to a memory card, select Menu > Tools > Memory > Options > Back up phone memory . To restore information from the memory card to the device memory, select Menu > Tools > Memory > Options > Restore from card . You can also connect your device to a comp atible computer and use Nokia PC Suite to b ack up data. Remote configuration Select Menu > Tools > Device mgr. . With Device manager, you can manage setting s, data, and software on your device remotely. You can connect to a server, and receive configuration settings for your device. You may receive server profiles and different configuration set tings from your servic e providers or company information management department. Configuration se ttings may include connection and other settings used by different applications in your device. The available options may vary. The remote configuration connection is usually started by the server when the device settings need to be updated. To create a new server profile, select Options > New server profile . You may receive these settings from your service provider in a configuration message. If no t, define the following: ⢠Server name â Enter a name for the config uration server. ⢠Server ID â Enter the unique ID to identify the configuration server. ⢠Server password â Enter a password to identify your device to the server. 124 Security and data m anagement
⢠Session mode â Select the preferred connection type. ⢠Access point â Select the access point to use for the connection, or create a new access point. You can also choose to be asked for the access point every time you start a connection. This setting is available only if you have selected Internet as the bearer ty pe. ⢠Host address â Enter the web address of the configuration server. ⢠Port â Enter the port number of the server. ⢠User nam e â Enter your user ID for the configuration server. ⢠Password â Enter your password for the configuration server. ⢠Allow configuration â Select Yes to allow the server to initiate a configuration session. ⢠Auto-accept all reques ts â Select Yes if you do not want the server to ask for your confirmation when it initiates a configuration session. ⢠Network au thenticat ion â Select whether to use http authentication. ⢠Network user name â Enter your user ID for the http authentication. This se tting is available only if you have selected Network au thenticatio n to be used. ⢠Network pa ssword â Enter your password for the http authentication. This se tting is available only if you have selected Network au thenticatio n to be used. To connect to the server and receive configuration settings for your device, select Options > Start configuration . To view the configuration log of the selected profile, select Options > View log . Application manager Select Menu > Instal lations > App. mgr. . You can install two types of applicati ons and software on your device: ⢠Applications and software specifically intended for your device or compatible with the Symbian operating system. These soft ware installation files have the extension .sis or .sisx. ⢠Java ME⢠applications comp atible with the Symbian operating system. The Java application installation file extensions are .jad or .jar. Installation files may be transferred to you r device from a compatible comp uter, downloaded during browsing, or sent to you in a multimedia mes sage, as an e-mail attachm ent , or with Bluetooth. During the installation, the device checks the integrity of the package to be installed. The device shows information about the checks being carried out, and you are given options to continue or cancel the installation. 125 Security and data m anagement
If you install applications that require a network connection, note that the power consumption of your device may increase wh en you use these applications. Tip: When browsing web pages, you can download an installat ion file and install it immediately. Note, howe ver, that the connection runs in the background during the installation. Install applications Important: Only install and us e applications and other software from trusted sources, su ch as applications that are Symbian Signed or have passed the Java Verified⢠testing. To download and install soft ware from the web, select Download apps. . Select t he applicat ion and Options > Install . To view the details of an installed software package, select the application and Opt ions > View details . To view the installa tion log, select Options > View log . A list s hows what software has been inst alled and removed, and the date of th e installation or removal. If you encounter problem s with the device after installing a software package, use this list to find out which software package may be the cause of the problem. The information in th is list may also help you pinpoint problems that are caused by software packages that a re incompatible wi th each other. To remove software, select Options > Remove . If you remove software, you can only reinst all it by using the original software package fi le, or by restoring a full backup that contains the removed software package. If you remove a software package, you may no longer be able to open files created with that software. If another software package depends on the software package that y ou removed, the other software package may stop working. Refer to the documentation of the installed software package for details. Installation settings To modify the installa tion settings, select Options > Settings and from the following: ⢠Software installation â Select to install signed applications only or all applications. ⢠Online certificate check â To check the validity of certificates when an applic ation is installed, select On . If validity cannot be verified, you are asked if you want to continue installation. ⢠Default web address â The validity of a certificate is checked from the default address if the certificate does not include its own web address. To change the default address, select Default web address , and enter the new address. Java security settings To specify security settings for a Java applicati on, select Options > Settings . 126 Security and data m anagement
You can define which functions the Java application can access. The value that you ca n set for each functionality depends on the protection domain of the software package. ⢠Access point â Select an access point that the application may use wh en making net work connections. ⢠Network access â Allow the appli cation to create a data connectio n to the network. ⢠Messaging â Allow the app lication to send messages. ⢠Application auto-start â Allow the application to start automati cally. ⢠Connecti vity â Allow the a pplication to activate a data connection , such as a Blu etooth connection . ⢠Multimedia â Allow the appl ication to use the multimedia features of your device. ⢠Read user data â Allow the application to read your calendar entries, contacts , or any other personal data. ⢠Edit user data â Allow the applicat ion to add personal data, such as entries to Con tacts. ⢠Positio ning â Allow the appl ication to use the location data in your device. ⢠Landma rks â Allow th e application to use the landmarks in your device. You can define how you are prom pted to confirm the Java application's access to the device functions. Select one of the following values: ⢠Ask every time â Require the Java application to ask for your confirmation each time it use s the functionali ty. ⢠Ask first time â Require the Java application to ask for initial confirmation to use the functionality. ⢠Always allowed â Allow the Java application to use the functionality with out your confirmation. The security s ettings help protect your dev ice against harm ful Java app lications that may use the functions of your device without your permission. Only select Always allowed if you know the supplier and trustworthiness of the application. ⢠Not allowed â Prevent the Java application from using the fu nctionality. Activation keys Select Menu > Tools > Actv. keys . Some media files, such as im ages, music, or video clips, are protected by digital usage rights. The activation keys for such files may allow or restrict their usage. For example, with som e activation keys you may li sten to a music track only a limited num ber of times. During one playback session you may rewind, fast -forward, or pause the track, but once you stop it, y ou have used one of the instances allowed. Use activation keys Digital rights manag ement (DRM) protected con tent comes with an associated activation key that defines your rights to use the content. If your devi ce has OMA DR M-protected c ontent, to back up both the ac tivation keys and the content, us e the 127 Security and data m anagement
backup feature of Nokia PC Suite. Other transfer methods may not transfer the activ ation keys which need to be restored with the content for you to be able to continue the use of OMA DRM-protected content after the device memory is formatted. You may also need to restore the activation keys in case the files on your device get corrupted. If your d evice has WM DRM-protected c ontent, both the activation keys and the content wi ll be lost if the device memory is formatted. You may also lose t he activation keys and the content if the files on your device get corrupted. Losing the activati on keys or the content may limit your ability to use the same content on your device again. For more information, contact your service provider. Some activation keys may be connected to a specific SIM card, and the protected content can be accessed only if the SIM card is inserted in the device. To view your activation keys by typ e, select Valid keys , Invalid ke ys , or Not in use . To view the key details, select Options > Key details . The following details are displayed for each media file: ⢠Status â The status is Activatio n key is valid , Activation key expired , or Activation key not yet valid . ⢠Content sending â Allowed means that you can send the file to another device. Not allo wed means that you cannot send the file to another device. ⢠Content i n phone â Yes means that the file is in the device and the path of the file is displayed. No means that the related file is not currently in the device. To activate a key, g o to the Activat ion keys main view , and select Invalid keys > Options > Get activati on key . Establish a network connection at the prompt, and you are directed to a web site where you ca n purchase rights to the media. To remove file rights, open the valid keys tab or the keys not in use tab, scroll to the desired file, and select Options > Delete . If there are several rights related to the same media file, all th e rights are deleted. The group key view displays a ll of the files related to a group right. If you have downloaded multiple media files with the same rights, th ey are all displayed in this view. You can open the group view from either the valid k e y s o r i n v a l i d k e y s t a b s . T o a c c e s s t h e s e f i l e s , o p e n t h e group rights folder. Data synchronisation Select Menu > Tools > Sync . With Sync, you can synchronise your contacts , calendar entries, or notes with corresponding applications on a compatible computer or remote internet server. Yo ur synchronisation settings are saved in a synchronisation profile. The Sync application uses SyncML technology for remote synchronisation. For information on SyncML compatibility, contact the 128 Security and data m anagement
supplier of the applications with which you want to synchronise your device. You may receive the syn chronisation settin gs as a message from your service provider. The available applications you can sy nchr onise may vary. Contact your service provider for more information. Create a synchronisation profile There is a Nokia PC Suit e synchronisation profile available in your device. You do not need to edit it if you synchron ise your device wit h a computer using Nokia P C Suit e. To create a new profile, select Options > New sync profile and as sign a name fo r the profile, select the applications to synchronise with the profile, and specify the needed connect ion settings. Contact your service provider for details. Select applications to synchronise 1. To select the applications to synchronise with a synchronisation profile, select Options > Edit sync profile > Applications . 2. Select the desired application, and select Include in sync > Yes . 3. Specify the Remote databas e and Synchro nisatio n type setti ngs. Synchronisation connection settings To define the connection settings of a new profile, select Options > New sync profile > Connection settings and define the following settings: ⢠Server versio n â Select the Syn cML version yo u can use with the remote server. ⢠Server ID â Enter the server ID of the remote server. This setting is only available if you select 1.2 as the SyncML version. ⢠Data bearer â Select the data bearer to connect to the remote server during synchroni sation. ⢠Access point â Select the access point to use for the synchronisation connection, or create a new access point. You can also choose to be asked for the access point every time you start synchronising. ⢠Host address â Enter the web address of the server that contains the data base with which you wa nt to synchronise yo ur device. ⢠Port â Enter the port number of the remote databas e serve r. ⢠User name â E n t e r y o u r u s e r n a m e t o i d e n t i f y y o u r device to the server. ⢠Passwor d â Enter your password to identify your device to the server. 129 Security and data m anagement
⢠Allow sync requests â To allow synchronisation to start from the remote databa se server, select Yes . ⢠Accept all sync requests â To have your device ask for your confirmation befor e accepting synchronisation from the server, select No . ⢠Network authent ication â To authenticate your device to the network before synchronisation, select Yes . Enter your network user name and netw ork password. Mobile VPN Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > VPN . The Nokia m obile virtual pr ivate networ k (VPN) client creates a secure conn ect ion to compatible corporate intranet and ser vices, such as e- mail. Your device connects from a mobile network, through the in ternet, to a corporate VPN gateway tha t acts as a front door to the compatible corporate network. VPN client uses IP Security (IPSec) tech nology. IPSec is a framework of open standa rds for supp orting secure exch ange of data over IP networks. VPN policies define the method used by the VPN client and a VPN gateway to authentica te each other, and the encryption algorithms that they use to help protect the confidentiality of da ta. Contact your comp any's IT department for a VPN policy. To install and con figure the VPN client , certificates, and policies, contact the IT administrator of your organisation. Manage VPN Select VPN management , and from the following: ⢠VPN policies â Install, view, and update VPN policies. ⢠VPN policy servers â Edit the connection settings of VPN policy servers from which you can install and update VPN policies. A policy server refers to a Nokia Security Service Manag er (NSSM), which is no t necessarily required. ⢠VPN log â View the log for your VPN policy installations, updates an d synchronisations, and other VPN connections. Create VPN access points Select Settings > Co nnectio n > VPN . An access point is where yo ur phone connects to the network. To use e-mail and mult imedia services or to browse web pages you must first define internet a ccess points for these services. VP N access po ints pair VPN policies with regular intern et access points to create secure connections. Your service provider may preset some or all ac cess points for your device, and you may not be able to create, edit, or remove them. 130 Security and data m anagement
Contact your company's IT department for the correct settings. Open a destination, select a VPN access point, select Edit , and define the following: ⢠Connection name â Enter a name for the VPN access point. ⢠VPN policy â Select the VPN policy to combine with the internet access point. ⢠Internet access point â Select the internet access point wi th which to combin e the VPN polic y to create secure connections for data transfer. ⢠Proxy server addres s â Enter the proxy server address of the private network. ⢠Proxy port numb er â Enter the proxy port number. Use a VPN connection in an application You may have to prove your i dentity when you log on to the enterpri se network. Cont act your comp any's IT department for the credentials. To use a VPN connection in an application, the application must be associat ed with a VPN a ccess point. Tip: You can configure the application's connection setting to Always ask , in which ca se you select the VPN access p oint from a list of connections when a conn ection is established. 1. In the applicat ion in which you w ant to create a VPN connection, s elect a VPN access p oint as the access point. 2. If you are using legacy a uthentication, enter your VPN user name and passcode or password. If the SecurID token has become out of synchronisation with the clock of the ACE/Server, enter the next passcode. If you are us ing certificate-based authentication, you ma y have to enter the key store password. Barcode reader Select Menu > Tools > Barcode . Use the Barcode reader application to decode barcodes. The codes may co nt ain information such as URL links, e-mail addres ses, phone numbers, and business cards. The Barcode read er does not support 1D codes. The Barcode reader uses the camera in your device to scan codes. To scan a code, sele ct Scan code . After a valid code is detected in the viewfinder, the decoded information appears on the dis play. To scan a code that is located at some distance from your device, deactivate the close-up mode by selecting Options > Deactiv. clo se- up mode . To save the scanned data, select Options > Save . The data is saved in the BCR file format. To save scanned da ta to Contac ts, select Options > Add to Contacts or Save business card , depending on 131 Security and data m anagement
the data you are saving. If th e data you scanned includes a mobile phone num ber or an e-mail address, you can call or send a message to the nu mber or send an e-mail to the address by selecting Options > Call or Op tions > C reate message: . If the data you scanned includes a URL link, you can open i t by selecting Opti ons > Op en link . To view previously saved, decoded info rmation, select Saved data in the main view. 132 Security and data m anagement
Settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings . You can define and modify various settings of your device. Modifying these se ttings affects the operation of your device across several applications. Some settings may be preset for the device or sent to you in a special message by your service provider. You may not be able to change such s ettings. Select the setting you want to edit to do the following: ⢠Switch between two values , such as on or off. ⢠Select a value from a list. ⢠Open a text editor to enter a value. ⢠Open a slider to decrease or increase the value by scrolling left or right. General settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > General . Select from the following: ⢠Personalisation â Change the display setting s and personalise the device. ⢠Date and time â Change the date and time. ⢠Slide handling â Change the slide settings. ⢠Enhancement â Define the settings for your enhancements. ⢠Security â Define the security settings. ⢠Factory settings â Restore the original settings of the device. ⢠Positio ning â Define the positioning method and server for GPS-based applicat ions. Personalisation settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation . Display settings To turn the automatic display rotat ion on or off, select Display > Display rotation . To select whether you wan t the image to change to full screen in the landscape mode, select Displ ay > Turn to full view . To define the level of ligh t that the device needs before switching on the backlight, select Display > Light sensor . To change the text size, select Display > Font size . 133 Settings
To adjust the length of time the display can be left idle before the screen saver is activated, select Display > Power saver time-out . To select a welcome note or logo for the display, select Display > Welcome note / logo . You can either choose the default welcome note, enter your own text, or select an imag e. To set how quickly the display dims after th e last keypress, select Display > Light time-out . Standby mode settings To select whether to use the home screen, select Home screen > Home screen . To change the home screen mode settings, select Home screen > Mode settings . To assign shortcuts for the de vice keys, select Home screen > Key shortcuts . These shortcuts are not available in the home scree n. To select whether to show or hide the operator logo, select Home screen > Operator logo > On or Off . To select the mailbox that is shown in the home screen, select Home screen > Home screen mailbox . Tone se ttings To select a ringing tone for voice calls, select Tones > Ringing tone . To select a ringing tone for video calls, select Tones > Video call tone . To set the ri nging type, select Tones > Ringing type . You can also s et the device to sound a ringing tone that is a combination of the sp oken name of the caller and the sele cted ringing tone, when someon e from your contacts li st calls you. Select Tones > Say caller's name . To set the volume level of the ringing tone, select Tones > Ringing volume . To set the various alert t ones, select To nes > Message alert tone , E-ma il alert tone , Calendar alarm tone , or Clock alarm tone . To set the device to vibrate when you receive a call, select Tones > Vibr ating alert . To set the volume level of the device keypad tones, select Tones > Ke ypad ton es . To set the warning tones on or off, select Tones > Warning tones . To select whet her you want the alarms and incom ing calls to be silenced when you turn the device face down, sel ect Turn to silence . To select whet her you want the alarms and incom ing calls to be silenced when you tap the device twi ce, select Tap to sile nce . Language settings To set the lan guage used on th e device display, select Language > Phone language . To select the language in which you write notes and messages, select Language > Writing language . 134 Settings
To select whether to use the predictive text input, select Language > Predicti ve text . Notification light When you receive a message or miss a call, the scroll key starts blinking to indicate the event. To set the length of time you wan t the scroll key to blink, select Notification light > Blink light for . To select of which events you want to be notified, select Notification light > Notified event s . Settings for One-touch keys Select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > One-touch keys . To select which application and task is opened when you press a One-touch key, select the key and Options > Open . To restore the preset applications and tasks, select Restore def aults . Date and time settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Date and time . To set the current date and time, select Date and Time . To define your time zone, select Time zone . To update the time, date , and time zone information automatic ally (network service), select Networ k operator time > Auto-update . To select whether to use th e 12-hour or 24-hour clock system and with w hich symbol to separa te hours and minutes, sele ct Time format an d Time separa tor . To determine the date format and se parator, select Date format and Date separato r . To define the clock type, select Clock type > Analogue or Digital . To select the tone for the alarm clock, select Clock alarm tone . To determine the week days that are work days for you, select Workdays . Slide settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Slide handling . To select whether you want to answer a ca ll by opening the slide, select Opening the s lide . To select whether y ou want to end a call by closing the slide, select Closing the slid e . To select whether you want to lock the keypad when you close the slide, select Keyguard acti vation . 135 Settings
Enhancement settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Enhancemen t . Common enhancement settings With most enhancements, you can do the following: To determine which profile is activated when you attach an enhancement to your device, select the enhancement and Default profile . To let the device answer phone ca lls automatically af ter 5 seconds when an enhanc ement is attached, select Automati c answer > On . If the ringing type is set to Beep once or Sile nt in the selected profile, the automatic ans wer is disabled. To illuminate the device while it is a ttached to an enhancement, select Lights > On . E-mail key settings To select which mailbox to open with the e-ma il key, select E-mail key settings > E-mail key , and press the scroll key. Security settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Security . Define the following security settings: ⢠Phone and SIM card â Adjust the s ecurity set tings for your device and SIM card. ⢠Certificate management â Manage your security certificates. ⢠Security module â Manage your se curity module. Avoid using codes that are si milar to emergency numbers to prevent acciden tal dialling of the emergency number. Codes are shown as asterisks. When you chan ge a code, en ter the current code, then the new code twice. Device and SIM card security To change the PIN code, select Phone and SIM card > PIN code . The new code mu st be 4 to 8 digits lon g. The PIN code protects your SIM ca rd against un authorised use and is provided with the SIM card. After three consecutive incorrect PIN co de entries, the code is blocked, and you need to use the PUK code to unblock it before you can us e the SIM card again. To set the keypad to lock a utomatically after a defined period, select Phone and SIM card > Keypad autolock period . To set a t ime-out aft er which the dev ice is automatically locked and can be used only if the correct lock code is entered, select Phone and SIM card > Phone autol ock period . Enter a number for the time- out in minutes, or select None to set off the autolock period. When the device is locked, you can still answer incoming calls, and calls may still be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your devic e. 136 Settings
To set a new lock code, select Phone and SI M card > Lock code . The preset lock code is 12345. Enter the current code and then the new code twice. The new code can be 4-255 characters long. Both alphabets and digits can be used, and bo th uppercase and lowercase alphabets are possible. The device notifies you if the lock code is not properly formatted. Restore original settings To restore the original device settings, select Factory settings . To do this, you need your device lock code. After resetting, the device may take a long er time to power on. Documents, cont act information, calendar entries, and files are unaffected. Telephone settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Phone . Select from the following: ⢠Call â Define general call settings. ⢠Call divert â Define your call divert settings. See "Call divert" , p. 88 . ⢠Call barring â Define your call barring settings. See "Call barring" , p. 88 . ⢠Network â Adjust the network settings. Call settings To display your phone number to the person you are calling, select Call > Send my caller ID > Ye s . To let the network determ ine whether yo ur caller ID is sent , select Set by network . To display your net call address to the person you are calling using a net call, select Call > Send my internet call ID > Yes . To be notified of a new incoming call while you have a call in progress, select Call > Call waiting > Options > Activ ate . To check if the function is active on the network, select Options > Check status . To select whether net calls alert or not, select Call > Internet cal l alert . You are notified of missed net calls with a notification. To set the default call type, select Call > Default call type and select Voice call if you make a GSM calls, or Internet call if you make net calls. To send a text message a utomatically to the pe rson who is calling you inform ing why you cannot ans wer the incoming call, select Call > Reject call with SMS > Ye s . To set the text for the message, select Call > Message text . Network settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Phone > Network . 137 Settings
To select the n etwork mo de, select Network mode and Dual mode , UMTS , or GSM . In the dual mode, the device switches automatica lly between networks. Tip: UMT S enables faster data transfer, but may increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life. In region s close to both GSM and UMTS networks, selecting Dual mode may cause constant ju mping between the two networks, which also in creases the dema nd on battery power. To select the operator, select Operator selectio n and Manual to choose from available networks, or Automati c to have the device select the net work automatica lly. To set the device to indicate when it is used in Micro Cellular Network (MCN), select Cell info display > On . Connection settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection . Select from the following: ⢠Bluetooth â Edit the Bluetooth settings. See "Send and receive data with Blue tooth" , p. 113 . ⢠USB â Edit the data cable settings. See "Data cable" , p. 111 . ⢠Access points â Set up new or edit existing access points. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service provider, and you may not be able to create, edit, or remove them. ⢠Packet data â Determine when packet data connections are used, and en ter the access point if you use your device as a modem for a computer. ⢠Wireless LAN â Dete rmine if the device displays an indicator when a WLAN is availa ble, and how often the device searches for networks. ⢠Data call â Set the time-out period after which data call connections au toma tically end. ⢠SIP settings â View or create session initiation protocol (SIP) profiles. ⢠Intern et tel. â Define settings for net calls. ⢠Configuratio ns â View and delete trusted servers from which your device may receive configuration settings. ⢠APN control â Restrict packet data con nections. See "Restrict packet data" , p. 143 . Access points Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connecti on > Access points . An internet access point is a collection of settings, which define how the devi ce creates a data connection to the network. To use e-ma il and multimedia services or to browse web pages, you must first define access points for these services. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service provider, and you may not be a ble to create, edit, or remove them. To create a new a ccess point, select Options > New access point or selec t an existing access point from the 138 Settings
list and then Options > Duplicate access point to use the access point as a basis for the n ew one. Packet data (GPRS) settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Packet data . Your device supports packet data connections, such as GPRS in the GSM network. When you are using your device in GSM and UMTS netw orks, it is possible to have multiple data connecti ons active at the same t ime; access points can share a data connection, and data connections remain active, for example, during voice calls. See "Connect ion manager" , p. 11 8 . To define the packet da ta settings, select Packe t data connection and select When available to register the device to the packet data network wh en you switch the device on in a supported network, or When nee ded to establish a packet data connection only when an application or action requires it. Select Access point and enter the access point name provided by your service provider to use the device as a packet data modem to your computer. To use a hig h-speed data connection, select High speed packet access > Enabled . These settings affect all a ccess points for packet data connections. WLAN settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Wireless LAN . To have an indicator displa yed when there is a WLAN available in your current location, select Show WLAN availability > Yes . To select the interval for your device to scan for available WLANs and upda te the indicator, select Scan for networks . This setting is not available unless you select Show WLAN availability > Yes . Advanced WLAN settings Select Options > Advanced settings . The advanced WLAN settings are no rmally defined automatically, and changing them is not recommended. To edit the settings manua lly, select Automatic configuration > Disabled , and define the following: ⢠Long re try lim it â Enter the maxi mum number of transmission attempts if the device does not receive a receiving acknowledgem ent signal from the network. ⢠Short retry limi t â Enter the maximum num ber of transmission attempts if the device does not receive a clear-to-send signal from the network. ⢠RTS threshold â Select the data packet size at which the WLAN access poin t device issues a request to send before sending the packet. ⢠TX power level â Select the power level of your device when sending data. 139 Settings
⢠Radio measurements â Enable or disable the radio measurements. ⢠Power saving â Select whether to use the WLAN power saving mechanism to save the power in the device battery. Using the power saving me chanism enhances the battery performance but may weaken WLAN interoperability. To restore all settings to their ori ginal values, select Options > Restore default s . WLAN security settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points > Options > New access point , or select an access point and Option s > Edit . In the access point settin gs, sele ct WLAN security mode and the desired mode. WEP security settings Select WEP as the WLAN security mode. The wired equivalent privacy (WEP) encryption method encrypts data before it is transmit ted. Access to the network is denied to users who do not have the required WEP keys. When th e WEP security mode is in use, and your device rece ives a data packet not encrypted wit h the WEP keys, the data is dis carded. In an ad-hoc n etwork, all devic es must use the sa me WEP key. Select WLAN security sett ings and from the following: ⢠WEP key in use â Select the desired WEP key. ⢠Authen tication type â S elect Open or Shared . ⢠WEP key settings â Edit the settings for the WEP key. WEP key settings In an ad-ho c network, a ll devices must us e the same WEP key. Select WLAN securit y settings > WEP key settings and from the following: ⢠WEP encryptio n â Select the desired WEP encryption key length. ⢠WEP key format â Select whether you want t o enter the WEP key data in ASC II or Hexadecim al format. ⢠WEP key â Enter the WEP key data. 802.1x security settings Select 802.1x as the WLAN security mode. 802.1x a uthenticates an d authorises devices to a ccess a wireless network, and prevents access if the authorisation process fails. Select WLAN security sett ings and from the following: ⢠WPA/WPA2 â Se lect EAP (Ex tensible Authentication Protocol) or Pre-shared key (a secret key used for device identification). 140 Settings
⢠EAP plug-in settings â I f you selected WPA/ WPA2 > EAP , select which EAP plug-ins defined in your device to use with the access point. ⢠Pre-shared key â I f you selected WPA/WP A2 > Pre-shared key , enter the shared private key that identifies your device to the WLAN to which you connect. WPA security settings Select WPA/WPA2 as the WLAN security mode. Select W LAN security se ttings and from the following: ⢠WPA/WPA2 â Sel ect EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) or Pre-shared key (a secret key used for device identification). ⢠EAP plug-in settings â If you select WPA/WPA2 > EAP , select which EAP p lug-ins defined in yo ur device to use with the access poin t. ⢠Pre-shared key â If you select WP A/WPA2 > Pre- shared key , enter the shared private key that identifies your device to the WLAN to which you connect. ⢠WPA2 only mode â To allow both TKIP and AES (Advanced Encryption Stan dard) encryption, select Off . To allow AES only, select On Wireless LAN plugins Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points . The EAP (extensible authenti cation protocol) plug-ins are used in wireless networks to authenti cate wireless devices and authentication servers, and the different EAP plug-ins make possible the use of various EAP methods (network service). You can view the EAP p lug-ins current ly installed in your device (network service). EAP plug-ins 1. To define the EAP plug-in settings, select Opti ons > New access point an d define an access point that uses WLAN as a data bearer. 2. Select 802. 1x or WPA/WPA2 as the security mode. 3. Select WLAN security se ttings > WPA/W PA2 > EAP > EAP plug-in setting s . Use EAP plug-ins To use an EAP plug-i n when you connect to a WL AN using the access point, select the desired plug-in a nd Options > Enable . The EAP plug-ins enabled for use with this access point have a check mark nex t to them. To not use a plug-in, select Optio ns > Disable . To edit the EAP plug-in settings, select Options > Edit . To change the priority of th e EAP plug-in settings, select Options > Raise priorit y to attempt to use the plug- in before other plug-ins when connecting to the network with the access point, or Options > Lower priority to use this plug-in for network authentication after attempting to u se other plug-ins. 141 Settings
See the device help for more information on EAP plugins. Session initiation protocol (SIP) settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > SIP settings . Session initiation protocols (SIP) a re used for creat ing, modifying, and terminating certain types of communication sessions with one or more participants (network service). Typical communication sessions are video sharing and net calls. SI P profiles include settings for these sessions. The SIP profile used by default for a communication session is underlined. To create a SIP profile, select Optio ns > New SIP profile > Use default profile or Use exis ting profile . To select the SIP profile you want to use by default for communication sessions, select Op tions > Default profile . Edit SIP profiles Select Optio ns > Edit , and select from the following: ⢠Profile name â Enter a name for the SIP profile. ⢠Service prof ile â Select IETF or Nokia 3GPP . ⢠Default access poin t â Select the access point to use for the intern et connection. ⢠Public user name â Enter your user name received from your service provider. ⢠Use compr ession â Select if compression is used. ⢠Registration â Select the registration mode. ⢠Use securit y â Select if security negotiation is used. ⢠Proxy serve r â Enter the proxy server settings for this SIP profile. ⢠Regist rar server â Enter the registration server settings for this SIP profile. Edit SIP proxy servers Select Options > New SIP prof ile or Edit > Proxy server . Proxy servers are intermed iate servers between a browsing service and its use rs used by some service providers. These servers may provide additional security and speed up access to the service. Select from the following: ⢠Proxy ser ver a ddress â Enter the h ost name or IP address of the proxy server in use. ⢠Realm â Enter the proxy server realm. ⢠User nam e and Password â Enter your user na me and password for the proxy serv er. ⢠Allow loose routing â Select if loose routing is allowed. ⢠Transport type â Select UDP , Auto , o r TCP . ⢠Port â Enter the port number of the proxy server. 142 Settings
Edit registration servers Select Options > New SIP profile or Edit > Registrar server . Select from the following: ⢠Registrar server address â Enter the host name or IP address of the re gistrar server in use. ⢠Realm â Enter the registrar server realm. ⢠User name and Password â Enter your user name and password for the registrar server. ⢠Transport type â Select UDP , Auto , or TCP . ⢠Port â Enter the port number of the registrar server. Net call settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Internet te l. . To create a new net call profile, select Option s > Ne w profile . To edit an existing profile, select Options > Edit . Configuration settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Configurations . You can receive messages from your service provider or company information management containing configuration settings for tru sted servers. These settings are automa tically saved in Configurations . You may receive configuration settings for access points, multimedia, or e- mail services, and IM or synchronisation settings from trusted servers. To delete configurations for a trus ted server, select Options > Delete . The configuration settings for other applications provided by this server are also deleted. Restrict packet data Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > APN control . With the access point contro l service, you can restrict packet data connections from your device to certain access points only. Your SIM card may not support the access point control servic e. Contact your s ervice provider for more information. To restrict the packet data connections from your device, select Options > Activate restrictions . You need your PIN2 code to ac tivate and deacti vate access point control or to edit th e packet data access points on the control list. To add access points that can be used for packet data connections to the control list, select Options > Add name manually . To enable connections to an operator-provided a ccess point, create an empty access point. To remove access points from the list, select Options > Remove . 143 Settings
Application settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Applications . Select an application from the list to adjus t its settings. 144 Settings
Shortcuts Here are some of the available keyboard shortcuts in your device. Shortcuts ca n make the use of the applications more efficient. General shortcuts General shortcuts Power key Press and hold to switch your device on and off. Press once to switch between profiles. Home screen Left selection key * Lock and unlock the keyp ad. Call key Open the call log. 0 Press and hold to open your home page in the Web browser. # Press and hold to switch between the Silent and General profiles. 1 Press and hold to call your voice mailbox. Number key (2â 9) Call a phone number using speed dialling. You must first ac tivate speed dialling at Menu > Tools > Settings > Pho ne > Call > Speed dialling > On . Web * Zoom in the page. # Zoom out the page. 2 Open the search dialog. 5 View the active pages. 8 View the page overview. 9 Open the dialog for entering a new web address. 0 Open the bookmarks folder. Image viewer Call key Send the image. 145 Shortcuts
0 Zoom out. 5 Zoom in. 7 Zoom in. Press twice for the full screen size. 4 Scroll left in the zoomed image. 6 Scroll right in the zoomed image. 2 Scroll up in the zoomed image. 8 Scroll down in the zoomed image. 3 Rotate clockwise. 1 Rotate counterclockwise. * Switch between th e full screen size and normal view. 146 Shortcuts
Glossary Glossary 3G 3rd generation mobile communications. A digital system for mobile commu nications which aim s at global use and provides increased bandwidth. 3G lets a mobile device user access a wide variety of services, such as multimedia. Ad-hoc operating mode A WLAN network mode where tw o or more devices co nnect to each other using WLAN directly without a WL AN access point. Cookies Cookies are little pieces of information, given by the serv er to you, to store information about your vis its to a web site. When you accept cookies, the server is able to evaluate your use of the web site, what you are interested in, what you want to read, and so on. DNS Domain name service. An internet service that translat es domain names such as www.n okia.com into IP addresses such as 192.100.124.195 . Domain names are easier to remember but this translation is needed because the internet is based on IP addresses. DTMF tones Dual-tone multifrequency tones. The DTMF system is used by touch-tone telephones. DTM F assigns a specific frequency, o r tone, to each key so that it can easily be identified by a microprocessor. DTMF tones allow you to communicate with voice mailboxes, computerised te lephony systems, and so on. EAP Extensible authenti cation protocol. EAP plug-ins are used in wireless networks to authenticate wireless devices and authentica tion servers. EGPRS Enhanced GPRS. EGPRS is similar t o GPRS, but it enables faster connection. For availability and data transfer speed, contact your service provider. 147 Glossary
GPRS General packet radio service. GPRS enables wireless access for mobile phones to data networks (network service). GPRS uses packet data technology where in formation is sent in short bursts of data over the mobile network. The benefit of sending data in packets is that the network is occupied only when sending or receiving data. As GPRS uses the network efficiently, it allows for quick data connection setup and fast data transmission spee ds. You must subscribe to the GPRS service. For availability and su bscription to GPRS, contact your service provider. During a voice call, you ca nnot establish a GPRS connection, and an y existing GPRS connection is put on hold unless the network support s dual transfer mode. GPS Global positioning system. GPS is a worldwide radio navigation system. HSDPA High-speed downlink packet access. HSDPA brings high-s peed data delivery to 3G terminals, ensuring that users requiring effective multimedia capabilities benefit from data rates previously unavai lable because of limitations in the radio access network. HTTP Hypertext tran sfer protocol. A document transfer protocol used in the web. HTTPS HTTP over a secure connection. IMAP4 Internet mail access protocol, version 4. A protocol used for accessing your remote mailbox. Internet access point An access point is where your device connects to a network. To use e-mail and multimedia services or to connect to the internet and browse web pages, you must first define internet access points for these services. Infrastructur e operating mode A WLAN network mode where devices are connected to WLAN using a WLAN access point. PIN Personal identity number. The PIN code protects your device from unauthorised use. The PIN code is supplied with the SIM card. If the PIN code request is selected, the code is required each time the device is switched on. The PIN code must be 4 to 8 digits long. PIN2 The PIN2 code is supplied with some SIM cards. The PIN2 code is required to access certain funct ions supported by the SIM card. The le ngth of the PIN2 code is 4 to 8 digits. 148 Glossary
POP3 Post office protocol, version 3. A common mail protocol that can be used for accessing your remote mailbox. PUK and PUK2 Personal Unblocking Key. PUK and PUK2 codes are required to change a blocked PIN code or PIN2 code, respectively. The length of the code is 8 digits. SIP Session Initiation Pr otocol. SIP is used for creating, modifying, and terminating certain types of communication sessions with one or more participants. SSID Service set identifier. SSID is the name that identifies the specific WLAN. Streaming Streaming audio and video files means playing them direct ly from the web without downloadin g them first to your device. UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunications System. UMTS is a 3G mobile communication syst em. Besi des voice and data, UMTS enables audio and video delivery to wireless devices. When you use your device in GSM and UMTS networks, multiple data connections can be active at the s ame time, and acce ss points can share a data connection. In the UMTS network, data connections remai n active during voice calls. You can, for example, browse the web faster than previou sly possible while simultaneously speaking on the phone. UPIN PIN code used in UMTS network. UPUK UPIN Unblocking Key. UPUK code is required to change a blocked UPIN code or PIN2 code. The length of the code is 8 digits. USIM SIM card used in UMTS network. USSD command A service request, such as request to activate an application or configure various settings remotely, t hat you can send to your operator or service provider with your device. VoIP Voice over IP technology. VoIP is a set of protocols that facilitate phone calls over an IP network, such as the internet. VPN Virtual private network. VP N creates a secure connection to compatible corporate intranet and services, such as e-mail. WAP Wireless application protocol. WAP is an international standard for wireless communica tion. 149 Glossary
WEP Wired equivalent privacy. WEP is an encryption method that encrypts data before it is transmitted in WLAN. WLAN Wireless local area network. WPA Wi-Fi Protected Access. Security method for WLAN. WPA2 Wi-Fi Protected Access 2. Security method for WLAN. 150 Glossary
Nokia original enhancements Warning: Use only batteries, chargers, and enhancements approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The use of any other types may invalidate any approval or wa rranty, and may be dangerous. For availability of appr oved enhancements, please check with your dealer. When you disconnect the power cord of any enhanc ement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord. An extensive range of enhancements is available for your device. Please visit www.nokia-asia.com/ enhancements for more details. Important : Battery talk and standby times are estimates only and de pend on signal st rength, network conditions, features used, battery age and condition, temperatures to which battery is expo sed, use in digital mode, and many othe r factors. The amount of time a device is used for calls will affect its standby time. Likewise, the amount of ti me that the device is turned on and in the standby mode will affect its talk time. 151 Nokia orig inal enhanceme nts Battery Battery model Talk time Standby BL-4U Up to 7.5/ 3.4 WCDMA ) Up to 11/14 WCDMA ) hours (GSM/ s (GSM/ day
Troubleshooting To see frequently asked qu estions about your device, visit the product support pages at t he Nokia web site. Q: What is my lock, PIN, or PUK code? A: The default lock code is 12345 . If you forget or lose the lock code, contact your device dealer. If you forget or lose a PIN or PUK code, or if you have not received such a code, contact your network service provider. Q: How do I close an applic ation that is not responding? A: Press and hold the home key. Scroll to the application, and press the backspac e key to close the application. Q: Why do images look smudgy? A: Ensure that the camera lens protection windows are clean. Q: Why do missing, discoloured, or bright dots appear on the screen every time I switch on my device? A: This is a characteristic of this type of disp lay. Some displays may contain pixels or dots that rema in on or off. This is normal, not a fault. Q: Why canâÂÂt I fi nd my friendâÂÂs devi ce while using Bluetooth connecti vity? A: Check that both devi ces are compa tible, have activated Bluetooth connecti vity, and are not in the hidden mode. Check also that the distance between the two devices is not over 10 metres (33 feet) and tha t there are no walls or othe r obstructions between the device s. Q: Why canâÂÂt I end a Bluetooth conn ection? A: If another device is connected to your device, you can end the connection usin g the other device or by deactivating B luetooth connectivity. Select Menu > Connectivi ty > Bluetooth > Bluetooth > Off . Q: Why can't I see a WLAN access point even though I know I'm within its range? A: Check that the Offline pr ofile is not in use in your devic e. The WLAN access point may u se a hidden service set identifier (SSID). You can on ly access networks that use a hidden SSID if you know the correct SSID, and have created a WLAN access point for the n etwork on your Nokia device 152 Troubleshooting
Check that the WLAN access point is not on chan nels 12-13, as they cann ot be associated with. Q: How do I switch WLA N off on my Nok ia device? A: The WLAN on your Nokia device switches off when you are not trying to connect , not connected to another access point, or not scannin g for available net works. To further reduce battery consumption, you can sp ecify that your No kia device does not s can, or scans less often, for available networks in the background. WLAN switches off in between background scans. To stop the backgrou nd scans, select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Wi reless LAN > Sho w WLAN availability > Never . You can still manually scan for available WLAN networks a nd connect to WLAN networks as usua l. To increase the background scan inte rval, select Show WLAN availability > Yes , and define the interval in Scan for networks . Q: Why can't I browse the web even though the WLAN connection is working and th e IP settings are correct? A: Check that you have define d the HTTP/ HTTPS prox y settings correctly in the advanced s ettings of your WLAN access point. Q: How do I check the signal quality of my WLAN connection? Select Menu > Connectivity > Conn. mgr. > Act ive data connection s > Optio ns > Det ails . If the signal quality is weak or mode rate, you may encounter connection problems. Try again closer to the access point. Q: Why do I have prob lems with the security mode? A: Check that you have configured th e security mode correctly, and that it is the same that the network uses. To check the security mode the n etwork uses, select Menu > Connecti vity > Conn. mgr. > Active data connections > Options > Details . Check also the following: you have th e correct WPA mode (preshared key or EAP) , you have disabled all EAP types that are not needed, and all the EAP type settings are correct (passwords, us er names, certificates). Q: Why canâÂÂt I select a contact for my message? A: The contact card does not have a phone number, an address, or an e-mail ad dress. Select Menu > Communic. > Contacts , and edit the contact card. Q: The note Retrieving message is shown briefly. What is happening? A: The device is trying to retrieve a multimedia message from the multimed ia messaging centre. This note is shown if you have s elected Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Optio ns > Settings > Multimedia message > Multimed ia retrieval > Always a utomati c . Check that the settings for multimedia messaging are defined correctly and that 153 Troubleshooting
there are no mistakes in phone numbers or addresses. See "Multimedia me ssage settings" , p. 79 . Q: How can I end the data connection when the device starts a data connection aga in and again? A: The device may be trying to retrieve a multimedia message from the multimed ia message cent re. To stop the device from making a data connection, s elect Menu > Communic. > Messagi ng > Options > Settings > Multimedia message > Multimedia retrieval > Manual to have the multimedia mes s agi ng ce ntr e s av e m es sag es to be ret ri ev ed l at er, or Off to ignore all incoming multimedia m essages. If you select Manual , you receive a notification when there is a new multimedia message that you can retrieve in the multimedia message centre. If you select Off , the device does not ma ke any network con nections related to multimedia messaging . To set the device to use a packet data connection only if you start an application or action tha t needs it, select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connecti on > Packet data > Packet data connection > When needed . If this does not help, switch the device off, and swit ch it on again. Q: How do I save battery power? A: Many features in your device increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life time. To save battery power, do the following: ⢠Switch off Bluetooth when you do not need it. ⢠Stop the background sc ans for WLAN. Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Wireless LAN > Show WLAN availability > Never . You can still manually scan for av ailable WLAN networks and connect to WLAN networks a s usual. ⢠Set the device to use a pa cket data connection only if you start an applicati on or action that needs it. Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Packet data > Packet data connection > When needed . ⢠Prevent the device from automatically downloading new maps in the Maps application. Select Menu > GPS > Maps > Optio ns > Settings > Intern et > Use network Neve r . ⢠Change the time-out after which the ba cklight is switched off. Select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > Display > Light time-out . ⢠Close the applications you do not use. Press and hold the home key. Scroll to the applicati on, and press the backspace key to close the application. 154 Troubleshooting >
Battery and charger information Battery and charger information Your device is powered by a rechargeable battery. The battery intended for use wi th this device is BL-4U. Nokia may make addition al battery models available for this device. This device is intended for use when supplied with power from the following chargers: AC-5. The exact charger model number may vary depending on the type of plug. The plug variant is identified by one of the follo wing: E, EB, X, AR, U, A, C, or UB. The battery can be charge d and discharged hundreds of times, but it will eventually wear out. When the ta lk and standby times are noticea bly shorter than n ormal, replace the battery. Use only Nokia appro ved batteries, and recharge your battery only with Nokia approved chargers designated for this device. Use of an unapproved battery or char ger may present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard. If a battery is being used for the first time or if the battery has not been used for a prolonged period, it may be necessary to connect the charger, th en disconnect and reconnect it to begin ch arging the battery. If the battery is co mpletely discharged, it may take several minutes before th e charging indicator appears on the display or be fore any calls can be made. Always switch the device off and disconnect the charger before removing the battery. Unplug the charger from the electrical plug and the device when not in us e. Do not leave a fully charged battery connected to a ch arger, since overcharging may shorten its lifetime. If left unused, a fully charged battery will lose its charge over time. Always try to keep the battery betw een 15ðC and 25ðC (59ðF and 77ðF). Extreme temperat ures reduce the capacity an d lifetime of the battery . A device with a hot or cold battery may n ot work temporarily. Ba ttery performance is particularly limited in temperatures well below freezing. Do not short-circuit the b att ery. Accidental short- circuiting can occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct connection of the positive ( ) and neg ative (-) terminals of t he battery. (These look like metal strips on the battery.) This might happen, for example, when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Sh ort-circuiting th e terminals may damage the battery or the connecting object. 155 Battery and charger information
Do not dispose of batteries in a fire as they may explode. Batteries may also explode if damaged. Dispose of batteries accord ing to local regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as household waste. Do not dismantle, cut, open, crush, bend, deform, puncture, or shred cells or batteries. In the event of a battery leak, do not allow the liquid to come in contact with the skin or eyes. In th e event of s uch a leak, flush your skin or eyes immediately with water, or seek medical help. Do not modify, remanufactu re, attempt to insert foreign objects into the ba ttery, or immerse or expose it to water or other liquids. Improper battery use may resu lt in a fire, explosion, or other hazard. If the device or battery is dropped, especially on a hard surf ace, and you believe the battery has been damaged, take it to a service centre for inspection before continuing to use it. Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Never use any charger or battery that is damaged. Kee p your battery out of the reac h of small children. Nokia battery authentication guidelines Always use original Nokia batteries for your safety. To check that you are getting an original Nokia ba ttery, purchase it from a Nokia au thorised service centre or dealer, and inspect the hologram label us ing the following steps: Successful completion of the steps is not a total assurance of the authenticity of the battery. If you have any reason to believe that your battery is not an authentic, original Nokia ba ttery, you should refra in from using it, and take it to the nearest Nokia authorised service centre or dealer for assistance. If authenticity cannot be verified, retu rn the battery to the place of purchase. Authenticate hologram 1. When you look at the hologram on the label, you should see the Nokia connecting ha nds symbol from one angle and the Nokia Original Enhancements logo when looking from another angle. 156 Battery and charger information
2. When you angle the hologram left, right, down and up, you should see 1, 2, 3 and 4 dots on each side respectively. What if your battery is not authentic? If you cannot confirm th at your Nokia ba ttery with the hologram on the label is an au thentic Nokia batte ry, please do not use the batter y. Take it to the nearest Nokia authorised service centre or dealer for assistance. The use of a battery that is not approved by Nokia may be dangerous and may result in poor performance and damage to your device and its accessories. It may also invalida te any approval or warranty app lying to th e device. To find out more about original Nokia batteries, see www.nokia-asia.com/batterych eck. 157 Battery and charger information
Care and maintenance Your device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and s hould be treated with care. The following suggestions wi ll help you protect y our warranty coverage. ⢠Keep the device dry. Prec ipitation, humidity, and all types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If your device does get wet, remove the battery, an d allow the device to dry completely before replacing it. ⢠Do not use or store the device in dusty, dirty areas. Its moving parts and elec tronic components can be damaged. ⢠Do not store the device in hot areas. High temperatures can shorten the life of electronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. ⢠Do not store the device in cold areas. When the device returns to its normal temp erature, moisture can form inside the devi ce and damage electronic circuit boards. ⢠Do not attempt to open the device other t han as instructed in this guide. ⢠Do not drop, knock, or shake the device. Rough handling can break interna l circuit boards and fine mechanics. ⢠Do not use harsh chemic al s, cleaning solvents, or strong detergents to clean the device. ⢠Do not p aint the devi ce. Paint can clo g the movin g parts and prevent proper operation. ⢠Use a soft, clean, dry cloth to clean any lenses, such as camera, proximity sensor , and light sensor lenses. ⢠Use only the supplied or an appr oved replacem ent antenna. Unauthorised a ntennas, modificati ons, or attachments could dama ge the device and may violate regulations governing radio devices. ⢠Use chargers indoors. ⢠Always create a backup of data you want to keep, such as contacts an d calendar notes. ⢠To reset the device from time to time for op timum performance, power off th e device and remove the battery. These suggestions apply equally to your device, battery, charger, or any en hancement. If any device is not working properly, take it to the nearest authorised service facility for service. 158 Care and ma intenance
Additional safety information Small children Your device and its enhancements may con tain small parts. Keep them out of th e reach of small children. Operating environment This device meets RF exposure guidelines when used either in the normal use position against the ear or when positioned at least 2.2 centimetres (7/8 inch) away from the body. When a carry case, belt clip, or holder is used for bod y-worn operation, it should not contain metal and should position the devi ce the above-stated distance from your body. To transmit data files or messages, this device requires a quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of data files or messages may be delayed until such a connection is available. Ensure the above separation distance instru ctions are followed until the transmission is completed. Parts of the device are magnetic. Metallic materials may be attracted to the device. Do not place credit cards or other magnetic storag e media near the dev ice, because information stored on them may be erased. Medical devices Operation of any radio transmit ting equipment, including wireless phones, may interfere with the functionality of inadequately protected medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off your device in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or heal th care facilities may be using equipment th at could be sensitive to external RF energy. Implanted medical devices Manufacturers of medical devices recommend that a minimum separation of 15.3 centimetres (6 inches) should be maintained betw een a wireless device and an implanted medical device , such as a pacemaker or implanted cardioverter defibri llator, to avoid potential 159 Additional safety information
interference with the medical device. Persons who have such d evices should: ⢠Always keep the wireless device more than 15.3 centimetres (6 inches) from the medical device when the wireless device is turned on. ⢠Not carry the wireless device in a breast pocket. ⢠Hold the wireless device to the ear opposite the medical device to minimise the pot ential for interference. ⢠Turn the wireless device off immediately if there is any reason to suspect that interference is taking place. ⢠Read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of their implanted medical device. If you have any questi ons about using you r wireless device with an implanted medical device, consult your health care provider. Hearing aids Some digital wireless devi ces may interfere with some hearing aids. If interfer ence occurs, consult your service provider. Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic sy stems in motor vehicles such as electron ic fuel injection systems, electronic antiskid (ant ilock) braking systems, electronic speed control systems, and air bag sy stems. For more information, check with the m anufacturer, or its representative, of your vehicle or any equipment that has been added. Only qualified personnel should service the device or install the device in a vehi cle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty that may apply to the device. Check regula rly that all wireless device eq uipment in your vehicle i s mounted and operating proper ly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive mate rials in the same compa rtment as the devi ce, its parts, or enhancements. For vehicles equipped with an air bag, r e m e m b e r t h a t a i r b a g s i n f l a t e w i t h g r e a t f o r c e . D o n o t place objects, including installed or portable wireless equipment in the area over th e air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in-veh icle wireless equipment is improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result. Using your device while flying in aircraft is prohibited. Switch off your device before boarding an aircra ft. The use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft , disrupt the wireless telephone networ k, and may be illegal. 160 Additional safety information
Potentially explosive environments Switch off your device wh en in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere, and obey all signs and instructions. Potentially explosive at mospheres include areas where you would normally b e advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire re sulting in bodily injury or even death. Switch off the device at refuelling points such as near gas pu mps at service stations. Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, storage, and dist ribution areas; chemical plants; or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially ex plosive atmosphere are often, but not always, clearly ma rked. They include below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage facilities and areas where th e air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust, or metal powders. You should check with the manufa cturers of vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (suc h as propane or butan e) to determine if this device ca n be safely used in their vicini ty. Emergency calls Important: This device operates using radio signals, wireless networks, lan dline networks, and user-programmed functions. If your device supports voice calls over the internet (internet calls ), activate both the internet calls and the cellular p hone. The device will attempt to make emergency calls over both the cellular networks and th rough your internet call provider if both are activa ted. Connections in all conditions cannot be guaranteed. You s hould never rely solely on any wireless device for essential communications like medical emergencies. To make an emergency call: 1. If the device is not on, switch it on. Check for adequate signal strength . Depending on your device, you may also need to complete the following: ⢠Insert a SIM card if your device uses one. ⢠Remove certain call restrictions you have activated in your device. ⢠Change your profile from offline or flight profile mode to an active profile. 2. Press the end key as many times as needed to clear the display and ready the device for calls. 3. Enter the official emergency num ber for your present location. Emer gency numbe rs vary by location. 4. Press the call key. When making an emergency call, give all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Your wireles s device may be the only mean s of comm unication at the scene of an accident. Do not end the call until g iven permission to do so. 161 Additional safety information
CERTIFICATION INFORMATION (SAR) This mobile device meet s guidelines for exposure to radio wav es. Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio waves recommended by international guidelines. These guidelines were developed by the independent scientific organi sation ICNIRP and include safety margins designed to assure the protection of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure guidelines for mobile devices employ a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate or SAR. The SAR limit stated in the ICNIRP guidelines is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions with the device transmitting at its highes t certified power level in a ll tested frequency bands. The actual SAR level of an operating device can be below the maximum value because the device is design ed to use only the power required to reach the network. That amou nt changes depending on a number of factors such as how close you are to a network base station. The highest SAR value under the ICNIRP guidel ines for use of the device at the ear is 1.37 W/kg. Use of device accessorie s and enhancements may result in different SAR va lues. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting and testing requirements and the netw ork band. Additional SAR information may be provided under product information at www.nokia.com. 162 Additional safety information
MANUFACTURERâÂÂS LIMITED WARRANTY This Limited Warranty is in addition to, and does not affect your legal (statu tory) rights under your applicable national laws relat ing to the sale of consumer products. Nokia Corporation (âÂÂNokiaâÂÂ) provides this Limited Warranty to person who has purchased the Nokia product(s) included in the sa les package (âÂÂProductâÂÂ). Nokia warrant s to you that du ring the wa rranty period Nokia or a Nokia authorised service compan y will in a commercially reasonable time remedy defects in material s, desi gn and work manship free of cha rge by repairing or, should Nokia in its absolute discretion deem it necessary, replacing the Product in accordance with this Limited Warra nty (unless otherwise required by law). This Limited Wa rranty is only valid and enforceable in the country where you have purchased the Product provided that it is intended for sale in that country. Warranty period The warranty period starts at the time o f Product 's original purchase by the first end-user. The Product may consist of several di fferent parts and different parts may be covered by a different warranty period (hereinafter âÂÂWarranty PeriodâÂÂ). The different Warranty Periods are: a) twelve (12) months fo r the mobile device and accessories (whether included in the mobile device sales package or so ld se parately) other than the consumable parts and access ories listed in (b) and (c) below; b) six (6) months for the following consumable pa rts and accessories: batteries, chargers, desk stands, headsets, cables a nd covers; and c) ninety (90) days for the media on which any software is provided, for example, CD-ROM or memory card As far as your national laws permit, the Warranty Period will not be extended or renewed or otherwise affected due to subseq uent resale, repair or replacement of the Product. However, repaired part(s) will be warranted for the remainder of the original Warranty Period or for sixty (60) days from the dat e of repair, whichever is longer. 163 MANUFACTURERâÂÂS LIMITED WARRANT Y
How to get warranty service If you wis h to make a clai m under the Limited Warranty, you may call the No kia call centre (where this is available and please note n ational rates appl y to calls) and/or where necessary, return your Product or the affected part (if it is not the entire Product) to a Nokia care centre or Nokia designated ser vice location. Information about Nokia care centres, Nokia designated servi ce locations and Nokia call cen tres can be found at local Nokia web pages where available. You must return your Product or the affected part (if it is not the entire Product) to a Nokia care centre or Nokia designated service location before the expiry o f the Warranty Period. When making a Limited Warra nty claim you have to present: a) the Product (or a ffected part thereto), b) the legible and unmodified orig inal proof of purchase, which clearly indicates the name and address of the seller, the date and place of purchase, the product ty pe and the IMEI or other serial number. This Limited Warranty extends only to the orig inal first end-user of the Product and is not assignable or transferable to any subsequent purchaser/ end-user. What is not covered? 1. This Limited Warra nty does not cover user manua ls or any third party software, settings, con tent, data or links, whether included/downloaded in the Product, whether included during installment, assem bly, shipping or at any other time in the delivery chain or otherwise and in any way acquired by you. To the extent permitted by applicable law(s), Nokia does not warrant that any Nokia software will meet your requirements, will work in combination with any hardware or software applications provided by a third party, that the operation of the software will be uninterrupted or error free or that any defects in th e software are correctable or will be corrected. 2. This Lim ited Warranty does not cover a ) normal wear and tear (including, without limitation, wear a nd tear of camera lenses, batteries or displays), b) transport costs, c) defects caused by rough h andling (including, without limitation, defect s caused by sharp items, by bending, compressing or drop ping, etc.), d) defects or damage caused by misuse of the Product, including use that is contrary to the instructions provided by Nokia (e.g. as set out in the P rod uct's user guide) and/or e) other acts beyond the reasonable control of Nokia. 3. This Limited Warra nty does not cover defects or alleged defects caused by th e fact that the Product was used with, or connected to , a product, accessories, software and/or service no t manufactured, supplied or authorised by Nokia or was used otherwise than for its intended use. Defects can be caused by viruses from your or from a third party's una uthorised access to 164 MANUFACTURERâÂÂS LIMITED WARRANT Y
services, other accounts, computer syst ems or networks. This unau thorised access can take place through hacking, pa ssword-mining or t hrough a variety of other means. 4. This Limited Warranty do es not cover defects caused by the fact that the battery h as been short-circuited or by the fact that the seals of the battery enclosure or the cells are broken or show evidence of tampering or by the fact that the battery ha s been used in equipment other than those for whic h it has been specified. 5. This Limited Warranty does not apply if the Product has been opened, modified or repaired by anyone other than an aut horised serv ice centre, if it is repaired using unauthoris ed spare part s or if the ProductâÂÂs serial number, the mobile accessory date code or the IM EI number has been removed, erased, defaced, altered or are illegible in any way and this shall be determined in the sole discretion of Nokia. 6. This Limited Warranty does not apply if the Product has been exposed to moisture, to dampness or to extreme thermal or enviro nmental conditions or to rapid changes in such co nditions, to corrosion, to oxidation, to spillage of food or liquid or to influence from chemical products. Other important notices A third party, independent operator provides the SIM card and cellular and/or ot her network or system on which the Product operates. Therefore, Nokia will not accept responsibility un der this warranty for the operation, availability, coverage, services or range of the cellular or other networ k or system. Before the Product can be repaired or replaced, the operator may need to unlock any SIM-lock or other lock that may have been added to lock the p roduct to a specif ic network or operator. Accordingly, Nokia does not accept responsibility for any delays in warranty repairs or for the inability of Nokia to complete warranty repairs that are caused by the operator's delay or failure to unlock any SIM-lock or other lock. Please remember to make backup copies or keep written records of all important content and data stored in your Product, be cause content and data may be lost during repair or replacement of the Product. Nokia, in a manner consistent with the provisions of the section entitled âÂÂLimitation of Nokia's Liabilityâ below, to the extent permitted by applicable law (s), shall not under any circu mstances be liable, either expressly or implied, for any damages or losses of any kind whatsoever resulting fr om loss of, damage to, or corruption of, content or data during repair or replacement of the Product. All parts of the Product or other equipment that Nokia has replaced shall become the property of Nokia. If the returned Product is found not to be covered by the terms and conditions of the Limited Warranty, Nokia and its authorised service companies reserve the right to charge a handling fee. When repairing or replacing the Product, Nokia may use products or parts that are new, equivalent to new or r econditioned. 165 MANUFACTURERâÂÂS LIMITED WARRANT Y
Your Product may contain country specific elements, including software. If the Product has been re-exported from its original destin ation country to another country, the Product may conta in country specific elements that are not consid ered to be a defect under this Limited Warranty. Limitation of Nokia's liability This Limited Warranty is your sole and exclusive remedy against Noki a and Nokia's sole and exclusive liability in respect of defects in your Product. However, this Limited Warranty shall neither exclude nor limit i) any of your legal (statut ory) rights under the app licable national laws or ii) any of your rights against th e seller of the Pr oduct. This Limited Warranty replaces all other Nokia warranties and liabilities, wh ether oral, written , (non- mandatory) statutory, contractual, in tort or otherwise, including, without limitation, and where permitted by applicable law, any implie d conditio ns, warranties or other terms as to satisfa ctory quality or fitness for purpose. To the extent perm itted by applicable law(s) Nokia does not assume any liability for loss of or damage to or corruption of data, for any loss of profit, loss of use of Products o r fu nctionality, loss of business, loss of contracts, loss of revenue s or loss of anticipated savings, increase d costs or exp enses or for an y indirect loss or damage, consequential loss or damage or special loss or damage. To the extent permi tted by applicable law, NokiaâÂÂs liability shall be limited to the purchase value of the Product. The above limitations shall not apply to death or personal injury resulting from NokiaâÂÂs proven negligence. Statutory obligations This Limited Warranty must be read subject to any statutory provisions that imply warranties or conditions into this Limite d Warranty that cannot be excluded, restricted or modified or cannot be excluded, restricted or modified except to a limited extent. If such statutory provisions apply, to the extent to which Nokia is able to do so, its liability under those provisions will be limited, at its option to, in the case of goods : the replacement of the goods or the s upply of equivalent goods, the repair of the g oods, the payment of the cost of replacing the goods or of acquiring equivalent goods, or the payment of the cost of having the goods repaired; and in the case of services: the supplying of the services again or the pa yment of the cost of having the services supplied again . Note: Your Product is a sophisticated electronic device. Nokia strongly en courages you to familia rise yourself with the user guid e and instructions provided with and for the Product. P lease also note tha t the Product might contain high precision displays, camera lenses and other such part s, which could be scratched or otherwise damaged if not handled very carefully. 166 MANUFACTURERâÂÂS LIMITED WARRANT Y
All warranty information, product features and specifications are subject to change without noti ce. Nokia Corporation Keilalahdentie 2-4 FIN-02150 Espoo Finland 167 MANUFACTURERâÂÂS LIMITED WARRANT Y
Index Symbols/Numerics 3-D ringing tones 40 802.1x security settings 140 A access points creating 138 VPN 130 activation keys 127 Active notes 104 settings 104 alarm c lock 108 alert ton es 134 altitude cal ibration 102 animated s creen save r 40 antennas 20 application setting s 144 applications common actions 25 installing 126 modifying installations 126 attachments e-mail 68 multimedia messages 73 sound clips 74 audio fi les detail s 51 sending 5 1 autolock period 13 6 B background image 40 backing up data 124 barcodes 131 battery charge level 2 5 charging 18 inserting 17 blogs 57 Bluetooth authorising devices 114 pairing 114 passcode 114 receiving data 113 security 115 sending data 113 bookmarks 57 browsing intranet 58 offline 57 web 57 C cable 111 cache emptying 5 7 Calculator 105 Calendar settings 35 calendar entries creating 34 viewing 34 calendar key 33 calendar views changing 33 call barring 88 net calls 89 call divert 88 caller ID 137 calls answering 83 barring net calls 89 call waiting 137 caller ID 137 conference call 84 fixed dialling 122 making 83 making a call from Log 94 making a net call 87 muting the ringing tone 83 net call alert 137 PTT 92 rejecting 83 168 Index
rejecting wit h text message 137 selecting type 137 settings 137 speed dialling 88 voice commands 91 voice dialling 91 voice ma il 90 camera capturing images 41 image settings 43 playing videos 43 scenes 41 sequence mode 42 toolbar 41 video clips 42 video set tings 43 viewing images 42 car kit remote SIM access 115 cell broadcast 78 settings 82 certificates details 123 settings 123 charging the battery 18 Clock alarms 108 settings 109 world clock 109 conference calls 84 configuration messages 143 connec tion metho ds Bluetooth 113 data cable 111 infrared 112 modem 118 connecti ons ending 118 GPRS settings 60 PC connection 62 WLAN settings 61 connectors 14 contact groups adding ringing to nes 36 creating 35 making conference calls 35 contacts adding 35 adding ringing to nes 36 searching 35 settings 36 contacts directories managing 36 contacts key 3 3 converting currencies 106 measurements 106 currency conversions 106 D date settings 135 decrypting device memory and memory card 121 destination removing 102 setting 102 Device manager 124 display changing the look 4 0 indicators 25 settings 133 display rotation 15 settings 133 Download! managing items 58 purchase hist ory 59 search settings 59 settings 59 subscriptions 59 DTMF tones 89 E e-mail automatic retrieval settings 81 connecting to mailbox 6 8 connection setting s 80 creating folders 69 deleting 69 POP or IMAP 67 replying 68 retrieval settings 8 1 sending 69 169 Index
setting up 67 user settings 80 writing 69 e-mail key 33 e-mail key se ttings 136 EAP plug-in settings 141 using an EAP plug-in 141 encryptin g device memory and memory card 121 ending internet connections 57 network connections 118 enhancements remote SIM acces s 115 settings 136 equaliser 47 F feeds 57 File manager 105 files downloadi ng 49 flash files 51 sending 105 fixed dialling 122 free memor y 27 G Gallery 49 Genuine en hancements 151 GPRS access point settings 60 advanced access point settings 60 settings 139 H headset connecting 19 home key 32 home screen 31 settings 39, 134 switching 32 HSDPA (high-speed downlink packet access) 111 I IM application settings 77 blocking users 77 groups 76 settings 75 starting a conversation 75 images adding to contacts 50 display background 50 rotating 49 sending 5 0 sharing on line 48 zooming 49 indicators 25 infrared 112 inserting battery 17 memory card 18 SIM card 17 installation log 126 installing applications 126 internet 57 ending connect ions 57 internet calls 87 Internet radio listening 53 saving stations 54 searching 54 settings 54 intranet browsing 58 J jad files 126 jar files 126 Java applications 126 K key store 124 keyguard 16 keypad lock settings 136 locking 16 tones 134 keys 14 activation keys 127 170 Index
shortcuts 134 WEP keys 140 L landmarks categories 103 creating 102 editing 102 receiving 103 sending 103 language changing 29 settings 134 lock code 1 20, 136 locking device 120 device autolock 136 keypad 16, 136 Log 94 adding numbers to Contacts 94 deleting 94 making a call 94 sending messag es 9 4 settings 94 transfer log 24 logos operator logo 134 welcome logo 133 M mailboxes connecting 68 creating 67 making a call 83 Maps 97, 98 browsing 98 driving 100 finding locations 99 indicators 99 routes 99 traffic information 101 travel guides 101 walking 100 measuremen ts converting 106 measuring system changing 102 memory 27 memory card backing up data 124 formatting 28 inserting 1 8 locking 120 microSD 28 passwords 120 setting password 28, 105 unlocking 28 menu 23 message reader 64 selec ting voice 64 message s 63 call rejection messages 137 cell broadcast settings 82 configuration messages 143 other settings 82 sending sound clips 74 service messages 77 text message settings 79 Messaging folders 63, 64 microS DHC 28 modem 62, 118 multimedia messages attachments 73 creating 71 creating presentations 73 forwarding 74 receiving 72 replying to 72 sending 71 sending options 7 4 settings 79 multitas king 36 Music player Music Sto re 46 playing 45 playlists 46 transferring music 46 Music Store 46 N net calls 87 alert settings 137 171 Index
barring 89 connecting 86 making a call 87 profiles 86, 143 settings 143 network settings 137 Nokia PC Sui te 111 Notes 109 notific ation li ght 135 O One-touch keys 135 operato r logo 134 selecting 137 original settin gs 137 P packet data access point settings 60 advanced access point settings 60 restr icti ng 143 settings 139 pairing devic es 114 passcode 114 passwords memory card password 28, 105 PC Suite 111 PDF reader 107 personalisat ion 40 changing language 134 display 133 home screen 134 tones 134 picture messag es forwarding 71 viewing 71 PIN code changing 136 playing messages 64 recordings 48 video and audio 50 podcasting 44 directories 44 searching 45 settings 45 positioning settings 97 predict ive text in put 29, 134 presentations 73 printer settings 108 printin g 107, 108 profiles creating 38 customising 38, 39 net call profile 86, 143 selecting ringing tones 38 PTT contacts 93 created calls 9 3 creating a channel 93 exiting 93 logging in 92 making a call 92 settings 92 Q Quickoffice 106 R radio listening to 52 saved stations 53 settings 53 viewing visual content 52 RealPlayer playing media clip s 5 0 sending files 51 settings 51 viewing clip details 51 recorder playing recordings 4 8 recording a sound clip 48 settings 49 recording sound clips 48 remote configuratio n 124 remote lock 120 remote synchronisation 129 restoring original s ettings 137 ringing tones 134 3-D 40 172 Index
contacts and contact groups 36 in profiles 38 vibrating alert 134 S satellite si gnal strength 102 saving current position 102 files 25 settings 25 screen saver 40, 133 scroll key lights 16 search modes switching 35 searching available WLANs 119 security Bluetooth 115 device and SIM card 136 Java application 126 memory card 120 security module 124 sending files 25, 105 using Bluetooth 113 videos 85 service commands 78 service messages 77 settings 81 session initi ation protoc ol See SIP settings Active notes 104 advanced WLAN 139 application installations 126 applications 144 Calendar 35 calls 137 camera 43 cell broadcast 8 2 certificate 123 clock 109 contacts 36 date 135 display 133 Download! application 59 e-mail connection 80 e-mail key 136 e-mail retrieval 81 e-mail user 80 EAP plug-ins 141 enhancements 136 GPRS 60, 139 home screen 134 IM 75 Internet radio 54 Java application secu rity 126 keypad lock 136 language 134 Log 94 multimedia messages 79 net call 143 network 137 packet data 139 podcasting 45 positioning 97 printer 108 PTT 92 radio 53 RealPlayer 51 recorder 49 restoring 137 service messages 81 SIP 142 slide 135 text messages 79 time 135 tones 134 voice commands 92 web 58 WEP security 140 WLAN 139 WLAN access point 61 WLAN security 140 Settings wizard 22 shortcuts 145 keys 134 signal strength 25 silencing alarms and incom ing calls 15, 134 SIM access profile 115 SIM card inserting 17 text messages 70 SIP creating profiles 142 173 Index
editing profiles 142 editing proxy servers 142 editing registration servers 143 settings 142 sis files 126 sisx files 126 slide opening and closing 16 settings 135 software packages installation settings 126 installing 126 sound clips recor ding 48 sending 74 Speech 64 speed dialling 88 standby mode settings 134 switching device on and off 21 Symbian applications 126 synchronisation 24 settings 129 synchronisation profiles 129 synchronising applications 129 T tabs 25 text changing si ze 133 letter mode 28 number mode 28 predictive input 29 traditional input 28 text messages messages on SIM card 70 sending 7 0 sending options 70 settings 79 writing 70 themes changing 40 downloading 4 0 time settings 135 tones 134 settings 134 toolbar camera 41 traditional text input 28 Transfer log 24 transferring data 24 trip des tinatio n 102 trip meter 102 troubleshoot ing 152 U UPIN code changing 136 USB data cable 111 V vibrating alert 134 video playing 43 video calls making a call 84 switching to voice call 84 video clips details 51 playing 50 sending 51 video sharing 85 receiving invitations 85 virtual private network access points 130 use in applications 131 Voice aid 90 voice commands changing profiles 91 launching an ap plication 91 settings 92 voice mail calling 90 changing number 90 voice over I P 87 VoIP 87 volume 27 VPN access points 130 use in applications 131 174 Index
W wallpaper 50 warning tones 134 Web connection security 5 6 web settings 58 weblogs 57 Welcome applicati on 21 welcome note 133 WEP keys 140 security settin gs 140 wireless keyb oard 109 WLAN 802.1x security settings 140 access point settings 61 access points 117 advanced access point settings 61 advanced settings 139 availability 116 MAC address 116, 139 searching for networks 119 security settin gs 140 settings 139 WEP keys 140 WPA security set tings 141 WLAN wizard 1 17 world clock 109 WPA security sett ings 141 writing language 29 Z Zip manag er 107 175 Index
DECLARATIO N OF CONFORMI TY Hereby, NOKIA CORPORA TION declares that this RM-343 product is in compliance with the essential requir ements and other relevan t provisions of Directive 19 99/5/EC. A copy of the Decla ration of Con formity can be found at http:// www.nokia.com/phones/decla ration_of_conformity/ . é 2008 Nokia. All rights reserved. Nokia, Nokia Connecting Peop le, Nokia Origi nal Enhancements logos, Eseries, E66, and Vi sual Radio are tradem arks or registered trademarks of Nokia Corporation. Nokia tune is a sound mark of Nokia Corporation. Oth er product and company names mentioned herein may be trademark s or tradenames of their respective owners. Reproduction, tr ansfer, distrib ution, or st orage of part or all of the co ntents in this d ocument in any form without the prior written permission of Nokia is prohibited. US Patent No 5818437 and other pending pa tents. T9 text input software Copyright é 1997-2008. Te gic Communications, Inc. All ri gh ts reserved. This product includes software licens ed from Symbian Software Lt d é1998-2008. Symbian and Symb ian OS are trad emarks of Symbia n Ltd. Java and all Java-based marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. Portions of the Nokia Maps softwar e are é1996-2008 The FreeType Pro ject. All rights reserved. This product is licensed un der the MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfolio Licen se (i) for personal and noncommercial use i n connection with information which has been encoded in compliance with the MPEG-4 Vi sual Standard by a consum er engaged in a person al and noncommercial act ivity a nd (ii) for use in connection with MPEG-4 vid eo provided by a licensed video provid er. No license is granted o r shall be impl ied for any other use . Additional information, including that r elated to promotion al, internal, an d commercial uses, ma y be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC. See http://www.mpegl a. com Nokia operates a policy of ongoing developm ent. Nokia reserves the right to make chan ges and improvements to any o f the product s described in this document without prior no tice. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERM ITTED BY APPL ICABLE LAW, UNDER NO CI RCUMSTANCES SHALL NOK IA OR ANY OF ITS LICEN SORS BE RESPONSIB LE FO R ANY LOSS OF DATA OR INCOME OR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES HOWSOEVER CAUS ED. THE CONTENTS O F THIS DOCUMENT ARE PROVIDE D "AS IS". EXCEP T AS RE QUIRED BY APPLICABL E LAW, NO W ARRANT IES OF ANY KIND, EIT HER EXP RESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LI MITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY A ND FITNESS FOR A PARTICU LAR PURPOSE, AR E MAD E IN RELATION .
TO THE A CCURACY , RELIAB ILITY OR CONTENT S OF THIS DOCUMEN T. NOKIA RESERVES THE RIG HT TO REV ISE THIS D OCUMENT OR WITHDRA W IT AT A NY TIME WITHOUT PRIO R NOTICE. Reverse engineering of any software in the Nokia dev ice is prohibited to the extent permitted by applicable la w. Insofar as thi s user guide contains any limitations on No kia's representations, warranties, damages an d liabilities, such limita tions shall lik ewise limit any repr esentations, wa rranties, damages and liabilities of Nokia's licensors. The availability of particula r products and applications and services for these products may v ary by regi on. Please ch eck with your Nokia dealer for details, and a vailabili ty of language o ptions. Export controls This device may contain commodit i es, technology or software subject to export la w s and regulations from the U S and other countr ies. Div ersion contrary to law is prohibited. FCC/INDUSTRY CANA DA NOTICE Your device may cause TV or radio interference (for example, wh en using a tel ephone in close proximity to receiving equipment). The FCC or Industry Canada can require you to stop using your telephone if su ch inte rference cannot be eliminated. If you require assistance, conta ct your local serv ice facility. This device complies wi th part 15 of the FCC rul es. Operation is sub ject to the followin g two conditions: (1) This de vice may not cause ha rmful interference, and (2) this dev ice must accept any int erference received, including interference that may cause undesired operat ion. Any changes or modifications not expressly approved by Nokia could void the user's authority to operate this e quipment.
Contents Safety................. .................. .............. ........10 About your device.................................................. .......10 Network services.............. .............................................11 Battery removing..........................................................12 E66 in brief..................................... ............13 Key features...................................................................13 Keys and parts...............................................................14 Key moves........................................................ ..............15 Auto mati c di spla y rot ati on...... ........ ........ .......... .......1 5 Silence the device.... ................................... ................15 Scroll key lights....... .................. ................... ...............16 Slide function. ........................................ .....................16 Set up your device......................... .............17 Insert the SIM card and battery................... ........... .....17 Charge the battery................................................ ........18 Insert the memory card......... .............................. .........18 Eject the memory card.............. .................... ................19 Connect the headset................................................ .....19 Attach the wrist strap...................................................19 Antennas........................................................................20 Get started......... .......... ........ ........ ........ ......21 First start-up..................................................................21 Welcome......................................................... ...............21 Settings wizard............................... .................... ..........22 Home screen..................................................................22 Menu......................... ................................ ......................23 Tran sfe r con ten t fr om ot her dev ices .........................23 Tran sfer con ten t bet wee n de vice s.... ........ ......... ......2 4 View transfer log........................................................24 Synchronise, retrieve, and send data.......................24 Com mon a ctio ns in se vera l ap pli cat ions .......... ..........2 5 Display indi cators................. .............................. ...........25 Volume control..............................................................27 Memory.............................................. ............................27 Free memory..................... ....................... ...................27 Memory card...............................................................28 MicroSDHC............................... ..................................28 Use a memory card.................... ..............................28 Write text...................... .................................................28 Traditional text input. ................ .................... ............28 Predictive text input..................... ............. ............... .29 Chan ge t he w riti ng l angu age ........ ......... ............ ......29 Further information........................................... ...........29 New from Eseries............. ....... ......... ........ ..31 Access tasks quickly .................... ................. .................31 Home screen..................................................................31 Navigate in the home screen............................ ........31 Work on the home screen........................ .................31 Switch home screens............................. ................. ...32 One-touch keys........... .................................... ...............32 Home key......................... ..................... ......................32 Contacts key...................................................... ..........33 Contents
Calendar key........... ................ .................... ................ .33 E-mail key..................... .......................... .....................33 Nokia Calendar for Eseries............. ....................... ........33 Calendar views............. ...................... .................. .......33 View calendar information...... ...................... ............34 Create calendar entries........ ......................................34 Calendar settings...... .......................... ........................35 Nokia Contacts for Eseries............................................3 5 Add contacts.................................... ........................ ...35 Contact groups....... ................ ................ ................... ..35 Search for contacts.................. ...................................35 Manage contacts direct ories................ ............. ........36 Add ringi ng tone s fo r con tac ts..... .......... ............ ......36 Change contacts settin gs.................. .........................36 Multitasking.............................. .....................................36 Personalisation..................................... .....38 Profiles..................................................... ......................38 Select ringing tones......................................................38 Customise profiles.................. ..................... ..................39 Personalise the home screen.......................................39 Change the display theme....... ................... ..................40 Download a theme....... ..................... ............... .............40 3-D ringing tones........................................... ...............40 Media............. ............... ............... ...............41 Camera............................................. ..............................41 Capture an image.......................................................41 Scenes........................... ................................. ..............41 Capture images in a sequence.......................... ........42 View captured image.................................................42 Record videos................. ................. .................... .......42 Play a video clip.................... ......................................43 Image settings......... ............................... ....................43 Video settings.............................................................43 Nokia Podcasting............................. .................. ...........44 Play and manage podcasts ............................... .........44 Directories.................................... ...............................44 Search podcasts................................ ..........................45 Podcasting settings.......... .......................... ................45 Music player...................................................................45 Pla y a so ng or a po dca st e piso de.. ............ .......... .....45 Playlists............................... ............................ ............46 Nokia Music Store ......................................................46 Transfer music from PC..............................................46 Tran sfe r wi th W indo ws Medi a Pl aye r......................47 Preset frequency sett ings..........................................47 Share online............... ......................... ...................... .....48 Share images online..................... ............ ........... ......48 Recorder............................................. ............................48 Record a sound clip....................................................48 Play a recording............ ...................... ..................... ...48 Recorder settings............................... ................. .......49 Gallery............................ ...................... ..........................4 9 Work wit h med ia f ile s and fol ders ...... ............ ......... 49 View images.......... ................... ............... ............... .....49 Manage image files....................................................50 RealPlayer....................................................... ...............50 Play video clips and stream lin ks..............................50 Send aud io f ile s and vid eo cli ps. ....................... .......51 View inf orma tion abo ut a m edi a cl ip......................51 RealPlayer settings........ ..................................... ........51 Flash player............ ............................. ........................... 51 Manage flash files.......... ...................... ....................... 51 Contents
Radio................................... ...................................... .....52 Listen to the radio................ ......................................52 View visual content..... ...............................................52 Saved stations.... ............... ................... ................ .......53 Radio settings........... ..................................................53 Internet radio................................................................53 Listen to internet radio stations...............................53 Search for stations.................... ............... ................. .54 Save stations....... ............................ ............................54 Internet radio settings ................... ................ ............54 Internet......................................................56 Web............................................ ................................... .56 Connection security........... ........................ .................56 Browse the web........... ............... ................ ................57 Bookmarks..................................................................57 Clear the cache.................. .................. ........................57 Feeds and blogs........................ ..................................57 End a connection........................................................57 Web settings...............................................................58 Browse the intranet ....... ..............................................58 Download!......... ................ ................ ................ .............58 Manage items..................................... ........................58 Subscriptions....................................... .......................59 Download! search......... .................. ......................... ...59 Purchase history.........................................................59 Download! settings....................................................59 Internet access points..................... .......... .......... .........59 Set up an internet acce ss point for packet data (GPRS)..................................................... .....................60 Advanced internet access point settings for packet data (GPRS)............... ................. ..................... .............60 Set up an access point for WL AN manually....... .......61 Adva nce d ac cess poi nt se ttin gs f or W LAN ...............61 Connect PC to web......... ................ ................... .............62 Messaging................ .................. ............. ...63 Messaging folders.............................. .................. .........63 Organise messages........................................ ...............64 Message reader............................... ................... ...........64 Speech............................................................................64 Edit the voice properties ............. ........ .......... ........ ...64 E-mail messages... ....................... ....................... ...........65 Nokia Email.................................................................65 Mail for Exchange................................... ....................66 Regular POP or IMAP e-mail ..................... ................. .67 Set up POP or IMAP e-mail...................... .............. ..67 Connect to a remo te mailbox.................................68 Rea d an d rep ly to e-ma il.. ........ .......... ......... ........ ...68 Write and send e-mail...... ................ ..................... ..69 Delete messages......................................................69 Subfolders in your remote e-mail..........................69 Text messages. ..............................................................69 Write and send text messages ..................................70 Sending options for text mes sages............... ...........70 Text messages on the SIM ca rd.................................70 View picture messages....................................... .......71 Forward picture messages....................... ................ .71 Multimedia messages...................................................71 Crea te a nd se nd mu lti medi a mes sag es...... .............71 Rece ive and rep ly to mul time dia mess age s............72 Create presentations......... .........................................73 View presentations................................... .................73 Vie w and sav e mul tim edi a att ach men ts.................73 Contents
Forward a multimedia message...............................74 Send a sound clip........................ .................. .............7 4 Sending options for multimedia messages.............74 Instant messaging................................ ..................... ...75 Define IM settings.. ................. ................. ................. ..75 Start a conversati on...................................................75 IM groups.................................... ................................7 6 Block users........................................................... .......77 IM application settin gs.................. ............. ...............7 7 Special message types................................................. .77 Service messages...... ............... .................. ............... ..77 Send service commands............................ ................7 8 Cell broadcast............................................. ...................78 Messaging setti ngs.................... .................. ............... ..78 Text message settin gs.......................... .....................7 9 Multimedia message settings....................... ............79 E-mail account settings................... .......... .............. ..80 Connection settings. ........................ ................... .....80 User settings................................. ...........................8 0 Retrieval settings............ ...................... ...................81 Automatic retrieval settin gs............................ .......81 Service message settings................ ........ .......... ........8 1 Cell broadcast settings.... ...........................................82 Other settings.............................................................82 Phone................................................... ......83 Voice calls................ .................. ....................... ..............83 Answer a call.......................... .....................................83 Make a call..................... .................... ......................... .83 Make a conference call.......................... .....................84 Video calls......................................................................84 Make a video call............................ ........................... .84 Share a video............................................ ..................85 Rece ive a vi deo shar ing invi tat ion. .......... .......... ......85 Net calls........................... .......................... .....................85 Create a net call profile....................................... .......86 Connect to the net call service.................... ............ ..86 Make net calls................................ ..................... ........87 Net call service settings .................................... .........87 Speed dialling.............. ............................................. .....88 Call divert.......................................................................88 Call barring............... ................. .................... ................ .88 Bar net calls...................................... ......................... ....89 Send DTMF tones.......................................................... .89 Voice mail....................... ........................ .................... ...90 Voice aid................... .................... ...................... ............90 Voice commands...........................................................90 Make a call..................... ......................... .................... .91 Launch an application.. ................... ..................... ......91 Change profil es.................................................. .........91 Voice command settings................... ............... .........92 Push to talk.................. ............................................. .....92 PTT settings............................. ................ ...................9 2 Log in to PTT service........................................ ..........92 Make a PTT call.................... ............. ................ ..........92 Created PTT calls.................. .............................. .........93 Manage PTT con tacts.................. ............ .............. .....93 Create a PTT channel............................. .....................93 Exit PTT................................. .......................................93 Log...................................................... ............................93 Call and data regist ers..................... ................... .......94 Monitor all communications.................. .......... .........94 Call and send messages from L og............. ................94 Log settings.............................. .................. ................94 Contents
Travelling.................................................. .96 Abou t GP S and sat ell ite sign als .......... ............. ............ 96 Positioning settings...... ................................................97 Maps.......................................... .....................................97 About Maps.......................................... .......................98 Move on a map..................................... ......................98 Display indicators.......................................................99 Find locations....................... ..................... ................. 99 Plan a route............ ................. .................... ................99 Walk to your destination........... ........................... ...100 Drive to your destination................... .......... ...........100 Traffic information................ .................................. .101 Travel guides................................... ........................ .101 GPS data....................................................................... 101 Use GPS data.............................................................102 Landmarks...................................................................102 Create a landmark....................................................102 Edit landmarks............. ................. ................ ............102 Landmark categories...............................................103 Receive landmarks............................................... ....103 Noki a Off ice Too ls...... ............ ........... .......1 04 Active notes.................................................................104 Create and edit notes .... ................. ..................... ....104 Sett ing s for Act ive not es... ........ ........... ......... ....... ...10 4 Calculator.....................................................................105 File manager........... ................... ......................... .........105 Quickoffice...................................................................105 Work with files........................................ .................106 Converter......................... ........................... .................106 Conv ert mea sure men ts.... ........ ........ ........ ......... ...... 106 Set b ase cur renc y an d ex cha nge r ate ....................106 Zip manager............................. ..................... ..............107 PDF reader..................... .................. ....................... .....107 Printing........................................................................107 Print files ...................................... ............................107 Printing options............................. ..................... .....108 Printer settings... ............................... ...................... .108 Clock............................................................. ................108 Alarm clock............... ................... ............... ...............108 World clock..................... ................................... .......109 Clock settings...................... ............................... .......109 Notes............................................................................109 Write and send notes....... .................. ............... .......109 Nokia Wireless Keyboard.............. ........ ........ ......... ....109 Connectivity............ .......... .......... .......... ...111 Fast downloading................................................ .......111 Nokia PC Suite....... ................ ................... ................ ....111 Data cable....................................................................111 Infrared........................................................................112 Bluetooth.................................................................... .112 About Bluetooth.......................................................113 Se nd an d r ec ei v e d at a w it h B l ue too th ... .......... .....1 1 3 Pair devices............................. ..................................114 Security tips..............................................................115 SIM access profile........................................................115 Wireless LAN................................................................116 WLAN connections................... ............. ............. ......116 See WLAN availability........................ ........... ...........116 WLAN wizard...................... ................ .................... ..117 Modem.................................................. .......................118 Connection manager.......................... ............. ...........118 View and end active connections...........................118 Contents
Search for WLAN.......................................................119 Se c ur i t y an d d at a m a na g e me n t ........... ...1 2 0 Lock the device.................. ........................ ..................120 Memory card security...................... .............. .............120 Encryption................. ............................ .......................121 Encrypt device memory or memory ca rd...............121 De cr yp t d ev ic e m e mo ry or me mo ry c ard .............. 1 21 Fixed dialling...............................................................122 Certificate manager....................................... .............122 View certificate details......................... ...................123 Certificate trust settings..........................................123 Security modules........... ................ ................... ...........123 Vie w and edi t sec uri ty m odul es. ............. ............ ...12 4 Back up data.......................................... ......................124 Remote configuration......................... ................ .......124 Application manager..................................................125 Install applicati ons................. ...................... ............126 Installation settings. ................................................126 Java security settings. ..............................................126 Activation keys............................................................127 Use activation keys....................... ............ .............. .127 Data synchronisation. ............................... ..................128 Create a synchronisation profile.... .........................129 Sel ect a ppl ica tion s to sync hro nise ........ .......... ....... 129 Synchronisation connection setting s.....................129 Mobile VPN................................... ................................130 Manage VPN..............................................................130 Create VPN access points.........................................130 Us e a VP N c on ne c tio n i n an ap pl i ca ti on .......... ...... 13 1 Barcode reader............................................. ...............131 Settings............................... .....................133 General settings................................................. .........133 Personalisation settings..........................................133 Display settings........................... ................ ..........133 Standby mode settings.........................................134 Tone settings................................................ .........134 Language setting s.................................................134 Notification light....................................... ............135 Settings for One-touch keys.............. ......... ......... .135 Date and time setting s.............. .................... ..........135 Slide settings............................................... .............135 Enhancement settin gs............................................ .136 Common enhancement settin gs..........................136 E-mail key settings.......................................... .........136 Security settings. ..................................................... .136 Device and SIM card security............................... .136 Restore original settings................................. ........137 Telephone settings........................................ .............137 Call settings...... ....................... ................. ................. 137 Network settings........ ........................... ...................137 Connection settings....................................................138 Access points...................... ................ ..................... .138 Pac ket d ata (GP RS) s ett ings ....... ........ ........... .......... 139 WLAN settings........................ ................. ............. ....139 Advanced WLAN settings.........................................139 WLAN security sett ings............................................140 WEP security settings .................... ................. ..........140 WEP key settings......................................................140 802.1x security setting s.......... ........ ........ ........ ........140 WPA security setting s.................... ................. .........141 Wireless LAN plugins. ................ ................. ..............141 EAP plug-ins............................................. ..............141 Contents
Use EAP plug-ins................................................ ....141 Se ss io n i ni ti a ti on pr ot oc ol ( SI P) se tt in gs ..............1 42 Edit SIP profiles.................. ............ ............. .............142 Edit SIP proxy servers..................... ................ ..........142 Edit registration servers............................... ...........143 Net call settings.......... ................................. .............143 Configuration settings.............................................143 Restrict packet data.......................................... .......143 Application settings...... ..............................................144 Shortcuts.................................... ..............145 General shortcuts........................................................ 145 Glossary.......................... ..........................147 No ki a o ri g in al en ha nc e me nts .................15 1 Battery......... ................ ................ ...................... ...........151 Trou ble shoo ti ng... ......... ........ ......... ....... ..152 Battery and charger infor mation.............155 Batt ery and cha rger inf orm ati on...... .......... ......... .....1 55 Nok ia ba tte ry au the nti cati on gu idel in es................ .156 Authenticate hologram.................... .............. .........156 What if your battery is no t authentic?...................157 Care and main tena nce... .................. ........1 58 Addi tio nal s af ety i nfo rmat ion ............. ....159 Small children... ....................... .............................. ......159 Operating environment... ..................... ......................159 Medical devices................. ..................... ................ .....159 Implanted medical devices................ ........... ......... .159 Hearing aids........ .......................... ...................... ......160 Vehicles........................................................................160 Pote nti all y ex plo sive env iron men ts.........................1 61 Emergency calls.......................... .................................161 CERT IFICA TION INFO RMATIO N (S AR)... ................ ........1 62 MANU FAC TURE RâÂÂS LIM ITED WARR ANT Y......1 63 Warranty period........ ................................ ..................163 How to get wa rra nty serv ice.. ......... .......... ......... .......1 64 What is not covered?..................................................164 Other important notices.......... ......................... ..........165 Limi tat ion of No kia 's li ab ilit y..... .......... .............. ....... 166 Statutory obligations ..................... ........................ .....166 Index........................................................168 Contents
Safety Read these simple guidelines. Not following them may be dangerous or illegal. Re ad the complete user guide for further information. SWITCH ON SAFELY Do not switch the device on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. INTERFERENCE All wireless devices may be suscepti ble to interference, which could affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN R ESTRICTED AREAS Follow any restrictions. Switch the device off in aircraft, near medical equipment, fuel, chemicals, or blasting area s. QUALIFIED SERVICE Only qualified personnel may install or repair this product. ENHANCEMENTS AND BATTERIES Use only approved enhancements and batteries. Do not conn ect incompatible products. WATER-RESISTAN CE Your device is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. About your device The wireless device described in this guide is approved for use on the (E)GSM 850, 900, 1800, and 1900 networks, and UMTS 900/2100 HSDPA networks. Contact your service provider for more information about netw orks. When using the features in this device, obey all laws and respect local customs, privacy and legitimate rights of others, including copyrights. Copyright protection may pr event some images, music, and other content from being copied, modified, or transferred. Your device supports severa l methods of connectivity. Like computers, your device may be exposed to viruses and other harmful content. Exercise caution with messages, con nectivity reques ts, browsing, and downloads. Only install an d use services and other software from trustworthy sources that offer adequate security and protection against harmfu l software, such 10 Safety
as applications that are Symb ian Signed or have passed the Java Verified⢠testing. Co nsider installing antivirus and other security software on your device and any connected computer. Your device may have preinstalled bookmarks and links for third-party inte rnet sites. Yo u may also acce ss other third-party sites throu gh your device. Third-part y sites are not affiliated with Nokia, and Nokia does not endorse or assume liability for them. If you choose to access such sites, y ou should take precau tions for security or content. Warning: To use any features in this device, other than the alarm c lock, the device m ust be switched on. Do not switch the device on when wireless device use may cause interference or danger. The office applications support common features of Microsoft Word, PowerPoint, and Excel (Microsoft Office 2000, XP, and 2003). Not all file formats can be vi ewed or modified. Remember to make ba ck-up copies or keep a wr itten record of all important information stored in your device. When connecting to any other device, read its user guide for detailed safety in structions. Do not connect incompatible products. The images in this guide may differ from your device display. Network services To use the device you must have service from a wireless service provider. Many of the features require special network features. These features are not available on all networks; other networks may require that you make specific arrangements with your service provider before you can use the network services . Using network services involves tr ansmission of data. Check with your service provider for details about fees in your home network and wh en ro aming on other networks. Your service provider can give you instructions and explain what charges will a pply. Some networks ma y have limitations tha t affect how you ca n use network services. For instance, some networks ma y not support all language-d ependent charact ers and servic es. Your service provider may have request ed that certain features be disabled or not activated in your device. If so, these features will not appear on your device menu. Your device may also have a s pecial configurati on such as changes in menu names, menu order, and icons. Contact your service provider for more information. This device supports WAP 2.0 protocols (HTTP and SSL) that run on TCP/IP protocols. Some features of this device, such as e-mail, browsing, and multimedia messaging (MMS), require network support for these technologies. 11 Safety
Battery removing Always switch the device off and disconnect the charger before removing the battery. 12 Safety
E66 in brief Model number: Nokia E66-1 (RM-343). Hereinafter referred to as Nokia E66. Key features Your new Eseries dev ice helps you manage your business and personal inform ation in and out of office. Some of the key features are highlighted here: Switch from business to personal mode. Browse the internet, find blogs and receive news feeds with Web . Listen to mu sic with Musi c player . Get podcasts to your device with Po dcastin g . Add new applications to your device with Downloa d! Find points of interest with Maps . Access your e-mail while on the move. Stay up-to-date and plan your meeti ngs with Calendar . Manage your busine ss partners and free ti me friends with the new Co ntacts application. Make calls using voice over IP services with Internet tel . . Connect to WLAN with WLAN wiz. . View documents, spreadsheets, and presentations with Quickoffice . 13 E66 in brief
Keys and parts 1 â Power key 2 â Earpiece 3 â Light sen sor 4 â Selection key. Press the selection key to perform the function shown abov e it on the display. 5 â Call key 6 â Press the key for a few secon ds to switch on Bluetooth connectivity. When writ ing text, press the key and select More symbols to access special characters. 7 â Microphone 8 â Camera (video calls only) 9 â Navi⢠scroll key, hereafter ref erred to as the scroll key. Press the scroll key to enter a selection, to scroll left, right, up, and down on the display. A long press left, right, up, or down accelerates the scrolling. 10 â End key. Press the end key to reject a call, end active calls and held calls, and with a long keypress, end data connections. 11 â Backspace key. Press the key to delete items. 12 â Shift key. When writing text, press and hold the key and select the text with the scroll key . Press this key for a few seconds to toggle between the Silent a nd General profiles. 13 â Charger connector 14 E66 in brief
1 â Volume up key 2 â Voice key. Press the voice key to mute and unmute the active call. This key is also used in the Voice commands and Push to talk applications. 3 â Volume down key 4 â Capture key 5 â Release button 6 â Headset connector 7 â Micro-USB port 8 â Infrared port 1 â Home key 2 â Contacts key 3 â Calendar key 4 â E-mail key Key moves Your device rotates the display automatica lly when you move it and responds to tapping and turning. Scroll key lights notify you of even ts, and the slide enables answering and ending calls and lock ing the keypad. Automatic display rotation In all applications, the s creen rotates automa tically from portrait to landscape when you turn the de vice to the left. For example, if yo u are browsing the web and turn the device to t he left, the image rota tes accordingly and changes to full scre en. To display the control and status p anes, press e ither select ion key. The image changes to full screen in RealPlayer, browser, and image viewer. To turn off t he automati c display ro tation or changing to full screen, select Menu > To ols > Settings > General > Personalisation > Display > Disp lay rotation or Turn to full view . Silence the device To set calendar and clock alarms t o snooze and to silence incoming calls, turn the device face down. You can also silence the device by ta pping it twice. T o turn on silencing by tapping, select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Person alisation > Tones > Tap to silence > On . 15 E66 in brief
To turn off silencing by tapping or turning, select Menu > To ols > Settings > General > Personalisation > Tones > Tap to silenc e or Turn to silence . Scroll key lights When you receive a message or miss a call, the scroll key starts b linki ng to indi cate the event. When the display light turns off, th e scroll key starts blinking slowly. To set the leng th of time for blinking for mis sed events or to select of which events you want to be notified, select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > Notification light . To turn off slow blinking, select Menu > Tools > Profiles and a profile. Select Personal ise > Breathi ng li ght . Slide function When the device or keypad is locked, calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. To open or close the full-size keypad, push the slide up or down . To lock the keypad, close the slide. To unlock the keypad, open the slide. Tip: To unlock the keypad without opening the slide, press the left and then the right selection key. To answer a call, open the slide. To end the call, close the slide, un less you have a headset connected to the device, or you select Options before closing the keypad. To change the slide settings, select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Slide handli ng . The keypad of your device locks automatically to prevent the keys from bein g accidentally pressed. To change the period after which the keypad is locked, select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Security > Phone and SIM card > Keypad autol ock period . 16 E66 in brief
Set up your device Set up your E66 followi ng these instructions. Insert the SIM card and battery 1. With the back of the device facing you, press the release buttons (1) and slide the back cover off (2). 2. If the battery is inserted , lift the battery in the direction of the arrow to remove it. 3. Insert the SIM card. Make sure that the contact area on the card is facing th e connectors on the device and that the bevelled corner is facing the top of the devic e. 4. Insert the battery. Align the conta cts of the battery with the corresponding connectors on the battery compartment and insert in the direction of the arrow. 17 Set up your device
5. Slide the back cover back to place. Charge the battery 1. Connect a compatible charger to a wall outlet. 2. Connect the power cord to the device. If the battery is completely discharged, it may take a while before the charging indicator starts scrolling. 3. When the battery is fully charged, disconnect the charger from the device, th en from the wall outlet. Your battery has been precharged at the factory, but the charging levels may vary. To reach the full operation time, charge th e battery until it has been fully charged according to the battery level indicator. Tip: If you have old compatible Nokia chargers, you can use them with the Nokia E66 by attaching the CA-4 4 charger adapter to the old charger. The adapter is av ailable as a separate enhancement. Insert the memory card Use a memory card to sav e the memory on your device. You can also back up information from your device to the memory card. Memory card may already be inserted in your device. Memory cards are also availa ble as separate enhancements. 1. With the back of the device facing you, press the release buttons (1) a nd slid e the back cover off (2). 18 Set up your device
2. Insert the memory card in the slot with the contact area first. Make sure that the contact area is facing the connectors on the device. 3. Push the card in until it locks into place. 4. Close the back cover. Eject the memory card Important: Do not remove the memo ry card in the middle of an operation when the card is being accessed. Removing the card in the middle of an operation may damage the memory card a s well as the device, and data stored on the card may be corrupted. 1. Press the power key briefly, and select Remove memory card . 2. Press the release buttons and slide off the back cover. 3. Press the end of the memory c a r d t o r e l e a s e i t f r o m the memory card slot. 4. Close the back cover. Connect the headset Warning: When you use the heads et, your ability to hear outside sounds may be a ffected. Do not use th e headset where it can endanger your safety. Connect the comp atible headset to the headset connector of your device. Attach the wrist strap Thread the wrist stra p as shown, an d tighten it. 19 Set up your device
Antennas Your device may have intern al an d external antenn as. As with any radio transmi tting device, avoid touching the antenna area unnecessa rily while the antenna is transmitting or receiving. Contact with such an antenna affect s the commun ication quality and may cause the device to operate at a higher power level than otherwise needed an d may reduce the battery life. 20 Set up your device
Get started After you have set up your device, switch it on and start to explore what is new in Eseries. First start-up 1. Press and hold the power key . 2. If the device asks for a PIN code or lock code, enter the code, and select OK . 3. When prompted, enter the country in which you are located and t he current date and time. To find you r country, enter the first letters of the country name. It is important to select the correct country, because scheduled calendar entries may change if you change the cou ntry later and the new country is located on a different time zone. The Welcome application opens. 4. Select from the various options, or Exit to close the application. To configure the various settings in your device, use the wizards available on th e home screen and in the Settings wizard application. When you swi tch the device on, it may recognise the SIM card provider and configure some settings automatically. You can also contact your service provider for the correct settings. You can switch the device on without inserting the SIM card. The device star ts up in the offline mode, and yo u cannot use the network-dependent p hone functions. To switch the device off, press and hold the power key. Welcome When you switch on your device for the first time, the Welcome application opens. Select from the following: ⢠Tutorial provides information about your device and shows you ho w to use it. ⢠Switch enables you to transfer content, such as contacts a nd calendar entries, from a com patible Nokia device. See "Transfer content between device s" , p. 24 . ⢠E-mail settings helps you configure e-mail settings. ⢠Sett. wizard helps you configure various settings. See "Settings wizard" , p. 22 . 21 Get started
⢠Operator contains a link to your operator's home portal. To open the Welcome application later, select Menu > Help > Welcome . The available items may vary between regions. Settings wizard Select Menu > Tools > Sett. wizard . Settings wizard configures your device for settings based on your network operator information. To use these services, you may have to cont act your service provider to activate a data connection or other services. The availability of t he di fferent settings items in Settings wizard depends on th e features of the device, SIM card, wireless service provider, and the availability of the data in t he Sett ings wizard database. If Settings wizard is not av ailable from your service provider, it may not appear in the menu of your device. To start the wizard, s elect Start . When you use the wizard for the first time, you are g uided through the settings configuration. If there is no SIM card inserted, you need to select the home country of your service provider, and your service provider. If the country or service provider suggested by the wizard is not correct, select the correct one from the list. If the settings configuration is interrupt ed, the settings are not defined. To access the main view of the Settings wizard after the wizard has finished the se ttings configuration, select OK . In the main view, select Options and from the following: ⢠Operator â Configure operator-specific settings such as MMS, internet, WAP, and stream ing settings. ⢠E-mail setup â Configure e-mail sett ings. ⢠Push to talk â Co nfigure push- t o-talk settings. ⢠Video sharing â Configure video sharing setti ngs. If you are not able to use Setting s wizard, visit the Nokia phone settings web site. Home screen From the home screen you can quickly access features that you use the most, and see at a glance any missed calls or new messages. 22 Get started
You can define two s eparate home screens for different purposes, such as on e screen to show your busin ess e- mail and notification s, and another to sh ow your personal e-mail. This way, you do not have to see business-related messages outside office hours. Menu Select Menu . The menu is a starting point from which you can open all applications in the device or on a memory card. The menu cont ains applications and folders, which are groups of similar applications. All applications you install in the device yourself are by default saved in the Installations folder. To open an application, scroll to it, and press t he scroll key. To view the applications in a list, select Options > Change Menu view > List . To return to the grid view, select Options > Change Menu view > Grid . To view the memory consumption of different applications and data stored on the device or memory card and to check the amount of free memory, select Options > Memory details . To create a new folder, select Options > New folder . To rename a new folder, select Options > Rename . To rearrange the folder, scroll to the application you want to move, and s elect Options > Move . A check mark is placed beside the application. Scroll to a new location, and select OK . To move an application to a different folder, scroll to the applicati on you want to move, an d select Options > Move to folder , the new folder, and OK . To download applications from the web, select Options > Download applications . Transfer content from other devices Select Menu > Tools > Switch . You can transfer content, such as contacts, from a compatible Nokia device t o your new Eseries device using different connectivity methods. The typ e of content that can be tran sf erred depends on the device model. If the other device supports synchronisation, you can also s ynchronise data between the two devices or send data from this device to the other device. When you transfer data from your previous device, it may require you to insert the SIM card. Your new Eseries 23 Get started
device does not need a SI M c ard when transferring data. Content is copied from the memory of the other device to the corresponding location in your device. Copying time depends on the amount of data to be transferred. You can also cancel and continue later. The necessary step s for data transfer may v ary depending on your device, and whether you h ave interrupted data transfer ea rlier. The items that you can transfer vary depending on the other device. Transfer content between devices To connect the two devices, follow the instructions on the display. For some de vice models, the Switch application is sent to the ot her device as a messag e. To install Switch on the othe r device, open the message, and follow the instructions on the display. On your new Eseries device, select the content you want to copy from the other device. After the da ta transfer , you can sav e the short cut with the transfer settings to the ma in view to repeat the same transfer later. To edit the shortcu t, select Options > Shortcut settings . View transfer log A transfer log is shown after every tran sfer. To view the transfer details, scroll to the tran sferred item in the log, and select Options > Details . To view the log of a previous transfer, scroll to a transfer shortcut, i f availa ble, in the main view, and select Options > View log . Any unresolved transfer conflicts are also displayed in the log view. To start so lving conflicts, select Options > Solve conflicts . Synchronise, retrieve, and send data If you have previously transferred data to you r device with the Switch application, select from the following icons in the Switch main view: Synchronise data with a compatible device if the other device supports synchronisation. With synchronisation, you can keep the data up-to-date in both devic es. Retrieve data from the other device to your new Eseries device. Send data from your new Eseries device to your other dev ice. 24 Get started
Common actions in several applications You can find the following actions in several applications: To change the profile, or switch off or lock the device, press the power key briefly. If an application consists of several tabs (see figure), open a tab by s crolling right or left. To save the settings tha t you have configu red in an application, select Back . To save a file, select Options > Save . There are different saving options depending on the application you use. To send a file, select Options > Send . You can send a file in an e-mail or multimedia message, or us ing different connectivity methods. To copy, press and hold the shi ft key, and select the text with the scroll key. Press and hold the shift key, and select Copy . To paste, scroll to where you want to paste the text, press and hold the shift key, and select Paste . This method may not wo rk in applications that have their own c opy and paste commands . To select different items, such as message s, files, or contacts, scroll to the item you want to select. Select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark to select one item or Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark all to select all items. Tip: To select al most a ll items, first select Option s > Mark/Unmark > Mark all , then select the items you do not want, and Options > Mark/Unmark > Unmark . To select an object (for example, an attachment in a document) scroll to the object so that square markers appear on each side of the object. Display indicators The device is being us ed in a UMTS network (network service). The battery charge level. The higher the bar, the stronger the char ge in the battery. You have one or more unread messages in the Inbox folder in Messaging. You have received new e-mail in the remote mailbox. 25 Get started
There are messages waiting to be sent in the Outbox folder in Messaging. You have one or more missed phone calls. The keys of the device are locked. An alarm is act ive. You have selected the Si lent profile, and the device does not ring for an incoming call or message. Bluetooth is active. Data is being transm itted using Bluetooth connectivity. When the indica tor is blinking, your device is trying to connect w ith another device. An infrared connection is active. If the indicator blinks, your device is trying to connect to t he other device, or the connection has been lost. A GPRS packet data co nnection is available (network service). If the icon is , the connection is active. If the icon is , the connection is on hold. An EGPRS packet data connection is available (network service). If the icon is , the connection is active. If the icon is , the connection is on hold. A UMTS packet data connection is available (network service). If the icon is , the connection is active. If the icon is , the connection is on hold. High-speed downlink packet access (HSDPA) is supported and available (network service). The icon may vary between re gions. If the icon is , the connection is active. If the icon is , the connection is on hold. You have set the device to scan for WLANs, and a WLAN is available. A WLAN connection is active in a network th at does not have encryption. A WLAN connection is active in a network th at has encryption. Your device is connected to a computer with a USB data cable. The second phone line is being used (network service). 26 Get started
All calls are forwarded to another number. If you have two phone lines, a number indicates the active line. A headset is connected to the device . The connection to a headset with B luetooth connectivity has been lost. A hands-free car kit is connected to the device. A loopset is connected to the device. A text phone is connected to the device. Your device is synchronising. You have an ongoing pu sh-t o-talk connection. Your push-to-talk connection is in the do not disturb mode, because the ringing type setting of your device is set to Beep once or Silent , or you have an incoming or ongoing phone call. In this mo de, you canno t make PTT calls. Volume control To adjust the earpiece vo lume during a phone call or the volume of th e media ap plications, use the volume keys. Memory There are two types of memo ry into wh ich you can sav e data or install applica t ions: device memory and memory card. Free memory To see how much memory is currently in use, how much free memor y remains, and how much mem ory is consumed by each data type, select Menu > Options > Memory details > Phone memo ry or Memory card . Tip: To ensure that you have adequate memory, transfer data regularly to a memory card or computer, or use File manager to delete files you no longer need. After you install app lications to a compatible memory card, installation files (.sis, .sisx) remain in the device memory. The files may use large amounts of memory and prevent you from storin g other files. To maintain sufficient memory, use Nokia PC Suite to back up installation files to a comp atible PC, then use the file manager to rem ove the inst allation files from the 27 Get started
device memory. If the .sis file is a message attach ment, delete the message from the Messag ing inbox. Memory card Select Menu > Tools > Memory . If you cannot use a memory card in your device, you may have the wrong type of memory card, the card may not be formatted for your device, or the card has a corrupted file system. Your Nokia device supports the FAT16 and FAT32 file system for memory cards. MicroSDHC This device uses microSD and microSDH C memory cards. To ensure interope rability, use only compatible memory cards with this device. Check the compatibility of a memory card with its manufacturer or provider. Other memory cards than microSD and microSDHC cards are not compatible with this device. Using an incompatible memory card may damage the memory card as well a s the device, and data stored on the incompati ble card may be corrupted. Use a memory card To format a memory card for your device, select Options > Format memory card . When a memory card is formatted, all d ata on the card is lost permanently. Consult your retailer to find out if you must format the memory card before you can use it. To change the name of the memory card, select Options > Memory card name . Write text The input methods provided in the device may vary according to different sales markets. Traditional text input is shown on the top right of the display when you are writing text using traditional text input. and indicate the selected case. indicates that the first letter of the sen tence is written in uppercase and all the other letters are autom atically written in lowercase. indicates the number mode. To write text with the keypad, press a number key 2-9 repeatedly until the desired character appears. There are more characters available for a number key than are printed on the key. If the next letter is located on the same key as the pr esent one, wait until the cursor appears, and enter the letter. To insert a number, press and hold the number key. To switch between the uppe r and lower case mode and the number mode, press # . To erase a character, pres s the backspace key. Press and hold the backspace key to erase more than one character. 28 Get started
To access the most common pu nctuation marks , press the 1 key. Press 1 repeatedly to reach the desired punctuation mark. To add special char acters, press * . Scroll to the desired character and press the scroll key. To insert a space, press 0 . To move the cu rsor to the next line, press 0 three times . To switch between the differe nt character cases, press # . Predictive text input 1. To activate predictive text in put, press # twice quickly. This activates predictive te xt input for all editors in the device. The indicator is shown on the display. 2. To write the desired word, press 2-9 . Press each key only once for one letter. 3. When you have finished writing the word and it is correct, scroll right to confirm it, or press 0 to add a space. If the word is not correct, press * repeatedly to view the matching words the dictiona ry has found. If the ? character i s shown after the word, the word you intended to write is not in the dictionary. To add a word to the di ctionary, select Sp ell , enter the word (up to 32 letters) using tra ditional text input, and select OK . The word is added to the dictionary. When the dictionary is fu ll, the new word replaces the oldest added word. Write the first half of a compound word; to confirm it, scroll right. Write the la st part of th e compound w ord. To complete the compound word, press 0 to ad d a space. To switch predictive text input off for all e ditors in the device, press # twice quickly. Change the writing language When you are writing t ext, you can change th e writing language. For example , if you press the 6 key repeatedly to reach a specific character, ch anging the writing language gives you access to charac ters in a different order. If you are writing text usin g a non-Latin alp habet and want to wri te Latin charac ters, for example e-mail or web addresses, you may need to ch ange the writing language. To change th e writing language , select Options > Writing language , a nd a writing language that u ses Latin chara cters. Further information Instructions in yo ur device To read instructions for th e current view of the open application , select Options > Help . To browse the help topics an d conduct searches, s elect Menu > Help > Help . You can select categories for 29 Get started
which you want to see instru ct ions. Sel ect a categ ory, such as Messaging, to see what ins tructions (hel p topics) are available. Whil e you are reading the topic, scroll left or right to s ee the other topics in that category . To switch between the application and help, press and hold the home key. Tutorial The tutorial provides you information about your device an d shows yo u how to use it. Sele ct Menu > Help > Tutorial . 30 Get started
New from Eseries Your new Eseries device contains new versions of the Calendar and Contac ts applications, as well as a new home screen. Access tasks quickly Whenever you see the icon on the home screen, or in the Contacts or Calendar applications, scroll right to access a list of available actions. To close the list, scroll left. When you navigate in thes e applications, to go back to the previous level, scroll left. Home screen From the home screen you can quickly access featur es that you use the most, and s ee at a glance any missed calls or new messages. Navigate in the home screen To access the home screen, press the home key briefly. The home screen consists of: ⢠application shortcuts (1) To access an application quickly, scroll to its shortcut and press the scroll key. ⢠information area (2) To check an item displayed in the information area, scroll to the item a nd press the scroll key. ⢠notifications (3 ) To view the notifications, scroll to a box. Each box is only visi ble if there are items in it. To hide the boxes, press the backspac e key. Work on the home screen To check your received messages, scroll to the message box in the notification area . To read a message, scroll 31 New from Eseries
to it and press the scroll ke y. To access other ta sks, scroll right. To view your missed calls , sc roll to the calls box in the notification area. To return a call, scroll to a call and press the call key. To send a text messag e to a caller, scroll to a call, scroll right and select Send text msg. from the list of available actions. To listen to your voice mail, sc roll to the voice mail box in the notification area. Scroll to the desired voice mailbox and press the call key to call it. Switch home screens You can define two home screen modes for different purpos es, such a s on e mod e to show your bu siness e- mail and notifications, and another to show your personal e-mail. This way, you do not have to se e business-related mes sages outside office hours. Your operator may have set you a third home screen with operator-specific items. To change from one home screen mode to another, scroll to and press the scroll key. One-touch keys With the One-touch keys you can a ccess applications and tasks quickly. Each key has been assigned an application and a task. To change these, select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > One-touch keys . Your network operator may have assigned applications to the keys, in whi ch case you cannot cha nge them . 1 â Home key 2 â Contacts k ey 3 â Calendar key 4 â E-mail key Home key To access the home screen, pr ess the home key briefly. Press the home key briefly aga in to access the menu. To view the list of active applications, press the home key for a few seconds. When the list is open, press the home key briefly to scroll the list. T o open the selected application, press t he home key for a few seconds, or press the scroll key. To close the selected application, press the backspace key. Leaving applications runn ing in the backgr ound increases the demand on battery power and reduces the battery life. 32 New from Eseries
Contacts key To open the Contacts application, press the contacts key briefly. To create a new contact, press t he contacts key for a few seconds. Calendar key To open the Calendar appl ication, press the calendar key briefly. To create a new meeting entr y, press the calendar key for a few seconds. E-mail key To open your default m ail box, press the e-mail key briefly. To create a new e-mail message, press the e-mail key for a few seconds. Nokia Calendar for Eseries Select Menu > Office > Calendar . Create and view scheduled events and appointments, and switch between diffe rent calendar views. Calendar views You can switch between the following views: ⢠Month view shows the current month and the calendar entries of the selected day in a list. ⢠Week view shows the events for the selected week in seven day boxes. ⢠Day view shows the events for the selected day grouped into time slots according to their starting time. ⢠To-do view shows all to-do items. ⢠Agenda view shows the even ts for the selected day in a list. To change the view, select Options > Change view and the desired view. Tip: To open the week view, scroll to a week number and press the scroll key. Tip: To switch between views, press * . To move to the next or the previou s day in month, week, day, and agenda view s, scroll right or left. To change the default view, select Opti ons > Settings > Default view . 33 New from Eseries
View calendar information In the month view, calendar entries are marked with a triangle. Annivers ary entries are also marked with an exclamation mark. The entries of the selected day are shown in a li st. To open calendar entries, open a calendar view , scroll to an entry, and press the scroll key. Create calendar entries You can create the following types of calendar entries: ⢠Meeting entries remind you of events that have a specific date and time. ⢠Memo ent ries are related to the whole day but not to a specific time of the day. ⢠Anniversary entries remind you of birthdays and special dates. They refer to a ce rtain day but not a specific time of the day. Anniversary entries are repeated every year. ⢠To-do entries remind you of a task that has a due date but not a specif ic time of the day. To create a calendar entry, scroll to a date, select Options > New entry and the entry type. Tip: To create a meeting entry, start entering the subject. Create meeting, memo, anniversary, or to-do entries 1. Enter the subject. 2. For meeting entries, enter the start an d end times, or select All-day event . 3. For meeting and memo entries, enter the st art and end dates. For anniversar y entries, enter the date and for to-do entries, enter the due da te. 4. For meeting entries, enter the location. 5. For meeting, anniversary, and to-do entries, you can set an alarm. 6. For recurring meeting entries, set the recurrence time. 7. For to-do entries, set the priority. To se t the priority for meeting entries, select Options > Priority . 8. For memo, annivers ary, and to-do en tries, define how the entr y is handled during syn chronisation. Select Priva te to hide the entry from viewers if the calendar is available o nline, Public to make the entry visible to viewers, or None to not copy the entry to your computer. 9. Enter a description. To send the entry, select Options > Send . 34 New from Eseries
Calendar settings Select Options > Settings . To change the alarm tone, select Calendar alarm tone . To change the view disp la yed when you open the calendar, select Default view . To change the first da y of the week, select We ek starts on . To change the week view title, select Week view title and Week number or Week dates . Nokia Contacts for Eseries Select Menu > Communic. > Contacts . Save and update contact in formation, such as phone numbers, home a ddresses, or e-mail addres ses of your contacts. You can a dd a personal ringing tone or a thumbnail imag e to a contact. You can als o create contact groups, which allow you to commu nicate with several contacts at the same tim e, and send contact information (business cards) to or receive it from compatible devices. Whenever you see the icon, scroll right to access a list of available actions. To close the list, scroll left. Add contacts Select Options > New contact , and enter the contact's information. To copy a contact's information from the memory card, select Options > Copy > Fr om memor y card . Contact groups Select each contact you want to a dd to the contact group, press # to mark it, select Options > Grou p > Add to group > Cre ate new g roup > Group name , and enter a name for the g roup. If you want to make conference calls to the group, define also the following: ⢠Conf. service num ber â Enter the conference call service number. ⢠Conf. servi ce ID â Enter the conference call ID number. ⢠Conf. servi ce PIN â Enter the conference call PIN code numb er. To make a conference call to the group, select the group, scroll right, and select Call conf. service from the list of available action s. Search for contacts To search for contacts, start en tering the contact's name in the search field. 35 New from Eseries
To switch to the predictive search mode, select Options > Acti vate predict. se arch . To search for contacts in the predictive search mode, enter the beginning of the contact' s name in the search field. To move to the next hit with the same alphabetical combination of letters, press * . Manage contacts director ies If you have installed contacts directories, to change the contacts directory, scroll to the top of the names list, press the scroll key, and se lect from the list of available direct orie s. To organise contacts directories, select Options > Organise contact lists and a direc tory. Scroll up to move it to the desired place. Add ringing tones for contacts You can set a ringing tone for a contact or contact group. The ringing tone so unds when the contact calls you. To add a ringing tone for contacts , open a contact, select Options > Ringing tone and a ringing tone. To add a ringing tone for cont act groups, select a contact grou p, Options > Group > Ringing tone and a ringing tone. To remove the assigned ringing t one, sel ect Defa ult tone from the list of ringing tones. Change contacts settings Select Options > Settings . To change the way the cont acts' names are displayed, select Name display . To select which contacts directory opens when you open the Contacts app lication, select Default contact list . Multitasking You can have several ap pl ications open at the same time. To switch between ac ti ve applications, press and hold the home key, scroll to an applicat ion, and press the scroll key. To close the selected application, press the backspace key. Example: When you have an active phone call and want to check your ca lendar, press the home key to access the menu, and open the Calendar application. The phone call remains active in the background. Example: When you ar e writing a messag e and want to check a web site , press t he home key to access the m enu, and op en the Web application. Select a bookmark or enter the web address manually, and select Go to . To return to your 36 New from Eseries
message, pres s and hold the home key, scroll to the message and press the scroll key. 37 New from Eseries
Personalisation You can personalise your device by adjusting the various tones, backgrou nd images, and screen savers, for example. Profiles Select Menu > Tools > Profiles . You can adjust and customis e the ringing tones, alert tones, and other device tones for di fferent events, environments, or caller groups. The profile currently in use is shown at the top of the display on the home screen. However, if the active profile is General, only today's date is shown. To create a new profile, select Options > Create new , and defin e the settings. To customise a profile, select a profile and Options > Persona lise . To change a profile, select a profile and Options > Activate . The Offline profile prev ents your device from accidentally switching on , sending or receiving messages, or using wireless LA N, Bluetooth, GPS, or FM radio; it also closes any i nternet connection that may be in operation when the prof ile is selected. The Offline profile does not prevent you from establishing a wireless LAN or Bluetooth co nnection at a later time, or from re starting the GPS or FM radi o, so com ply wit h any applicable safety requiremen ts when establishing and using these features. To delete a profile that you created, select Opt ions > Delete profile . Yo u cannot delete the predefined profiles. Select ringing tone s To set a ringing tone for a profile, select Optio ns > Personalis e > Ringing ton e . Select a ringing tone from the list, or select Download sounds to open a bookmark folder containing a list of bookmarks for downloading tones using th e browser. Any downloaded tones are saved to Gallery. To play the ringing ton e fo r a select ed conta ct group only, select Option s > Personal ise > Alert for , and select the desired group. Phone calls coming from outside that group ha ve a silent alert. To change the message tone, select Options > Personalis e > Message alert tone . 38 Personalisation
Customise profiles Select Options > Personalise , and define the following: ⢠Ringing tone â Select a ringing tone from the list, or sel ect Download sounds to open a bookmark folder containing a list of bookmarks for downloading tones using the browser. If you have two alternate phone lines in use, you can specify a ringing ton e for ea ch line . ⢠Video call tone â Select a r inging tone for video calls. ⢠Say caller's name â When you select this option and someone from your cont acts list calls you, the device so unds a rin ging tone that is a combi nation of the spoken name of th e contact and the selected ringing tone. ⢠Ringing type â Select how you want the ringing tone to alert. ⢠Ringing volume â Select the volume level of the ringing tone. ⢠Message alert tone â Select a tone for received text messages. ⢠E-mail alert tone â Select a tone for received e- mail messages. ⢠Vibrating alert â Select whether you want the device to vibrate when you receive a call. ⢠Breathi ng li ght â Select whether you want the scroll key to start blinking slowly when the display light turns off. ⢠Keypad to nes â Set the volume level of the device keypad t ones. ⢠Warning tones â Set the warning tones on or off. This setting also affe cts the tones of some games and Java appl ications. ⢠Alert for â You can set the dev ice to ring only upon calls from phone numbers th at belong to a selected contact group. Phone calls coming from outside that group have a s ilent alert. ⢠Profile name â You ca n give a name to a new profile or rename an existing profile. The General and Offline profiles cannot be renamed. Personalise the home screen Select Menu > Tools > Modes . T o c h a n g e t h e n a m e o f t h e current home screen, select Mode name . To select which applicat ions and notifications you want to see on the home screen, select Home screen applicatio ns . To change the theme of th e home screen currently in use, select Theme . To change the background image of the home screen currently in use, select Wallpaper . To change from one home screen to another, select Switch mode . 39 Personalisation
Change the display theme Select Menu > Tools > Themes . To change the theme used in all applications, select the General folder. To change the theme used in the main menu, select the Menu view folder. To change the theme for a particular application, select the application-specific folder. To change the background image of the home screen, select the Wallpaper folder. To select an anim ation for th e screen saver, select the Power saver folder. Download a theme To download a theme, select General or Menu view > Download them es . Enter the link from which you want to download your theme. Once the theme is downloaded, you can preview, activate, or edit it. To preview a theme, select Options > Pre view . To start using the selected theme, select Options > Set . 3-D ringing tones Select Menu > Media > 3-D tones . To enable three-dimensional sound effects for ringing tones, select 3-D ring ing tone effects > On . No t all ringing tone s support 3âÂÂD effect s. To change the 3âÂÂD effect that is applied to the ringing tone, select Sound trajectory and the desired effect. To modify the 3âÂÂD effect, select from the following: ⢠Trajectory speed â Select the speed at which sound moves from one dire ction to another. This setting is not availa ble for all effects. ⢠Reverberatio n â To adjust the amount of echo, select the desired effect. ⢠Doppler effe ct â Select On to have the ringin g tone sound higher when you are closer to your device, and lower when yo u are farther away. This setting is not availa ble for all effects. To listen to the ringing tone with the 3âÂÂD effect, select Options > Play tone . To adjust the volume of the ringing tone, select Menu > Tools > Profil es > Op tions > Personalis e > Ringing v olume . 40 Personalisation
Media Your device contains a variety of media applicat ions for both business and leisure time use. For more information, see th e extended user guide on the web. Camera Select Menu > Media > Camera . Capture an image Your device supp orts an image capture resolution of up to 2048 x 1536 pixels. The image resolution in this guide may appear different. To capture an image, use the display as a viewfinder and press the scroll key. Th e device saves the image in Gallery. To zoom in or out before capturing an image, scroll up or down. This function is available only when the toolbar is not shown. The toolbar provides you with shortcuts to different items and settings before and after capturing an imag e or recording a video. Scroll to a toolbar item and press the scroll key. Switch between the video mode and the image mode. Select the scene. Select the flash mode (images only). Activate the self-timer (images only). Activate the sequen ce mode (ima ges only). Select a colour effect. Show or hide the viewfinder grid (images only). Adjust the white balance. Adjust the exposure compensation (images only). The available options vary depending on the capture mode and view you are in. The settings return to the default after you close the camera. Scenes A scene helps you to find the right colour and lighting settings for the current en vironment. The se ttings of 41 Media
each scene have been set a ccording to a certain style or environment. To change the scene, select Scene modes in t he toolbar. To make your own scene, scroll to User defined , and select Options > Change . To copy the settings of another scene, select Based on scene mod e and the desired scene. To activate your own scene, scroll to User define d , press the scroll key, and select Select . Capture images in a sequence To capture several images in a sequence, if enough memory is available, select Sequence mode in the toolbar and press the scroll key. The captured images are show n in a grid on the display. To view an image, scroll to it and press the scroll key. If you used a time int erval, only the last i mage is show n on the display, and the other images are av ailable in Gallery. To send the image, select Options > Send . To send the image to a caller during an active ca ll, select Options > Send to caller . To switch off the se quence mode, select Sequence mode > Single shot in the toolbar. View captured image The image you captured is au tomatically saved in Gallery. If you do not want to keep the image, select Delete from the toolbar. Select from the following toolbar items: ⢠Send â Send the imag e to compatible devices. ⢠Send to caller â Send the im age to the caller during an active call. ⢠Post to â Send the image to your comp atible online album (network service). To use the image as the background image, select Options > Set as wallpaper . To add the image t o a contac t, select Options > Set as contact call img. > Assign to contact . Record videos 1. If the camera is in the image mode, s elect the video mode from the toolbar. 2. To start recording, press the scroll key. 3. To pause recording at any time, select Pause . Select Continue to resume recording. 4. To stop recording, select Stop . The video clip is automatically saved in Gallery . The maximum length of the video clip depends on the available memory. 42 Media
Play a video clip To play a recorded video clip, select Play from the toolbar. Select from the following toolbar items: ⢠Send â Send the video clip to other compatible device s. ⢠Send to caller â Send the video clip to the caller during an active call. ⢠Post to â S end the video to an online album (network service). ⢠Delete â Delete the clip. To enter a new name for the clip, select Options > Rename video . Image setting s To change the still i mage settings, select Options > Settings and from the following: ⢠Image quality â S et the image quality. The better the image quality, the more memory the image consume s. ⢠Show captured image â To see the image a fter the capture, select On . To continue taking pictures immediately, select Off . ⢠Default i mage nam e â Define the default name for the captured images. ⢠Extended digital zoom â On (continuous) allows the zoom increm ents to be smoot h and continuous betw een th e digital and extended digital zoom, and Off allows a limited amount of zoom while retaining the image resolution. ⢠Capture tone â S e t t h e t o n e t h a t s o u n d s w h e n y o u capture an image. ⢠Memory in use â Choose where to store your images. ⢠Rotate image â Rotate th e images. ⢠Restore camera sett ings â To return the default values to the camera settings, se lect Yes . Video settings To change the video mode setting s, select Opt ions > Settings and from the following: ⢠Video quality â Set the quality of the video clip. Select Sharing , if you want to send the video clip using a multimedia message. The clip is recorded with CIF resolution, in 3GPP format, and the size is limited to 300 kB (approximately 20 seconds). You may not be able to send video clips saved in t he MPEG-4 file format in a multimedia message. ⢠Audio recording â S e l e c t Mute if you do not want to record sound. ⢠Show captured video â View the first frame of the recorded video clip after the recording stops. To view the entire video clip , select Play from the toolbar. ⢠Default video name â Define the default name for recorded video clips. ⢠Memory in use â Select where you want to store your video clips. 43 Media Q
⢠Restore camera settings â Restore the camera settings to the default values. Nokia Podcasting Select Menu > Media > Podcas ting . Download podcasts to your device and listen th em. Play and manage podcasts Podcasting delivers audio or video content over the internet for playback on mobile devices and PCs. With the Nokia Podcasting app lication, you can search, discover, subscribe, and do wnload podcasts over the air; and play, manage, and share podcast s with your devic e. Define the connection and downloading settings before using the applicati on. Select Options > Settings > Connection and Download . To search for new podcast episodes to subscrib e to, select Directories . To search for podcasts us ing keywords and podcast show titles, select Search . To display the available ep isodes from the selected podcast, open the Podcasts folder and select Open . To download the selected episode, select Do wnload . To play the downloaded episode, select Play . To update the selected podcast or marked podcas ts, for a new episode, select Opti ons > Update . To open the web site of th e podcast (network service), select Options > Open web pag e . Some podcasts provide th e opportunity to interact with the creators by commenting and voting. To connect to the internet to do this, s elect Options > View comments . Directories Select Directories . Directories help you find new podcast episodes to which to subscribe. Contents of the directories change. Se lect the desired directory folder to update it (network service). The colour of the folder changes, when the update is complete . To subscribe to a podcast, scroll t o the podcast title and select Update . After you have subscribed to episodes of a podcast, you can download, manage , and play them in the podcasts menu. To add a new directory or folder, select Options > New > We b directory or Folder . Select a title, URL of the .opml (outline processo r markup language) file, and Done . To import an .opml file stored on your device, select Options > Import OPML file . 44 Media
To save a received .opml file , open the file to save the file into the Received folder in Directories. Open the folder to subscribe to any of the links to add t o your podcast s. Search podcasts Search helps you find podcasts by keyword or title. The search engine uses the podcast search service you set up in Podcasting > Options > Settings > Connection > Search service URL . To search for podcasts, select Search , and enter the desired keywords. Tip: Search looks for podca st titles and keywords in descriptions, not specific episodes. General topics, such as foot ball or hip-hop, us ually give better results than a spec ific team or artist. To subscribe to selected ch annels an d add them to your podcasts, select Subscribe . To start a new se arch, sele ct Optio ns > New search . To see the details of a podcast, s elect Options > Description . Podcasting settings To edit the connection settings, select Options > Settings > Connection . To edit the download settings, select Options > Settings > Download . To restore the default settings, open the corresponding settings and s elect Options > Restore default . Music player Warning: Listen to music at a moderate level. Continuous exposure to high volume may damage your hearing. Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may b e extremely loud. Select Menu > Media > Music player . Music player supports files formats such as AAC, AAC , eAAC , MP3, and WMA. Music player does no t necessarily support a ll features of a file format or all the variations of file formats. You can also use Music player to listen to podcast episodes. Podcasting is a me thod for delivering audio or video content over the internet using either RSS or Atom technologies for playback on mobile devices and PCs. You can transfer music from other compatible devices to your device. See "Transfer music from PC" , p. 46 . Play a song or a podcast episode To add all available songs and podcasts to the music library, select Options > Re fresh . 45 Media
To play a song or a podcast epis ode, select Music or Podcasts a nd the desired category, th en scroll to the song or podcast episode and press the scroll key. To pause playback, pres s th e scroll key; to resume, press the scroll key again. To st op playback, s croll down. To fast forward or rewind, press and hold the scroll key to the right or left. To go to the next item, scro ll right. To return to the beginning of the item, scroll left. To skip to the previous item, scroll left again within 2 sec onds after a song or podcast h as started . To modify the tone of the music playback, select Options > Equaliser . To modify the balance and st ereo image or to enhance bass, select Options > Audio settings . To return to the home sc reen and leave the player playing in the backgrou nd, press the end key. Playlists To view and manage playlists, select Music > Playlist s . To create a new playlist, select Options > Crea te playlist . To add songs to the playlist, sele ct the song and Options > Add to a playlist > Saved playli st or New playlist . To reorder songs in a playlist, scroll to the song you want to move, and select Options > Reorder list . Nokia Music Store Select Menu > Media > Musi c store . In the Nokia Music Store (n etwork service) you can search, browse, and p urchase music to download to your device. To purchase music, you need to register for the service. To check the Nokia Music St ore availa bility in your country, visit mus ic.nokia.com. To find more music in the different categories, select Options > Find in Music store . To select the access point to use with the Music Store, select Default acc. pt. . Transfer music from PC To transfer mu sic from your PC, connect you r device to the PC with a compatible USB data ca ble or Bluetooth connectivity. If you are using the US B cable, select Mass storage as the connection mo de. Make sure that a compatible memory card is inserted in the device. If you select Media transfer as the connection mode, you can use Windows Media Player t o synchronise music bet ween your device and PC. 46 Media
Transfer with Windows Media Player Music synchronisation functions may vary between different versions of the Windows Media Player application. For more information, see the corresponding Windows Media Player guides and help. The following inst ructions are for Windows Media Player 11. Manual synchr onisation With manual sy nchronisat ion, you can select the son gs and playlists that you want to move, copy, or remove. 1. After your device is connected with Windows M edia Player, selec t your dev ice in the nav igation pan e on the right, if more than one device is connected. 2. In the left navigation pa ne, browse the m usic files on your PC which you wa nt to synchronise. 3. Drag and drop songs to the Sync List on the right. You can see the amount of available memory in your device above the Sync List . 4. To remove songs or albums , select an item in the Sync List , right-click, and select Remove f rom list . 5. To start the synchronisation, click Start Sync . Automatic sync hronisation 1. To activate the au tomatic synchronisation fu nction in Windows Media Play er, click the Sync tab, select Nokia Handset > Set U p Sync... , and check the Sync thi s device automati cally check box. 2. Select the playlists you want to synchronise automatica lly in the Available playlists pane, and click Add . The selected items are transferred to the Playli sts to sync pane. 3. To finalise the setup for automatic synchronisa tion, click Finish . When the Sync this device automat ically check box is checked and you connect your device to the PC, the music library in your device is automatically updated based on the playlists you se lect for synchronisation in Windows Media Player. If no playlist s have been selected, the whole PC music library is selected for synchronisation. If there is not enough free memory in your device, Windows Media P layer sele cts manual synchronisation automatically. To stop automatic synchronisation, click the Sync tab, and select Stop Sync to 'Nokia Handset' . Preset frequency settings Select Menu > Media > Music player > Options > Go to Now playing > Options > Equaliser . To use a preset frequency setting when playing music, select the frequency sett ing you want to use, and select Options > Activate . To modify the frequency of a preset setting, select Options > Edit , select a frequency band, and scroll up or down to increase or decr ease its value. You hear your frequency adjustment immediat ely in the playback. 47 Media
To reset the frequency bands to their original values, select Options > Reset to defaults . To create your own frequency settin g, select Option s > New pres et . Enter a name for the frequency setting. Scroll up or down to move between the frequency bands and set the frequency on ea ch band. Share online Select Menu > Media > Share o nline . You can share images and video clips in compatible online albums, blogs, or in other compatible online sharing services on the web. You can upload cont ent, save unfinishe d posts as drafts and continue later, and view the content of the albums. The supported content types may vary depending on the service provider. To share files online, you must have an account with an online image sharing service. You can usually subscribe to such a service on the web page of your service provider. Contact your service provider for more information. Share images online To upload a file from Gallery to the online service, select Menu > Gallery , select the desired file and Option s > Send > Post t o web . Recorder Select Menu > Media > Recorder . With Recorder, you can record up to 60 minutes of a voice memo, save the voice recording as a sound clip, and play the sound clip . Recorder supports the A MR file format. You can also press the voice key to open the Recorder application. If you have logged in to push to talk, the voice key works as a push-to-talk key and does not open Recorder. Record a sound clip To record a sound clip, select Options > Record sound clip . Select Pause to pause the recording, and Record to resume recording. When you finish recording, select Stop . The sound clip is automatically saved to the Sound clips folder in Gallery. Play a recording To listen to the sound clip that you just recorded, select Play . The progress bar displays the playing time, position, and length of the clip. Select Stop to canc el the playback. To pause the playback of a r ecorded clip, select Pause . Playba ck resumes when you sele ct Play . 48 Media
Recorder settings Recordings are automatically saved to the device memory unless you chan ge the default loca tion. Recordings that you create or receive after you change the settings are affected. To change the default loca tion of saved recordings, select Options > Settings > Memory in use . To define the recording quality, select Options > Settings > Recording quality . If you select High , the sound clip you record is in waveform file format (.wav) and the maximum length for the clip is 60 minutes. If you select MMS compatible , the sound clip you record is in adaptive multirate fi le format (.amr), and the maximum length for the clip is one minute. Gallery Select Menu > Media > Gallery . Use Gallery to access and use different types of media, including images, videos, music, and sounds. All viewed images and videos, and all received music and sounds are automatically sav ed to Gallery. Sound clips are opened in the Music pl ayer, and video clips and streaming links in the Real Player applicati on. Images are opened in the image viewer. Work with media files and folders To open a file or a folder, sc roll to it, and press the scroll key. To create a new folder, select a file and then select Options > Organise > New folder . Yo u cannot create folders within folders. To copy or move files, select a file and Options > Organise > Move to folder , New folder , Move to memory card , Cop y to me mory ca rd , Co py to phone mem. , or Move to phon e mem. . To download files into Galle ry using the browser, select Downl. graphics , Downld. videos , Downld. tracks , or Downld. sounds . The browser opens, and you can choose a bookmark or enter the address for the download site. To search for a file, select Options > Find . Write the item you are searching for. Files that match the search are shown. View images To open an image fo r viewing, select Optio ns > Open . To open the next or previou s image for viewing, scroll right or left. 49 Media
To enlarge the image on the display, select Opti ons > Zoom in . To reduce the image on the display, se lect Zoom out . To view the image in full screen size, select Op tions > Full screen . To return to normal view, select Opti ons > Normal screen . To rotate the image, select Opt ions > Rotate . Select Right to rotate the image clockwise by 90 degrees, or select Left to rota te the image counterclockw ise by 90 degrees. Manage image files To view detailed information about the image, select Options > View details . To send the image, select Options > Send , and the method for sending. To rename the imag e, sel ect Options > Rename . To set the image as the display background, select Options > Use image > Set as wallpaper . To add the image to a contact, select Options > Use image > Assign to contact . The Contact s application opens, and you can select the conta ct for the image. RealPlayer Select Menu > Media > RealPlayer . RealPlayer plays v ideo clips and audio files that are stored in the device memory or on a memory card, transferred to your device from an e-mail message or a compatible computer, or streamed to your device over the web. Supported fo rmats include MPEG-4, MP4 (not stre aming), 3G P, RV, RA, AMR, and Midi. Rea lPlayer does not necessarily support all variations of a media file format. Play video clips and stream links Warning: Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To play a video clip or audio file, select Options > Open > Most recent clips to play one of the six clips you most recently played, or Saved clip to play a clip or open a web link. Select Play . To play streaming medi a, select a web link that points to a clip, and select Play ; or connect to the web, browse to a video clip or audio file, and select Play . RealPlayer recognises two kinds of links: an rtsp:// URL and an http:// URL that points to a RAM file. Before the content begins streaming, your device must connect to a web site and buffer the content. If a network conn ection problem causes a playback error, RealPlayer attempts automatica lly to reconnect to the intern et access poi nt. 50 Media
To adjust the volum e during p layback, use the volume keys. To fast-forward during play back, scroll up and hold. To rewind during play, scroll down and hold. To stop the playback or streaming, select Stop . Buffering or connecting to t he streaming site stop s, the playback of the clip stops, and the clip rewinds to the beginning. To download video clips from the web, select Options > Download videos . To view the video clip in full-screen size, select Options > Play in full screen . Full screen increases the size of the video to cover the maximum video area possible while the aspect rati o is maintaine d. Send audio files and video clips To transfer a media clip to a compatible device, select Options > Send . Select the sending method. To send a media clip insi de a message, creat e a multimedia messag e, select a cli p to attach and Insert object > Video clip or Sound clip . View information about a media clip To view the properties of a video clip, audio file, or web link, select Optio ns > Clip details . Information may include for example the bit ra te or the internet link of a streaming file. RealPlayer settings You may receive RealPlayer settings in a message from your service provider. To define the settin gs manually, select Opt ions > Settings > Video or Streaming . Flash player Select Menu > Media > Flash Player . With Flash player, you can view, play, an d interact with flash files made for mobile devices. Manage flash file s To optimise the use of Flash Player, insert a memory card in your device. 51 Media
To play a flash file, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To send a flash file to compatible devices, select Options > Send . Copyright protection may prevent the sending of some flash files. To switch between flash fi les saved on your device memory or memory card, scroll to the corresponding tabs. To change the flash fi le quality, select Options > Quality when you are playing the flash file. If you select High , the playback of some fla sh files may appe ar uneven and slow due to thei r original settings. Change the quality setti ng of such files to Normal or Low for improved playback. To organise your flash files, select Options > Organise . Radio Select Menu > Media > Radio . The quality of the radio broadcast depends on the coverage of the radio station in that particular area. The FM radio depends on an antenna other than th e wireless device ant enna. At tach a com patible headset or enhancement to the de vice for the FM radio to function prope rly. Listen to the r adio Warning: Listen to music at a moderat e level. C o n t i n u o u s e x p o s u r e t o h i g h v o l u m e m a y d a m a g e y o u r hearing. Do not hold the device near your ear w hen the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To search for a st ation, select or . To set t he frequency manually, select Options > Manual tuning . To view available st ations based on location, select Options > Station dire ctory (network service). To save the current station to your stat ion list, select Options > Save station . To select a previously saved radi o station, select or . To adjust the volume, use the volume keys. To switch from headset use to listening to the rad io through the loudspeaker, select Options > Activate loudsp eaker . To return to the home scr een and leave the FM radio playing in the background, select Options > Play in background . View visual content To check availability and costs, and to su bscribe to the service, contact your service provider. 52 Media
Before you can view visual co ntent, you m ust have an internet access point defined at Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Acce ss points . 1. To view available v isual content for a t uned station, select Options > Start visual service . If the visual radio service ID has n ot been saved for the station, enter it, or select Retrieve to search for it in the station directory (network service). 2. Select the location nea rest to you from the st ation d i r e c t o r y . I f y o u r d e v i c e f i n d s a s t a t i o n t h a t m a t c h e s the tuned frequency, its visual service ID is displayed. To view the visual cont ent, select OK . Saved stations To open the list of your saved sta tions, select Options > Stations . To listen to a saved station, select Optio ns > Station > Listen . To view available visu al content fo r a station with the Visual Radio service, select Options > Station > St art visual serv ice . To change the station details, select Options > Station > Edit . Radio settings Select Options > Settings and from the following: ⢠Start-up t one â Select whether a tone is played when the application is started. ⢠Auto-start service â Select Yes to have the Visual Radio service start automatically when you select a saved station that offers the Visual Radio service. ⢠Access point â Select the access point used for the data connection. You do not n eed an access point to use the application as an ordinary FM radio. ⢠Current region â Select the region you are currently located in. This se tting is displayed only if there was no network coverage when the application was started. Internet radio Select Menu > Media > Internet radio . Listen to internet radio stations Warning: Listen to music at a moderate level. Continuous exposure to high volume may damage your hearing. Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may b e extremely loud. To listen to a radio station on the internet, select a station from the station directory, search stations by their name from the Nokia Internet Radio service, or select Options > Add station manually . When you have found the correct station, select Listen . 53 Media
To stop the playback, press the scroll key. To resume the playback, press the scroll key aga in. To adjust the volume, use the volume keys. To view station information, select Optio ns > Station information (not ava ilable if you have saved the station manually). If you are listening to a stat ion saved in your favourites, scroll left or right to listen to the previous or next saved station. Tip: You can browse for station links wi th the Web application. Compatible links are automatically opened in the Internet ra dio application. Search for stations To search for radio stations in the Nokia Internet Radio service by their name, select Search . Enter a s tation name or the firs t letters of it in the search field, and select Search . To listen to the station, select Listen . To save the station to your favourites, select Options > Add to Favourites . To make another s earch, select Options > Search again . Save stations To view and list en to your favourit e stations, select Favourites . To add a station manually to favourites, select Options > Add station manually . En ter the web address of the station and a na me that you want to appear in the favourites list. To add the currently playin g statio n to favourites, select Options > Add to Favo urites . To view station information, to move a station up or down in the list, or to delete a station from the favourites, select Options > Station and the desired option. To view only stations begi nni ng with particula r letters or numbers, start entering t he characters. Match ing stations are displaye d. Internet radio settings To select the default access point to con nect to the network, select Options > Settin gs > Defau lt access point . Select Always ask if you want the device to ask for the access point every time you open the application. To change the connection speed for GPRS packet data connections, select Options > Settings > GPRS connection bitrate . 54 Media
To change the con nection speed for 3G packet data connections, select Options > Settings > 3G connection bitrate . To change the connection speed for WLAN connections, select Options > Settings > Wi-Fi connection bitrate . The quality of the radio broadcast depends on the selected connection speed. Th e higher the speed, the better the quality. To avoid buffering, use the highest quality only with high speed connections. 55 Media
Internet With your new Eseries device you can browse both the internet and your company's intran et, and download and install new applications to your device. You can also use your device as a modem and connect your PC to the internet. Web Select Menu > Web . To browse the web (network service), you need to configure the internet access point settings . If you are using a data call or GPRS connection, your wireless network must support data ca lls or GPRS, and th e data service must be activated for your SIM card. Tip: You may receive the internet access point settings from your service provider as a special text message or from th e service provider's web pages. You can also enter the internet access point settings manually. See "Internet access points" , p. 59 . Check the availability of serv ices, pricing, and fees with your service provider. Service providers also give you instructions on how to use their services. If the web page is unread able or not supported and garbage code is found whil e browsing, you ca n try to select Menu > Web > Options > Settings > Page > Default encoding , and select a corresponding encoding. Connection security If the security indica tor ( ) is displayed during a connection, the data transm ission between the device and the internet gate way or server is encrypted. The security icon does not indicate tha t the data transmission between the gatewa y and the content server (or place where the requested resource is stored) is secure. The servic e provider secures the data transmission between the gatewa y and the content server. Security certificates may be required for some services, such as banking services. You are notified if the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the correct security certificate in your device. For more information, contact your service provider. 56 Internet
Browse the web To browse the web, select a bookmark or enter the web address manually, and select Go to . Use only services that you trust and that offer adequ ate security and protection against harmful software. Tip: When you start t o enter the address, the addresses of the pages you have previously visited that match your input a re displayed. To open a page, scroll to its address, and press the scroll key. To move on a web page, use the scroll key, whi ch is shown as a pointer on the page. When you move the pointer over a link, the pointer changes into a hand. Press the scroll key to open the link. On a web page, new links usually appear un derlined in blue and previously visited links in purple. Images t hat act as links have a blue border aro und them. The addresses of th e pages you visit are saved in the Auto. bookmarks folder. Bookmarks To access the bookmarks view whi le browsing, select Options > Bookmarks . To view a bookmarked web page, select the bookmark. To browse to another web page, select Options > Go to web address , enter the web address, and select Go to . To add a bookmark while browsing, select Options > Save as bookmark . To organise your bookmarks, in the bookmarks view, select Options > Boo kmark manager . You ca n move and edit bookmarks, and create new folders. Clear the cache A cache is a memory location t h a t i s u s e d t o s t o r e d a t a temporarily. If you have tried to access or have accessed confidential information requiring passwords, empty the cach e after each use. The information or services yo u have accessed are stored in the cache. To empty the cache, select Options > Clear pri vacy data > Clear cache . Feeds and blogs Select Menu > Web > Web feeds . Feeds usually contain headlines and articles, often about recent news or other topics. Blog is a shortening of weblog, which is a cont inuously updated web diary. To download a feed or blog, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To add or edit a feed or blog, select Options > Manage feed > New feed or Edit . End a connection To end the connection an d view the browser page offline, select Options > Tools > Disconnect . To end 57 Internet
the connection and close the browser, select Options > Exit . Web settings Select Menu > Web > Options > Settings . The web settings are divided into four groups: ⢠General contains access point, home page, and browsing secu rity settings. ⢠Page contains imaging, audi o, and pop-up setting s. ⢠Privacy con tains settings relat ed to your p rivacy. ⢠Web feeds contains settings rela ted to web feeds and blogs. Browse the intranet Select Menu > Office > Intranet . To browse your company's intranet, you must creat e a company-specific VPN policy. Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > VPN . To connect to the intranet, open the I ntranet application, select the connection method and Options > Connect . To define which VPN profile to use in the connection, select Options > Use other VPN policy . To define the sett ings fo r the intranet connection, select Options > Settings . Download! Select Menu > Download! . With Download! (network service), you can browse, download, and insta ll items, such as latest a pplications and related documents, to your device from the web. The items are categorised under catalogs and folders provided by Nokia or independent service providers. Some items m ay be chargeable, but you can us ually preview them free of charge. Download! uses y our networ k services to access the most updated content. For information on additional items available through Download!, con tact your service provider, or the suppli er or manufacturer of the item. Only install and use appl ications and other software from sources that offer adequate secu rity and protection against harmful software. Manage items To open an item or view the content of a folder or catalogue, scroll to it, an d press the scroll key. To buy the selected item, select Options > Buy . To download an item that is free of cha rge, select Options > Get . 58 Internet
To search for an item, select Options > Search . To adjust the settings, select Optio ns > Settings . To view the list of downloaded items, select Options > My items . Subscriptions To view file details of the selected item, select Options > Open . To renew or cancel a subscription, select Options an d the corresponding option. Download! search Scroll to the catalogues from which you want to search for items, select Mark to select them, and enter the search keywords. To start the search, s elect Options > Search . Purchase history To open the selected it em with the corresponding application, select Options > Open . To view file details of the selected item, select Options > View details . To start, pause, resume, or cancel the download of the selected item, select Options and the corresponding option. Download! settings To change the Download! settings, select Op tions > Settings and from the following: ⢠Access point â Select an access point to use to connect to the service provider's server. ⢠Automatic open â Select whether you want the downloaded item or application to open automatically after the download is complet ed. ⢠Preview co nfirmatio n â Select whether you want a confirmation query to be shown before previewing an item. ⢠Buy confi rmati on â Select whether you want a confirmation query to be shown before buying an item. ⢠Subscrip. confirmation â Define whether you want the subscription confirmation query to be shown before subscribing to an item. Internet access points An internet access point is a collection of settings, which define how the device creates a da ta connection to the network. To use e-ma il and multimedia services or to browse web pages, you must first define access points for these services. S o m e o r a l l a c c e s s p o i n t s m a y b e p r e s e t f o r y o u r d e v i c e by your ser vice prov ider, and you may not be able to create, edit, or remove them. 59 Internet
Set up an internet access point for packet data (GPRS) 1. Sele ct Menu > Tools > Settings > Connectio n > Access points . 2. Sele ct Options > New access point to create a new access point, or select an existing access point from the list and then Optio ns > Duplicate access point to use the access point as a basis for the new one. 3. Define the following settings. ⢠Connection name â Enter a descriptive name for the connection. ⢠Data bearer â Select Packet dat a . ⢠Access point name â Enter the name for the access point. The name is usually provided by your service provider. ⢠User nam e â Enter your user name if required by the service provider. User names are often case-sensitive and provided by your service provider. ⢠Prompt pass word â Select Yes to enter your password each time you log into a server or No to save the password in your device memory and automate the login. ⢠Password â Enter your password if required by the service provider. The password is often case- sensitive and provided by the service provider. ⢠Authentica tion â Select Secure t o send your password always encrypted, or Normal to send your password encrypted when possible. ⢠Homepage â Enter the web address of the page you want to display as the home page when you use this access point. 4. After defining the settings, select Options > Advanced settings to define t he advanced settings or Back to save the settings and exi t. Advanced internet access point settings for packet data (GP RS) Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connecti on > Access points . After setting up a basic inte rnet access point for packet data (GPRS ), select O ptions > Advanced s ettings , and define the following advanced setting s: ⢠Network type â Select IPv4 or IPv6 as the in ternet protocol type. The internet protocol defines how data is transferred to and from your device. ⢠Phone IP address â Enter the IP address of your device. Select Automati c to have the network provide the device IP address. This setting is shown only if you select Network type > IPv4 . ⢠DNS address â Select Primary DNS address and Secondary DNS address and enter their IP addresses, if required by your service provider. Otherwise, the name server addresses are provided automatically. ⢠Proxy server ad dress â Enter the address of the proxy server. Proxy servers are intermediate servers 60 Internet
used by some service providers between a browsing service and its users. These servers may provide additional security and sp eed up access to the service. Set up an access point for WLAN manually 1. Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Acce ss points . 2. Select Option s > New access point to create a new access point, or select an exist ing access point from the list and then Options > Duplicate access point to use the access point as a ba sis for the n ew one. 3. Define the following settings. ⢠Connection name â Enter a descriptive name for the connection. ⢠Data bearer â Select Wirel ess LAN . ⢠WLAN network name â To enter the service set identifier (SSID), that i s, the name that identifies the specific WLAN, select Enter manually . To select the network from the WLANs in ra nge, sele ct Search for networks . ⢠Network sta tus â Select Hidden if the network you are connecting to is hidden or Public if it is no t hidden. ⢠WLAN network mode â If you select Infrastruc ture , devices can communicate with each other and with wi red LAN devices through a WLAN access point. If you select Ad-hoc , devices can send and receive data directly with each other, and no WLAN access point is needed. ⢠WLAN security mode â You must select the same security mode that is used in the WLAN access point. If you select WEP (wired equivalent privacy), 802.1x, or WPA/WPA2 (Wi-Fi protected access), you must also config ure the rele vant additional settin gs. ⢠WLAN se curity settings â Edit the security settings for the selecte d security mode. ⢠Homepage â Enter the web address of the page you want to display as the home page when you use this access point. To set up a WLAN access p oint automatica lly, use the WLAN wizard . Select Menu > Connectivity > WLAN wiz. . Advanced access point settings for WLAN Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points . After setting up a basic access point for WLAN, se lect Options > Advanced s ettings , and define the following advanced settings: ⢠IPv4 setti ngs â Enter the device IP and name server addresses for the IPv4 internet protocol. ⢠IPv6 setti ngs â Select or enter the name server addresses for the IPv6 internet protocol. 61 Internet
⢠Ad-hoc channel â The channel is usually chosen automatically. To enter the ch annel number (1-11) manually, select User defined . ⢠Proxy server addres s â Enter the proxy server address. ⢠Proxy port number â Enter the proxy server port number. Connect PC to web You can use your device to connect your P C to the web. 1. Connect the data cable to the USB connec tors of your device and your PC. 2. Sele ct Connect PC to web . The necessary software is automatically installed from your device to the PC. 3. Accept the installation in your PC. If asked, accept also the connection. When the connection to the web is established, the web browser of your PC opens. You must have administrator rights to your PC, an d the autorun opt ion enabled in th e PC. If not, run the setup.exe file from the CD-ROM drive of your PC. 62 Internet
Messaging Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging . In Messaging (netw ork service), you can send and receive text messages, mu ltimedia messages, audio messages, an d e-mail message s. You can also receive web service messages, cell broadcas t messages, and special messa ges containing data , and send service commands. Before sending or receiving messages, you may need to do the following: ⢠Insert a valid SIM card in the device and be located in the service area of a cellular network. ⢠Verify that the networ k supports the messagin g features you want to use and that they are activa ted on your SIM card. ⢠Define the internet access point setti ngs on the device. See "Internet access points" , p. 59 . ⢠Define the e-mail account setti ngs on the device. See "E-mail accoun t settings" , p. 80 . ⢠Define the text messa ge settings on the device. See "Text message setting s" , p. 79 . ⢠Define the multimedia message settings on the device. See "Multimedia message settings" , p. 79 . The device may recognise th e SIM card provider and automatically configure some of the message settin gs. If not, you may need to define the settings manually; or contact your service provider to configure the settings. Messaging folders Messages and data recei ved using Bluetooth connectivity or infrared are stored in the Inbox folder . E-mail message s are stored in Mailbox . Messages that you have been writing can be stored in the Drafts folder. Messages that are waiting to be sent are stored in the Outbox folder, and messages that have been sent, excluding Bluetooth an d infrared messages, are stored in the Sent folder. Tip: Messages are placed in Outbox, for example, when your device is outside network coverage. You can also schedule e-mail messages to be sent the next time you con nect to your remote mailbox. 63 Messaging
Note: The message sent icon or text on your device screen does not in dicate that the message is received at the intended destination. To request the network to send you a delivery report of the text messages and multi media messages you have sent (network service) , select Options > Settings > Text message or Multimedia message > Receive report . The reports are saved in the Reports folder. Organise messages To create a new folder to organise your mes sages, select My folders > Options > New folder . To rename a folder, select Option s > Rename folder . You can only rename folders th at you have created . To move a message to another folder, select the message, Op tion s > Move to fold er , the folder, and OK . To sort messages in a specific order, select Option s > Sort by . You can sort the m essages by Date , Sender , Subject , or Message type . To view the properties of a message, select the message and Options > Message details . Message reader The message reader reads received text and multimedia messa ges aloud. To play a mess age, press and ho ld the left selection key when you receive a message. To start reading the n ext message in Inbox, scroll down. To start reading the message agai n, scroll up. In the beginning of the message, scroll up to hear the previous message. To pause the reading, press the left selection key briefly. To continue, press the left selection key briefly again. To end the reading, press the end key. Speech Select Menu > Tools > Speech . With Speech, you can set the language, voice, and voice properties for the message reader. Edit the voice proper ties To set the language for the message r eader, select Language . To download additional languages to your device, visit the Nokia web site or use the D ownload! application. 64 Messaging
To set the speaking voice, select Voice . The voice is language-dependent. To set the speaking rate, select Voice settings > Speed . To set the speaking volume, select Vo ice settings > Volume . To listen to a voice, open the voice tab, se lect the voice, and select Option s > Pla y voice . E-mail messages Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Mailbox . To receive and send e-mail, you must have a remote mailbox service. This service may be offered by an internet service provider, a network service provider, or your company. Your device is compliant with internet standards SMTP, IM AP4 (revision 1), and POP3, and with different vendor-s pecific e-mail solutions. Other e-mail providers may offer services with different settings or features than th ose described i n this user guide. For more details, contact your service provider or e-mail service provider. You may be able to install the follo wing e-mails to your device: ⢠Regular POP or IMAP e-mail. You need to connect to the mailbox, and downlo ad the e-mails to your device before you can read them. ⢠Nokia Email service. Nokia Email is used with different internet e-mail providers, such has Google e-mail services. The Nokia Email service pushes the new e-mails to your device as long as the N okia Email application is open. ⢠Mail for Exchange. Mail fo r Exchange is usua lly used for accessing work e-mails. Your company's IT department may have furt her instructions on how to install and use Mail for Exch ange with your company's e-mail servers. Other e-mail solution s may be availa ble. If you have defined severa l mailboxes, for example a POP or IMAP e-mail and Mail for Exchange, select one of them as your default mail box. That mailbox is used every time you start composing a new e-ma il message. To define the default mailbox in Messaging, select Options > Settings > E-mail > Default mailbox and the mailbox. Nokia Email The Nokia Email s ervice au to matically pu shes e-mail from your existing e-mail address to your Nokia E66. You can read, respond to, and organi se your e-mails on the go. The Nokia Email service works with a number of internet e-mail providers that are often used for personal e-mail, such as Google e-mail services. The Nokia Email service may not be available in all countries. 65 Messaging
To install the Nokia Em ail applicat ion: 1. In the home screen, scroll to the e-mail wizard, and press the scroll key. 2. Sele ct Start e-mail setup . 3. Read the information on the display, and select Start . 4. Sele ct Yes to allow your device to acce ss the network. 5. Sele ct Nokia Email service . 6. Sele ct Yes to install the Nokia Emai l application. 7. Read the information on the display, and select Continue . After the Nokia Email application has been installed, setup continues automatica lly. To set up the Nokia Email service: 1. Sele ct Yes to allow your device to acce ss the network. 2. Read the information on the display, and select Start . 3. Enter your e-mail addre ss and password, and se lect Next . 4. Ent er your telep hone nu mber in the international format, and select OK . 5. Read the Terms and Conditions, and select Accept . 6. Sele ct OK to finalise e-ma il setup. The Nokia Email application opens and synchronises your e-mai ls from your e-mail address with your device. The Nokia Email service can run on your device even if you have installed other e- mail applications such as Mail for Exchange. However, if you are using Nokia Intellisync Mobile Suite, it must be uninstalled before using the Nokia Email s ervice. Mail for Exchange With Mail for Exchange, you can receive your work e- mail to your Nokia E66. You can read an d reply to your e-mails, view and edit at tachments, v iew calendar information, receive and re ply to meeting requests, schedule meetings, and view , add, and edit contac t information. Mail for Exchan ge can be set up only if your company has Microsoft Exchan ge Server. In addition, your company's IT administrator must h ave activated Mail for Exch ange for your account . Before starting to install Ma il for Exchange, ensure that you have the following: ⢠A corporate e-mail ID ⢠Your office network us er name ⢠Your office network password ⢠Your network domain name (contact your company's IT de partment) ⢠Your Mail for Exchange server name (contact your company's IT de partment) Depending on your company's Mail for Exchange server configurat ion, you may need t o enter other information in addition to those listed. If you do not 66 Messaging
know the correct informa tion, contact your compa ny's IT department. With Mail for Exchange, the use of lock code may be mandatory. The default lock code of Nokia E66 is 12345, but your company's IT administrator may ha ve set a different one for you to use. Depending on your company, the Mail for Exchange installation ma y show you different information popups during the setup process . Read the popups, a nd select Continue , OK, Next , or Yes to continue. To install Mail for Exchange: 1. In the home screen, scroll to the e-mail wizard, and press the scroll key. 2. Select Start e-mail setup . 3. Read the information on the display, and select Start . 4. Select Yes to allow your device to access the network. 5. Enter your e-mail address, and select OK . 6. Enter your password, and select OK . 7. Enter your us er name, and select OK . 8. Select Mail for Exchange . 9 . E n t e r t h e d o m a i n n a m e o f y o u r n e t w o r k , a n d s e l e c t OK . 10. Enter the Mail for Exchange server name, and select OK . 11. Select Yes to install the Mail for Exchange application to your device. After installation, you ma y create your Mai l for Exchange profile by changing the settings . However, depending on your company, the profile may be created automatically. Regular POP or IMAP e-mail Your device can download e-mails from a POP or IMAP e-mail accoun t. POP3 is a version of the post office protocol that is used to store and retrieve e-mail or internet mail messages from a server. IMAP4 is a version of the internet message access protocol that lets you access and manage e-mail messages while the messages are still on the e-mail server. Yo u can then choose which messages to download to your device. Set up POP or IMAP e-mail 1. Go to the home screen, scroll to the e-mail wizard, and press the scroll key. 2. Select Start e-mail setu p . 3. Read the information on the display, and select Start . 4. Select Yes to allow your device to access the network. 5. Select E-mail . 6. Enter your e-mail address, and select OK . 7. Enter your password, and select OK . 67 Messaging
8. If requested, select an in ternet access point that is used for connecting to your POP or IMAP e-mail account. 9. Read the information on the display, and select OK to finalise e-mail setup. The name of your new mailbox replaces Mailbox in the Messag ing main view. Tip: After you have set up a P OP or IMAP e-mail, in the Messaging main view, select Options > Settings > E-mail an d the mailbox to edit the settings, for example a possible s ignature, or the name of your mailbox. Connect to a remote mailbox E-mail addressed to you is not automa tically received by your device, but by your remote mailbox. To read your e-mail, you must first connect to the remote mailbox; then select the e-mail messages you wish to retrieve into your device. 1. To retrieve received e-mail messages to your device and view them, select your mailbox in th e Messaging main view. When the device asks Connect to mailbox? , select Yes . 2. Enter yo ur user name an d password, if prompted. 3. Sele ct Options > Retrieve e-ma il > New to retrieve new messages th at you ha ve neither read nor retrieved, Selected to retrieve only messages you select from the remote mailbox, or All to retrieve all messages no t previously retrieved. 4. To manage your e-mail of fline to save in connection costs and work in conditions that do not allow a data connection, select Options > Disconnect to disconnect from the remote mailbox. Any changes you make in the remote mailbox folders while offline, take effect in your remote mailbox the next time you go on line and synchronis e. Read and reply to e-mail Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. Message s may contain malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. To read a received e-mail, open it from the mailbox. To open an at tachment, select Options > Attachments . Sc roll to the attachment, and press the scroll key. To reply only to the send er of an e-mail, select Options > Reply > To sender . To reply to all recipients of an e-mail, select Opti ons > Reply > To all . Tip: If you reply to an e -mail that conta ins attached files, the attach ments are not included in the reply. If you forward the received e-mail, the attachments are included. To forward an e-mail, select Options > Forward . To attach a file to an e-mail message, select Optio ns > Insert and the attachmen t you want to add. To delete an attachment from an e-mail that you a re sending, select the attachment a nd Options > Remove . 68 Messaging
To set the mess age priority, se lect Options > Send ing options > Priority . To set the sending ti me for the e-mail message, select Options > Sending options > Send message . Select Immediately , o r select When conn . avail. if you are working offline. To call the sender of the e-mail message, if the sender can be found in Contacts, select Op tion s > Call . To reply to the sender of the e-mail with an audio message or multimed ia message, se lect Options > Create message . Write and send e-mail 1. To write an e-mail, select New message > E- mail . 2. Select Option s > Add recipient to select th e recipients' e-mail addresse s from Contacts, or enter the e-mail addr esses in the To field. Use a semicolon to separate entries. Use the Cc field to send a copy to other recipients, or the Bcc field to send a blind copy to recipients. 3. In the Subject field, enter the s ubject of the e-mail. 4. Enter your e-mail message in the text area, and select Options > Send . Delete messages To free up memory space on your device, regularly delete messages from the Inbox and Sent folders, and delete retrieved e-mail messages. To delete e-mail from the device only, and keep the original on the server, select Options > Delete > Phone (header remains) . To delete e-mail both from the device and the remote server, select Options > Delete > Ph one and server . To cancel the deleting, select Options > Restore . Subfolders in your remote e-mail If you create subfolders in your IMAP4 mailboxes on a remote server, you can view and manage these folders with your device when you subscribe to them. Y ou can only subscribe to folders in your IMAP4 mailboxes. To view folders in your IMAP4 mailbox, establish a connection, and select Options > E-mail settings > Retrieval sett ings > Fold er subscriptions . To view a remote folder, select a folder and Options > Subscribe . Every time you go online, the subscribed folders are updated. This may take some time if the folders are large. To update the list of folders, select a folder and Options > Update folder list . Text messages Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging . 69 Messaging
Write and send text messages Your device supports text messa ges beyond the limit for a single messa ge. Longer messages are sent a s two or more messages. Your se rvice provider may charge accordingly. Characters wi th accents or other marks, and characters from some langu age options, take u p more space, and limit the number of characters that can be sent in a single message. 1. To write a text message, select New message > Text message . 2. In th e To field, enter a recipient's number, or press the scroll key to add a recipien t from Contacts. If you enter more than one number, separate the numbers with a semicolon. 3. Enter th e text of th e me ssage. To use a template, select Options > Insert > Te mplate . 4. Sele ct Options > Send . Sending options fo r text messages To select a message cent re to send the message, se lect Options > Sending options > Message centre in use . To have the network send you delivery reports on your messages (network se rvice), select O ptions > Sending options > Receive report > Ye s . To define how long the message centre resends your message (network service) if the first at tempt fails , select Options > Sending opti ons > Message validity . If the recipient cannot be reach ed within the validity period, the message is deleted from the message centre. To convert the message to another forma t, select Options > Sending options > Message sent as > Text , Fax , Paging , or E-mail . Change this option only if you are sure that your message centre is able to convert text messages into t hese other formats. Contact your service provider. Text messages on the SIM card Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > SIM messages . Text messages m ay be stored on your SIM car d. Before you can view SIM messages , you must copy the messages to a folder in the device. After copying the messages to a folder, you can view th em in the folder or delete them from the SIM card. 1. Sele ct Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark or Mark all to mark every message. 2. Sele ct Options > Copy . 3. Select a folder and OK to begin copying. To view SIM card messages, open the folder where you copied the me ssages, an d open a messa ge. 70 Messaging
View picture mes sages The appearance of a picture message may vary depending on the receiving device. To view a picture message, open the message fro m the Inbox folder. To view information about the picture message, select Options > Message details . To save a message in a different folder, select Options > Move to folder . To add the sender of the message to Conta cts, select Options > Save to Contacts . Forward picture messages 1. To forward the message, open the message from the Inbox folder and select Options > Forward . 2. In the To field, enter a recipient's number, or press the scroll key to add a recip ient from Contacts. If y ou enter more than one number, separate t he numbers with a semicolon . 3. Enter the text of your message. To use a template, select Options > Insert > Template . 4. Select Option s > Send . Tip: To remove the picture from the message, select Options > Remove pi cture . Multimedia messages Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging . Only devices that h ave compat ible features can receive and display multimedia me ssages. The appearance of a message may vary depend in g on the receiving device. A multimedia message (MMS ) can contain text and objects such as images, so und clips, or video clips. Before you can send or receive multimedia messages on your device, you must define the multimedia message setting s. Your de vice may have recogni sed the SIM card provider and automatically con figured the multimedia message sett ings. If not, use Se ttings wizard, or cont act your serv ice provider for the correct settings. See "Multimedia message setti ngs" , p. 79 . Create and send multimedia messages Important : Exercise caution when opening messages. Me ssages may conta in malicious softw are or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. 1. To create a new m essage, select New message > Multimedia message . 2. In the To field, enter a recipient's number or e-mail address, or press the scroll key to a dd a recipient from Contact s. If you en ter more than one number or e-mail address, separate them with a semicolon. 71 Messaging
3. In t he Subject field, enter a subject for the message. To change the fields that are visible, select Options > Address fiel ds . 4. Enter the text of the message, and select Options > Insert objec t to add media objects. You can add objects such a s Imag e , Sound clip , or Video cli p . The wireless network may limit the size of MMS messages. If the inserted picture exceeds this limit t h e d e v i c e m a y m a k e i t s m a l l e r s o t h a t i t c a n b e s e n t by MMS. 5. Each slide of your message ca n contain only one video or sound clip. To add more slides to your message, select Op tions > Insert new > Slide . To change the order of slides in your m essage, select Options > Move . 6. To preview a multimedia mes sage before sending it, select Options > Preview . 7. Sele ct Options > Send . To delete an object from a multimedia message, select Options > Remove . To set the sending options for the current multimedia message, select Options > Sending optio ns . Receive and reply to multimedia messages Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. Message s may contain malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. Tip: If you receive multimedia messages that contain objects unsupported by your device, you cannot open them. Try to send these objects to another device su ch as a compu ter, and open them there. 1. To reply to a multimed ia message, open the message, and select Opti ons > Reply . 2. Sele ct Options and To sender to reply to the sender with a multimedia mes sage, Via text message to reply with a text message, Via audio message to reply with an audio messag e, or Via e-mail to reply with an e-mail message. Tip: To add recipients to your reply, select Options > Add recipient to select the recipients of the message from Contacts, or enter the recipients' phone numbers or e- mail addresses manually in the To field. 3. Enter the text of the messag e, and select Options > Send . 72 Messaging
Create pres entations Creating multimedia presen tations is not possible if the MMS creation mode setting is set to Restricted . To change the settin g, select Messaging > Options > Settings > Mult imedia me ssage > MMS cre ation mode > Free . 1. To create a presentation, select Ne w message > Multimed ia message . 2. In the To field, enter a recipi ent's number or e-mail address, or press th e scroll key to add a recipie nt from Contacts. If you en ter more than one number or e-mail address, separate th em with a semicolon. 3. Select Option s > Create pres entation and a presentation t emplate. A template may define which media objects you can include in the presentation, where they appear, and which effects are displayed between images and slides. 4. Scroll to the text ar ea and enter the text. 5. To insert images, sound, video, or notes in your presentation, scroll to the corresponding object area, and select Options > Insert . 6. To add slides, select Insert > New sl ide . To select the background colour for the presentation and background images fo r different slides, select Options > Background settings . To set effects between images or slides, select Options > Effect settin gs . To preview the presentation, select Optio ns > Preview . Multimedia presen tations may only be viewed in compatible devices that support presentations. They may appe ar different in different devices. View presentations To view a presentation, op en the multimedia message from the Inbox folder. Scro ll to the presentation, and press the scroll key. To pause the presentation, press either selection key. To resume playing the presentation, select Options > Continue . If the text or images are t oo large t o fit on the display, select Options > Activate scrolli ng , and scroll to see the entire presentation. To find phone numbers and e-mail or web addresses in the presentation, select Options > Find . You m ay use these numbers and addresses to make calls, send messages, or create bookmarks, for example . View and save multimedia attachments To view multimedia messages as complete presentations, open the message, and select Options > Play presentation . Tip: To view or play a multimedia object in a multimedia messa ge, sele ct View imag e , Play sound clip , or Play video clip . 73 Messaging
To view the name and size of an attachment, open the message, and select Option s > Object s . To save a multimedia object, select Options > Objects , the object, and Options > Save . Forward a multimedia message Open Inbox, scroll to a mu ltimedia notification, and press the scroll key. To send the me ssage to a compatible device without retr ieving it to your device, select Options > Forward . If the server does not support multimedia messag e forwarding, this option is not available. 1. In th e To field, enter a recipient's number or e-mail address, or press the scroll key to add a recipient from Contacts. If you en ter more than one number or e-mail address, separate them with a semicolon. 2. Edit the message, if desired, and select Options > Send . Tip: To edit the delivery settings of the message, select Option s > Sending opt ions . Send a sound c lip 1. To compos e an audio messag e, select New message > Audio message . 2. In th e To field, enter a recipient's number or e-mail address, or press the scroll key to add a recipient from Contacts. If you enter m ore than one number or e-mail address, separate them with a sem icolon. 3. Sele ct Options > Insert sound clip , and select whether to record a sound clip or select one from Gallery. 4. Sele ct Options > Send . Sending options for multimedia messages Select New message > Multimedia message > Options > Sending options and from the following options: ⢠Receive report â S e l e c t Yes if you want to receive a notification when the messag e has been successfully delivered to the recipient. R eceiving a delivery report of a mult imedia message that has been sent to an e-mail address may not be possible. ⢠Message validity â Select how long the messaging centre tries to send the message. If the recipient of a message cannot be reached within the validity perio d, the message is removed from the multimedia messaging centre. The network must support this feature. Maximum time is the maximum amount of time allowed by the ne twork. ⢠Priority â Set the sending priority to Hig h , Normal , o r Low . 74 Messaging
Instant messaging Select Menu > Communic. > IM . Instant messaging (IM) (network service) a llows you to converse with other people using instant messages and join discussion forums (IM groups) with specific topics. Various service prov iders maintain IM servers that you can log in to after you register to an IM service. Service providers may differ in their support of features. If IM is not available from your service provider, it may not appear in the menu of y our device. Contact your service provider for more information about signing up for IM services and costs of services. For more information on IM setting s, contact your service provider. You may receive the settings in a special text message from the service provider that offers the IM service. If not, enter the settings ma nually. Other instan t messaging so lutions, such a s WindowsLive and Yahoo, may be available in Download. Define IM settings To define the IM applic ation settings, select Option s > Settings > IM settings . You can, for example, set your screen name and IM alert tones. To converse with an IM user or users, and to view and edit your IM contacts, you m ust log into an insta nt messaging server. To add an IM server, sele ct Options > Settings > Servers . Ask your service provider for the correct settings. To set the server as the one to whi ch your devi ce automatically lo gs in, select Options > Settings > Default server . To define how your device connects to the IM s erver, select Options > Settings > IM login type . T o establish a connection between your device and the default server automatically, select Automatic . To automate th e connection only when in you r home network, select Auto in home netw. To connect to the server when you open th e IM application, select On app. start-up . To connect to the server manually, select Manual and log into the server in the IM main view by selectin g Options > Log in . Enter yo ur user ID and password at the prompt. You can obtain the user name, password, and other sett ings to log in from your service provider when you register for the service. Start a conversation Open Conver sations . To search for IM users and user IDs, se lect IM contacts > Options > New IM cont act > Search . You can search by User's nam e , User ID , Phone number , and E-mail address . To view a conversation, select a participant. To continue the conversation, enter your message, and select Options > Send . 75 Messaging
To return to the conversa tions list withou t closing the conversation, sele ct Back . To close the conversation, select Options > End conversation . To start a n ew conversation, selec t Options > New conversation . You can start a new conversa tion with a contact while you are inside a n active convers ation. However, you cannot h ave two active convers ations with the same conta ct. To insert an image to an instant message, select Options > Send image , and select th e image you want to send. To save a conversation pa rticipant to your IM contacts , select Options > Add to IM contacts . To save a conversation, while in the conversation view, select Options > Record chat . The conversation is saved as a tex t file that can be open ed and viewed in the Notes application. IM groups Open IM groups . IM groups is available only if you are logged into an IM server, and the server supports IM groups. To create an IM group, select Options > Create new group . To join an IM group or to continue a group conversation, scroll to the group, and press the scroll key. Enter a message, and select Opti ons > Send . To join an IM group that is not on the list, but for which you know the group ID, select Options > Join new group . To leave the IM group, select Opt ions > Le ave IM group . To search for IM groups and group IDs, select IM groups > Option s > Search . You can sea rch by Group name , Topic , and Members (user ID). To add an IM user to the group, select Options > Add member . S elect a user from your IM contacts or enter the contact ID. To remove a member from the IM group, select Options > Remove . To provide members with ed iting rights to the group, select Options > Add editor . Select a user from your IM contacts or enter the ID of the user. IM users with editing rights can edit grou p settings and invite other users to join the group or ban them from the group. To remove editing rights from a group member, select Options > Remove . To prevent IM users from joining the group, select Options > Add to banned list . Select a user from your IM contacts or enter the ID of the user. To allow a banned user to join the group, select Options > Remove . 76 Messaging
Block users Select IM contacts > Options > Blocking optio ns > View blocked list . To find a blocked IM user, enter the first letters of the user's name. Mat ching names appear in a lis t. To allow receiving messages from a blocked IM user, select Options > Unblock . To prevent receiving messag es fr om other IM users, select Options > Block new contacts . Select the IM user from your IM contacts, or enter the user ID. IM application settings Select Options > Settings > IM settings and define the following settings: ⢠Use screen n ame â To change the nam e that identifies you in IM groups, select Yes . ⢠Show my availability â Select whether you allow all other IM users or on ly your IM contacts to see when you are online. Select To no-one to hide y our online status. ⢠Allow messages fro m â Select to receive instant messages from all other IM users, your IM contacts only, or not to receive messages at all. ⢠Allow inv itations from â Select to receive invitations to IM groups from all IM users, your IM contacts only, or not to receive invitations at all. ⢠Msg. scrolling speed â T o d e c r e a s e o r i n c r e a s e t h e speed at which new m essages are displaye d, scroll left or right. ⢠Sort IM contacts â Select to list your IM contacts alphabetically or by their online status. ⢠Availability re loading â To update the online status of your IM contacts automatically, select Automatic . ⢠Offline co ntact s â Select if IM contacts with an offline status are shown in the IM contacts list. ⢠Own messa ge colou r â Select the colour of the instant messages y ou send. ⢠Received msg colour â Select the colour of the instant messages you receive. ⢠Show date/ time info â Select Yes to view the receiving or sending time of each message in an IM conversation. ⢠IM alert to ne â Select the tone that is pla yed when you receive a new insta nt message. Special message types Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging . You can recei ve special messages that contain data, such as operator logos, ringing tones, bookmarks, or internet access or e-ma il account settings. To save the contents of these messages, select Options > Save . Service messages Service messages are sent to your device by service providers. Service messages may contain notifications 77 Messaging
such as news hea dlines, services, or links throu gh which the message conten t can be downloaded. To define the service message settings, select Options > Settings > Servi ce message . To download the service or message content, select Options > Download message . To view information about the sender, web address, expiration date, and other detai ls of the message before downloading it, select Options > Message details . Send servic e commands You can send a service re quest message (also known as a USSD command) to your service provide r and request activation for certain network services. Contact your service provider for the service request text. To send a service request me ssage, select Options > Service command . Enter the service r equest text and select Options > Send . Cell broadcast Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Cell broadcast . With the cell broadcast network service, you can receive messages on various topics from your service provider, such as weather or traffic conditions in a particular region. For available topics and relevant topic numbers, contact your service provider. Cell broadcast messages cannot be received when the device is in the remote SIM mode. A pa cket data (GPRS) connection may prevent cell broadcast reception. Cell broadcast messages cannot be received in UMTS (3G) networks. To receive cell broadcast messages, you may need to set the cell broadcast reception on. Select Options > Settings > Recepti on > On . To view messages related to a topic, select the t opic. To receive messages related to a topic, select Options > Subscribe . Tip: You can set important topics as hot topics. While the device is in the standby mode, you are notified when you rece ive a message related to a hot topic. Select a topic, and select Opt ions > Hotmark . To add, edit, or delete topics, select Option s > Topic . Messaging settings Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings . Fill in all fields marked with Must be defined or with a red asterisk. Your device may recognise the SIM card provider and configure th e correct te xt message, multimedia message, an d GPRS settin gs automatically. If not, 78 Messaging
contact your service provider for the correct settings, order the settings from your service provider in a configuration message, or use the Settings wizard application. Text message settings Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings > Text messa ge . Select from the following: ⢠Message centres â View the available message centres for your device, or create a new one. ⢠Message centre in use â Select a message centre to send the messa ge. ⢠Character encoding â Select Reduce d support to use automatic cha racter conversion to anothe r encoding system when available. ⢠Receive report â Selec t Yes if you want the network to send you delivery reports on your messages (network se rvice). ⢠Message validity â Select how long the message centre resends your message if the first attempt fails (network service). If the recipient canno t be reached within the validity period, the message is deleted from the message centre. ⢠Message sent as â Convert the message to another format, s uch as Text , Fax , Paging , or E-mail . Change this option only if you are sure that y our message centre is able to convert text messages into these other formats. Contact your service provider. ⢠Preferred connection â Select the preferred method of connection when sending text messages from your device. ⢠Reply via s ame cent re â Select whether you want the reply message to be sent using the same text message centre number (network service). Multimedia message settings Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings > Multimedia message . Select from the following: ⢠Image siz e â Select Small or Lar ge to scale images in multimedia me ssages. Select Original to maintain the original image size. ⢠MMS creation mo de â Select Rest ricted to have your device prevent you from including content in multimedia messages that may not be sup ported by the network or the receiving device. To receive warnings about includin g such content, select Guided . T o create a multimedia messa ge with no restrictions on attach ment type, select Free . If you select Restricted , creating mult imedia presentations is not possible. ⢠Access point in use â Select the default access point to connect to the multimedia message centre. You may not b e able to change th e default access point if it is preset in your device by your service provider. 79 Messaging
⢠Multimedia retrieval â Select Always automatic to receive multimedia messages always automatically, Auto in home netw. to receive notification of a new mult imedia message that you can retrieve from the mess age centre (for example, when you are travelling abroad and are outside your home network), Manual to retrieve multimedia messages from the message centre manually, or Off to prevent receipt of any multimedia messages. ⢠Allow anon. msgs. â Select whether you want to receive messages from unknown senders. ⢠Receive adverts â Select whether you want to receive messages defined as advertisements. ⢠Receive re port â Select Ye s to have the status of the sent message to be shown in the log (network service). Receiving a delivery report of a multimedia message that has been sent to an e-mail address may not be possible. ⢠Deny report sending â Selec t Yes to not send delivery reports from your device for received multimedia messages. ⢠Message validity â Select how lo ng the messag ing centre tries to send the message (network service). If the recipient of a message cann ot be reached within the validity period , the messa ge is removed from the multimedia messaging centre. Maximum time is the maximum amount of time allowed by the network. E-mail account settings Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings > E-mail . If you try to edit mailbox settings but hav e not set up an e-mail account, the ma ilbox guide opens and helps you set up your e-mail account. If you have defined a mailbox, scroll to it, and press the scroll key to edit the settings. The settings available for editing m ay vary. Some settings may be preset by your service provider. Connection settings To define the connection settings, select an e-mail account and Options > Edit > Connection settings . To edit the settings for the e-mail you receive, select Incoming e-mail . To edit the settings for the e- mail you send, select Outgoing e-mail . User settings To define the user settings for an e-mail account, select the account, select Opti ons > Edit > User settings , and define the following settings: ⢠My name â E n t er a n a m e t o ap p e a r b e fo r e y o u r e- mail address when you sen d e-mail. ⢠Reply-to â Select whet her you want replies t o be redirected to a different address. Select On , and enter the e-mail address to which you want to direct the replies. You can only enter one address to which replies are directed. 80 Messaging
⢠Delete e- mails f rom â Select whether you want to delete the e-mail messages only from the device or from both the device and the server. Select Always ask if you want to confirm from where the e-mail should be deleted every time you delete an e-mail. ⢠Send message â Select to send the e-mail immediately or when a co nnection is available. ⢠Send copy to s elf â Select whether you want to save a copy of the e-mail to your remote mailbox and to the address defined in My e- mail address in the Outgoing e-mail settings. ⢠Include signature â Select whether you want to attach a signature to your e -mail messag es. ⢠New e-mail alerts â Select whether you wa nt to be notified of a new received e-mail message with a tone and a note. Retrieval settings To define the retrieval settings, select the e-mail account, select Options > Edit > Retrieva l settings , and define the following settings: ⢠E-mail to retrieve â Select whether you want to retrieve only the e-mail header information such as sender, subject and date, e-mail, or e-mail with attachments. This settin g is for POP3 mailboxes only. ⢠Retrieval amount â Select the number of e-mail messages you want to re trieve from the remote server to your mailbox. ⢠IMAP4 folder p ath â Define the folder path for folders to be subscribed. This setting is for IMAP4 mailboxes only. ⢠Folder subs criptions â Subscribe to other folders in the remote mailbox and retrieve content from those folders. This setting is for IMAP4 mailboxes only. Automatic retrieval settings To define the automatic retrieval settin gs for an e-mail account, select the account, select Option s > Edi t > Automatic retri eval , and define the following settings: ⢠E-mail retrieval â Select Enabled to retrieve new e-mail messages automatica lly from your remote mailbox, or Only i n home ne tw. to retrieve new e- mail messages automa tically from your remote mailbox only when you are in your home network and not, for example, travelling. ⢠Retrieval days â Select the days on which e-mail is retrieved to your device. ⢠Retrieval hours â Define the hours between which the e-mail is retrieved. ⢠Retrieval interval â Select the interval between retrieving new e-mail mes sages. ⢠E-mail notifications â Select whether you want to receive notifications on received e-mail. Service message settings Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings > Service message . 81 Messaging
To receive service messages from service providers, select Service mes sages > On . To select how to download services and service message content, se lect Download messages > Automati cally or Manually . If you select Automati cally , you may st ill need to confirm some downloads since not all se rvic es can be downloaded automatica lly. Cell broadcast settings Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings > Cell broadcast . To receive cell broadcast messages, select Reception > On . To select the lang uages in which you w ant to receive cell broadcast me ssages, select Language . To display new topics in the cell broadca st topics list, select Topic detection > On . Other settings Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Options > Settings > Othe r . Select from the following: ⢠Save sen t messages â Select whether to store sent messages in the Sent folder. ⢠Number of saved ms gs. â Enter the number of sent messages to sa ve. When the limi t is reache d, the oldest message is deleted. ⢠Memory in use â Select where to save your messages. You can sav e messages to the mem ory card only if a memory card is inserted. ⢠Folder view â D efine how you want the messages in Inbox to be shown. 82 Messaging
Phone To make and receive calls, the d evice must be switched on, the device must have a valid SIM card installed, and you must be located in the service area of a cellular network. To make or receive a net call, your device must be connected to a net call service. To connect to a net call service, your device must be in the coverage of a connection network, such as a WLAN access point. Voice calls Note: The actual inv oice for calls and services from your service provider may vary, depending on network features, r ounding off for billing, taxes, and so forth. Answer a call To answer a call, press the ca ll key. To reject a call, press the end key. To mute the ringing tone instead of answering a call, select Silence . When you have an acti ve call and the call waiting function (network service) is activated, press the call key to answer a new incoming call. The first call is put on hold. To end the active call, press the end key. Make a call Important : If the device has been locked, enter the lock code to activate the p hone function. When the device is locked, calls may be possible to the official emergency number. Making an emergency call in the offline profile or when the device is locked requires that the device recognise the number to be an official emergency number. It is advisable to change the profile or unlock the device by entering the lock code before you make the emergency call. To make a call, enter the phone number, including the area code, and press the call key. Tip: For international calls, add th e character that replaces the inter national access code, an d enter the country code, area code (omi t the leading 0, if necessar y), and phone number. 83 Phone
To end the call or cancel the call attempt, press the end key. To make a call using the sav ed contacts, press the contacts key. Enter the first letters of the name, scroll to the name, and press th e call key. See "Nokia Contacts for Eseries" , p. 35 . To make a call using the log, press the call key to view up to 20 numbers that you last ca lled or attempted to call. Scroll to the desired number or name, and press the call key. See "Log" , p. 93 . To adjust th e volume of an active call, use the volume keys. To switch from a voice call to a video call, select Options > Switch to video call . The device ends the voice call and makes a video call to the recipient. Make a conference call 1. To make a conference ca ll, enter a participant's phone number, and press the call key. 2. Whe n the pa rticip ant an swers, select Options > New call . 3. When you have made a phone call to all the participants, select Options > Conference to merge the calls into a conference call. T o m u t e t h e m i c r o p h o n e o f y o u r d e v i c e d u r i n g t h e c a l l , select Options > Mute . To drop a participant from the conference call, scroll to the participant, and se lect Opti ons > Conference > Drop particip ant . To discuss priva tely with a conference call participant, scroll to the participant, and select Options > Conference > Private . Video calls To be able to make a video call, you need to be in the coverage of a UM TS network. For availability of and subscription to video call services, contact your network operator or service provider. While talking, you can see a real-time, two-way video between you and the recipient of the call, if the recipien t has a compatible mobile phone. The video image captured by the camera in your device is shown to the video call recipient. A video call can only be made between two parties. Make a video call Warning: Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To make a video call, enter the phone number or select the recipient of the call from Contacts, and select Options > Call > Video call . When the video call starts, the camera of the device is a ctivated. If the 84 Phone
camera is already in use, video sending is disabled. If the recipient of the call does not want to send a video back to you, a still image is shown instead. You can define the still image in Menu > Tools > Setti ngs > Phone > Call > Image in video call . To disable the sending of audio, video, or video and audio, select Options > Disable > Sending audio , Sending vi deo , or Sending aud. & video . To use the loudspeaker for receiving audio, select Options > Activate loudspeaker . To m ute the loudspeaker and use the earpiece, select Options > Activate handset . To swap the places of imag es, select Options > Change image order . To zoom the image on the display, select Options > Zoom in or Zoom out . To end the video call and make a new voice call to the same recipient, select Opti ons > Sw itch to voi ce call . Share a video Use Video sharing (network service) to send live video or a video clip from your mobile device to another compatible mobile device du ring a voice call. To use this feature, t he device must be within the coverag e of a UMTS network. 1. Make a phone call to the se lected recipient. You can start sharing a video once the phone call is established and your device has been registered to the SIP server. 2. To send live video or a video clip from your device, select Options > Share video > Live or Clip . To preview the clip, select Options > Play . 3. Select the recipient from Contacts, or enter the recipient's SIP a ddress manually to send a n invitation to the recipient. Sharing begins automatically when the recipient accepts th e video sharing. 4. To end sharing th e video, select Sto p . The voice call continues no rmally. Receive a video sharing invitation When you receive a video sh arin g invitat ion, a message is displayed showing the ca ller's name or SIP address. To accept the invitation an d begin the sharing session, select Accept . To reject the invitation, select Reject . The voice call continues normally. Net calls Select Menu > Communic. > Internet tel. . Your device supports voice calls over the internet (net calls). Your device attempts emergency calls primarily 85 Phone
over cellular networks. If an emergency call using cellular networks is not successful, your device attempts an emergency ca ll through your net call provider. Due to the establ ished nature of cellular telephony, you should us e cellular networks for emergency calls, if possible. If you have c ellular network coverage available, make sure that your cellular phone is switched on and ready to make calls before you attempt an emer gency call. The capability for an emergency call us ing internet telephony depends on the availability of a WLAN and your n et call provider's implementation of emergency call capabilities. Contact your net ca ll provider to check the internet telephony emer gency call capability. With the net call service (network service), you can make and receive calls over the internet using the VoIP (voice over internet protocol) technology. Net calls can be established between computers, between mobile phones, and between a VoIP device and a traditional telephone. To make or receive a net call, your device must be within WLAN co verage, for example. The availability of the net call service may vary according to your country or area. Create a net call profile Before you can make net calls, you need to creat e a net call profile. 1. Sele ct Menu > Tools > Settings > Connectio n > SIP settings > Options > New SIP profile , and enter the required information. To make the login to the net call service au tomatic, select Regis tration > Al ways on . Contact your net call provider for the correct settings. 2. Sele ct Back until you return to the Connection settings main view. 3. Sele ct Internet tel. > Options > New profi le . Enter a name for the profile, and select the SIP profile you just created. To set the created profile to be used automatically when connecting to the net call service, select Menu > Communic. > Interne t tel. > Preferred profile . To login to the net call service manually, select Registration > When need ed in the SIP sett ings when creating a net call profile. To make secure net calls, ask your service provider for secure net call set tings. The proxy server selected for the net call profile must support secure net calls. A secure net call is i ndicated with . Connect to the net call service Select Menu > Communic. > Int ernet tel. . To make or receive a net call, your device must be connected to a net call service. If you have select ed automatic login, your device automatica lly connects to the net call service. If you lo gin to the servic e manually, select an available netw ork from the list and Select . The list of networks is re freshe d automatically every 15 seconds. To refresh th e list manually, select Options > 86 Phone
Refresh . Use this option if your WLAN is not shown on the list. To select a net call servic e for outgoing calls if the device is connected to more than one service, select Options > Change service . To configure new services, select Opt ions > Configure service . This option is shown only if there are services that have not been configured. To save the netw ork to which you are cu rrently connected, select Option s > Save network . The saved networks are marked with a star on the list of networks. To connect to a net call service using a hi dden WLAN, select Options > U se hidden n etwork . To end the connection to a net call service, select Options > Disconnect from se rvice . Make net calls You can make a net call from all applications wher e you can make a regular voice call. For example in Contacts, scroll to the desired contact, and select Call > Inte rnet call . To make a net call in the home screen, enter the SIP address, and press the call key. To make a net call to an address that does not start with a digit, press any number key when the device is in the standby mode, then press # for a few seconds to clear the display and to switch the device from the number mode to the let ter mode. Enter the address, and press the call key. To set net call as the preferred call type for ou tgoing calls, select Menu > Communic. > Internet tel. > Options > Settings > Defaul t call type > Inte rnet call . When your device is con nected to a net call service, all calls are made as net calls. Net call se rv ice settings Select Options > Se ttings , scroll to the settings of the desired service, and press the scroll key. To login auto matically to th e net call service, select Login type > Automatic . If you use the automati c login type for WLANs, the de vice periodically scans for WLANs, which increases th e demand on battery power and reduces the battery life. To login manually to the net call service, select Login type > Manual . To view the networks you have saved for the net call service and the networks detected by the net call service, select Saved conn. networks . To define the service-specific settings, select Edit service settings . This option is on ly av ailable if a service-specific software pl ug-in has been installed in the device. 87 Phone
Speed dialling Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Phone > Call > Speed dialling > On . Speed dialling allows you to make a call by pressing and holding a number key when in the home screen. To assign a number key to a phone number, select Menu > Communic. > Speed dial . Scroll to the number key (2 - 9) on the display, and select Opti ons > Assign . Select the desired number from Contacts. To delete the phone number assigned to a number key, scroll to the speed dialling key, and select Options > Remove . To modify a phone number assigned to a number key, scroll to the speed dialling key, and select Options > Change . Call divert Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Phone > Call divert . Divert incoming calls to your voice mailbox or to another phone number. For details, cont act your service provider. Select to divert voice, data , and select from the following options: ⢠All voice calls , All data call s â Divert all incoming vo ice, data. ⢠If busy â Divert incoming calls when you have an active call. ⢠If not answered â Divert incoming calls after your device rings for a specified period of time. Select t he time you let the device ring before di verting the call in the Delay time: list. ⢠If out of reach â Divert calls when the device is switched off or out of network coverage. ⢠If not available â Activate the last three settings at the same time. This op tion diverts calls if your device is busy, not answered, or out of reach. To divert calls to your voice mailbox, select a call type and a diverting option, then select Options > Activate > To voice mailbox . To divert calls to another phone number, select a call type and a diverting option, then selec t Options > Activate > To other number . Enter a n umber in th e Number: field, or select Find to retrieve a number saved in Contacts. To check the current divert ing status, scroll to the diverting option, and select Optio ns > Check status . To stop diverting calls, scroll to the diverting option, and select Opt ions > Cancel . Call barring Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Phone > Call barring . You can bar the calls that ca n be made or received with the device (network servic e). To change the se ttings, 88 Phone
you need the barring password from your service provider. Call barring affects all call types. Call barring and call divertin g cannot be act ive at the same time. When calls are barred, calls may be possible to certain official emergency numbers. To bar calls, select Voice call barring and from the following options: ⢠Outgoin g calls â Prevent making voice calls with your device. ⢠Incoming calls â Prevent incoming calls. ⢠Internati onal call s â Prevent calling to foreign countries or regions. ⢠Incoming calls when abroad â Prevent incoming calls when outside your home country. ⢠International cal ls except to home country â Prevent calls to foreign countries or regions, but allow calls to your home country. To check the status of voic e call barrings, select the barring option and Options > Check status . To stop all voice call barrings, select a barring option and Options > Cancel all barrings . To change the password used for barring voice and data calls, select Voice call barring > Options > Edit barring password . Enter the current code, then the new code twice. The barring password must be four digits long. For details, contact your service provider. Bar net calls Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Phone > Call barring > Internet call barring . To reject net calls from anonymous callers, select Anonymous call b arring > On . Send DTMF tones You can send dual tone mu lti-frequency (DTMF) tones during an active call to control your voice mailbox or other automated phone se rvices. Send a DTMF tone sequence 1. Make a call, and wait until the other end answers. 2. Select Optio ns > Send DTMF . 3. Enter the DTMF tone sequence, or select a predefined sequence. Attach a DTMF tone sequence to a contact card 1. Select Menu > Communic. > Contacts . O pen a contact, and select Options > Edit > Options > Add detail > DTMF . 2. Enter the tone sequence. To insert a pause of about 2 seconds before or between DTMF tones, enter p . To set the device to send the DTMF tones on ly after you select Send DTMF during a call, enter w . 3. Select Done . 89 Phone
Voice mail Select Menu > Communic. > Call m ailbox . When you open the Voice mail application for th e first time, you are asked to enter the number of your voice mailbox. To call your voice mail, select Options > Call voice mailbox . If you hav e configured net ca ll settings to yo ur device and have an internet call mailbox, select Internet call mailbox > Options > Call int ernet call mbx. to call it. To call your voice mail when in the home screen, press and hold 1 ; or press 1 and then the call key. If you ha ve defined an internet call ma ilbox, select whether you want to call yo ur voice mail or internet call mailbox. To change the voice mailbox number, select the mailbox and Options > Change number . To change the internet call mailbox addres s, select the mailbox and Options > Change address . Voice aid Select Menu > Tools > Voice aid . The Voice aid applicati on reads text on the display, allowing you to u se the basic functions of your dev ice without looking at th e display. To hear the entries in your contacts list, select Contacts . Do not u se this option if you h ave more than 500 contacts. To hear information on your missed and received calls, dialled numbers, and frequent calls, select Recent calls . To listen to your voice messages, select Voice mailbox . To dial a telephone number, select Dialler . To use voice commands to make a phone call, select Voice commands . To have your received me ssages read aloud, sele ct Message reader . To hear the current time, select Clock . To hear the current date, scroll down. If the Voice aid application is open when a calendar alarm is due, th e application reads the calen dar alarm content aloud. To hear more options, select Options . Voice commands Select Menu > Tools > Voice comm. . Use voice commands to make phone calls and launch applications, profiles, or ot h er functions on the device. The device creates a voice tag for the entries in Contacts and for the functions de si gnated in the Voice commands application. When a voice command is 90 Phone
spoken, the device compares the spoken words to the voice tag in the device. Voice c ommands are not dependent on a speakerâÂÂs voice; however, the voice recognition in the device adapts to the main userâÂÂs voice to recognise voice commands better. Make a call A voice tag for a contact is the name or nickname that is saved on the conta ct in Contacts. Note: Using voice tags may be difficult in a noisy environment or during an emergency, so you should not rely solely upon voice dialing in all circumstances. To listen to a voice tag, open a conta ct, and select Options > Play voice tag . 1. To make a call using a voice command, press and hold the voice key. 2. When you hear the tone or see the visual display, clearly speak the name saved on the contact. 3. The device plays a synth esised voice tag for the recognised contact in the selected device language, and displays the name and number. Af ter a timeout of 1.5 seconds, the device dials the number. If the recognised contact wa s not correct, select Next to view a list of other matches or Quit to cancel dialling. If several number s are save d under the contac t, the device selects the default nu mber, if it has been set. Otherwise, the device selects the first available number of the following fields: Mobile , Mobile (home) , Mobile (business) , Telephone , Tel. (home) , and Tel. (busines s) . Launch an application The device creates voice tags for the applications listed in the Voice comma nds application. To launch an application using a voice command, press and hold the voice key, and clearly sp eak the name of the application. If the reco gnised application was not correct, select Next to view a list of other matches or Quit to cancel. To add more applications to the list, select Options > New application . To change the voice command of an application, select Options > Change command , and enter the new command. Change profiles The device creates a voice tag for each profile. To set on a profile using a voice command, press and hold the voice key, and say the name of the profile. To change the voice command, select Profiles > Options > Change command . 91 Phone
Voice command settings To switch off the synthes iser that play s recognised voice commands in the se lected device language, select Options > Settings > Synthesiser > Off . To reset voice recognition learning when the main user of the device has changed, select Remove voice adapt s. . Push to talk Select Menu > Communic. > PTT . Push to talk (PTT ) (network service) provides direct voice communication connecte d with the p ush of a key. With PTT, y ou can use your device as a wa lkie-talkie. You can us e PTT to have a conversation with on e person or with a group of people, or join a channel. A channel is like a chat room: you ca n call the channel to see if anyone is online. The channel call does n ot alert the other users; the users just join the channel and start speaking with each other. In PTT communication, one person talks while the other users listen throu gh the built-in loudsp eaker. Users take turn s responding to each other. Because only one user can talk at a time, the maximum durat ion of a speech turn is limited. For details of the speech turn duration for your network, contact your service provider. PTT settings Select Options > Settings and select User se ttings to define your preferences for PTT, or Co nnectio n settings to change the connec tion details. Contact your service provider for the correct settings. Tip: You may also receive the settings in a message from the provider of the PTT service. Log in to PTT service If you have set Application start-up on in Us er settings , PTT au tomatically logs in to the service when started. If not, you mus t log in manually. To log in to the PTT se rvice manually, select Optio ns > Log in t o PTT . When the Ringing type setting of your device is set to Beep on ce or Silent , or there is an ongoing phone call, you cannot make or receive PTT calls. Make a PTT call Warning: Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To make a PTT call, select Option s > Contacts , select one or several con tacts from the list, and press the voice key. Remember to hold the device in front of you during the call so you can s ee the display. The display 92 Phone
informs you when it is yo ur turn to speak. Speak towards the microphone, and do not cover th e loudspeaker wi th your hands. Press and hold the v oice key the entire time you ar e talking. When you have finished talking, release the key. To end the PTT call, press the end key. When you receive a PTT call, press the call key to answer the call or the end key to dismiss the call. Created PTT calls Select Options > PTT lo g > Created P TT , and a call. To make a PTT call to a contact, select Options > Talk 1 to 1 . To send a request to a contact to call you, select Options > Send callback request . To crea te a con tact, sel ect Options > Save to Contacts . Manage PTT contacts To view, add, modify, delete, or call contacts, select Options > Contacts . A lis t of names from th e Contacts application is displayed with informat ion about their login status. To call a selected contact, select Opt ions > Talk 1 to 1 . To make a group call, select several contacts and Options > Talk to many . To send the contact a request to ca ll you, select Options > Send callback request . To answer a callback request, select Show to open the callback request. To make a PT T call to the send er, press the voice key. Create a PTT channel To create a channe l, sel ect Options > New channel > Create new . To join a channel, select th e channel you want to talk to, and press the voice key. To invite a user to a channel, se lect Option s > Send invitation . To view the currently active users of a channel, select Options > Active members . When you log in to PTT, you are automatically connected to the channels that were a ctive when the application was last closed. Exit PTT To exit PTT, se lect Opt ions > Exit . Select Yes to log out and close the service. Select No if you want to keep the application active in the background. Log Select Menu > Log . 93 Phone
Log stores information about the communication history of the device. The device regis ters missed and received calls only if the network supports these functions, the device is switched on and within the network service area. Call and data registers To view recently missed, received, and dialled calls, select Recent calls . Tip: To open Dialled numbers when in the home screen, press the call key. To view the approximate dura tion of calls to and from your device, select Call duration . To view the amount of data transferred during packet data connection s, select Packet data . Monitor all communicat ions To monitor all voice calls, text messages, or data connections registered by th e device, o pen the general log tab. To view detailed information about a communication event, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. Tip: Subeven ts, such as a text me ssage sent in more than one part and p acket data connections, are logged as one communication event. Connections to your mailbox, multimedia messaging centre, or web pages are shown as packet data connections. To add the phone number fr om a communication event to Contacts, select Opti ons > Sav e to Contacts , an d select to create a n ew contact or to add the phone number to an existing contact. To copy the number, for example to paste it to a text message, select Options > Use number > Copy . To view a single type of com munication event or communication events with one other party, select Options > Filter , and select the desired filter. To erase the contents of the log, recent calls register, and messaging delivery re ports permanently, select Options > Clear log . Call and send messages from Log To call back a caller, select Recent calls and open Missed calls , Received calls , or Dialled numbers . Select the caller, and Option s > Call . To reply to a caller with a message, select Recent calls and open Missed calls , Received calls , o r Dialled number s . Select the caller, and select Options > Create message . You can send text messages and multimedia messa ges. Log settings To set the time for keepin g all communication events in the log, select Option s > Settings > Log 94 Phone
duration , and the time. If you select No log , all log contents are permanently deleted. 95 Phone
Travelling Need directions? Looking for a restaurant? Your E series device has the tools to get y ou where you want to be. About GPS and satellite signals The Global Positioning Syst em (GPS) is a worldwide radio navigation system th at includes 24 satelli tes and their ground stations that monitor the op eration of the satellites. Your device has an internal GPS receiver. A GPS terminal receives low-power radio signals from the satellites and measures the travel tim e of the signals. From the travel time, the GPS receiver can calculate its location to the accuracy of metres. The coordinates in the GPS are expressed in degrees and decimal degrees format using the international WGS-84 coordinate system. The Global Positioning System (GPS) is operated by the government of the United States, which is solely responsible for its accura cy and main tenance. The accuracy of location data can be affected by adjustments to GPS satellites made by the United Stat es government and is subject to change wi th the United States Department of D efense civil GPS policy and the Federal Radionavigation Pl an. Accuracy can also be affected by poor satellite geometry. Avai lability and quality of GPS signal s may be affected by your location, buildings, natural obstacle s, and weather cond itions. The GPS receiver should only be used outdo ors to allo w reception of GPS signals. Any GPS should not be us ed for precise location measurement, and you shou ld never rely solely on location data from the GPS receiver and cellu lar radio networks for positioning or navigation. The trip meter has lim ite d accuracy, and rounding errors may occur. Accuracy can also be affected by availability and qualit y of GPS signals. To enable or disable different positioning methods, such as Bluetooth GPS, sele ct Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Positioning > Positioning methods . About satellite signals If your device cannot find the satellite signal, consider the following: ⢠If you are indoors, go outdoors to receive a better signal. ⢠If the numeric keypad slide is closed, open it. 96 Travelling
⢠If you are outdoors, move to a more open space. ⢠Ensure that y our hand does n ot cover the GPS antenna of your device. ⢠If the weather conditions are bad, the si gnal strength may be affected. ⢠Establishing a GP S connec tion may take from a couple of seconds to several mi nutes. Satellite status To check how many satellites you r device has found, and whether your device is receiving satellite signals, select Menu > GPS > GPS data > Posi tion > Options > Satellite status . If your device has found satellites, a bar for each satellite is shown in the satellite info view. The longer the bar, the stronger the satellite signal. Wh en your device has received en ough data from the satellite signal to ca lculate the coordinates of your location, the bar turns black. Initially your device must re ceive signals from at least four satellites to be able to calculate the coordinates of your location. When the in itial calculation has been made, it may be possible to continue calculating the coordinates of your location with three s atellites. However, the accuracy is generally better when more satellites are found. Positioning settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Positioning . To use a specific positioning method to detect the location of your device, select Positioning meth ods . To select a positioning server, select Po sition ing server . Maps Select Menu > GPS > Maps . With Maps, you can see you r current location on the map, browse maps for diffe rent cities and countries, search for addresses and diffe rent points of interest, plan routes from one loca tion to another, and save locations and send them to compa tible devices. You can also purchase licences for extra services, such as travel guides, traffic in formation, and navigation service with voice guidance. These services are not available for all countries or regions. If you browse to an area which is not covered by maps already downloaded in you r device, a map for the area is automatically downloaded through the internet. Some maps may be available in your device or memory card. You can also use the N okia Map Loader PC software to download ma ps. To install Nokia Map Loader to a compatible PC, go t o www.maps.nokia.com. Downloading maps ma y invo lve the transmission of large amounts of data thro ugh your se rvice provider's network. Contact your service p rovider for information about data transm ission charges. 97 Travelling
When you use Maps fo r the first time, you may need to select an access point for downloading maps. To change the access point later, select Options > Tools > Settings > Internet > Default access point . About Maps To connect to the internet automatically w hen you start Maps, se lect Options > T ools > Settings > Internet > Go online at start-up > Yes . To prevent automatic downloading of ma ps, select Options > Tools > Settings > In ternet > Go online at start-up > N . To set the device to ask your permission before connecting to the internet, select Option s > Tools > Settings > Internet > Go online at start-up > Always ask . To be informed when your device registers to a network other th an your home network, select Options > Tools > Settings > In ternet > Roaming w arning > On (shown only when you are online). For details and roa ming costs, conta ct your service provider. Tip: To avoid data transfer c osts, you can also use Maps without an in ternet connection, and browse the maps that are saved in your device or memory card. Almost all digital cartog raphy is inaccurate and incomplete to some extent. Never rely solely on the cartography that you download for use in this device. Move on a map The map coverage varies by country an d region. When you open Maps, the capi tal of the country you are in or the location that was saved from your last session is shown. The map of the lo cation is also downloaded, if needed. To zoom in to your GPS position or your last known location, press the function key and 0 . When the GPS connection is active, shows your current location on the map. T o m o v e o n t h e m a p , s c r o l l up, down, left , or right with the scroll key. The map is oriented towards north by default . To zoom in and out on the map, press the fu nction key and * , or the function key and # . When you browse the map on the display, a new map is automatically downloaded if you scroll to an area which is not covered by maps already downloaded. These maps are free of charge, but downloading may involve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service provider's network. For more information on data transm ission charges , contact your service provider. Th e maps are automatically saved in the device memory or on a compatible memory card (if inserted). 98 Travelling o
Display indicators The GPS indicator on the bottom right corner of the display sh ows the avai lability and strength of the satellite signal. One bar is one satellite. When the device tries to find a satellite, the bar is yellow. When the device receives enough da ta from the satellite to establish a GPS conne ction, the bar t urns green. The more green bars , the stronger the GPS connection. Initially, your device must re ceive signals from at least four satellites to calculat e the coordinates of your location. After the ini tial calculation, signals from three satellites may be enough. The data transfer indicator shows the internet connection used and the amount of data transferred since the applicat ion started. Find locations To find a location in the city or area displayed on the map, enter the full or partial address of the location in the search field, and press the scroll key. To find a location in another city, ente r the city and the full or partial address, such as London Oxford Str eet , and press the scroll key. To find a specific address, or an address in another country, select Options > Search > Addresses . Country/Region * and City or post cod e are mandatory. Tip: To search for locations in another country using the search field, enter also the name of the country in the search field: Rome Italy . To import a location a ddress from the Contacts application , select Options > Search > Addresses > Options > Select from Contacts . The search results a re groupe d by categories. To limit the search to one category, select Options > Search . If you search for locations without an internet connection, the search results a re limited to a radius of 50 km (31 miles). Plan a route To plan a route, select yo ur start po int on the map or search for a location, press the scroll key, and select Add to route . To define the destination and add more locations for your route, se lect Options > Add route point , and search for the location. To switch between walking or driving mode, select Options > Settings > Transport mode To show the route on the map, select Options > Show route . To navigate to the destinat ion by car or on foot, if you have purchased a licence for these extra services, select Options > Start dr iving or Start walking . To save the route, select Options > Save route . 99 Travelling
Walk to your destination The walking route ignores any possible limitations t o car navigation, su ch as one-way st reets and turn restrictions, and includ es areas such as pedestrian zones and parks. It al so prioritises walkways and smaller roads, and omits highways and motorwa ys. The route is drawn to the map, and the arrow indicat es the direction. The small dots show in which direction you are walking. The length of a walking route is limi ted to a maximum of 50 kilometres (31 miles) and the travelling speed to a maximum of 30 km/h (18 miles/h). If t he speed limit is exceeded, navigation stop s and is resumed once the speed is back within limits. There is no voice guidance available for pedest rian navigation. To purchase a licence for pedestrian na vigation, select Options > Extras > Walk . The licence is region- specific and can be used only in the selected area. You can pay for the licence through a credit card or in your phone bill, if supported by your service provider. Tip: To try out navigati on for three days with a free licence, press the scroll key, and select Walk to . Maps checks if a free licence is available for your device. To activate the li cence, select OK . You can only use the licence once. To start nav igating, select a loc ation and Options > Walk to . To find an alternative route, select Options > Different route . To stop navigating, se lect Stop . Drive to your destination To purchase a licence for pe destrian an d car navigation with voice guidance, select Opti ons > Extras > Drive & Walk . The licence is regi on-specific and can be used only in the selected area. Tip: To try out navigation for three days with a free licence, press the scroll key, and select Drive to . Maps checks if a free licence is available for your device. To activate th e licence, select OK . You can only use the licence once. To start navigating by car, select a location, press the scroll key, and select Drive to . When you use car navigation for the first tim e, you are asked to select the language of the voice gu idance and download t he related voice guidance file s. To change the language later, in the main view, select Options > Tools > Settings > Navigation > Voice guidance . Voice guidance is n ot available for pedestrian navigation. To switch between different views during the navigation, press the scroll key, and select Manoeuvre view , Bird's-eye view , or Arrow view . To find an alternative route, select Options > Di ff. route . To repeat the voice guidance, select Options > Repeat . 100 Travelling
To stop navigating , select Stop . Traffic information The real-time traffic info rmation service provides information about traffi c events that may affect your travel. The traffic info rmation servic e is an extra service that you can purchase a nd download int o your device, if available in your country or region. To purchase a licence for th e traffic information service, select Options > Extras > Traffic info . To view information about traffic events, select Options > Traf fic info . The events are shown on the map as triangles and lines. To view the details of an event, including possible rerouting options, select the event and Optio ns > Open . To update the traffic i nformation, select Up date traffic info . Travel guides Travel guides provide inform ation about at tractions, restaurants, hotels, and other points of interest. S ome guides contain videos and au dio clips. The guides must be purchased and down loaded before use. Downloading trave l guides may i nvolve the transmission of large amounts of data through your service providerâÂÂs network. Contact your service provider for information about data transmission charges. To purchase and download travel guides, or to view downloaded ones, select Options > Extras > Guides . To browse travel guide categories, select a category, and press the scroll key. If there are subc ategories, select a subcategory, and press the s croll key again. To download a new guide to your device, scroll to the desir ed guide , and s elect Yes . You can p ay for the guides through a credit card or in your phone bill, if supported by your service provider. GPS data Select Menu > GPS > GPS data . With GPS data, you ca n view your current locat ion, find your way to a desired location, and track distance. Select Navigation to view navigatin g information to your trip destination, Pos ition to view positioning information about your current location, or Trip dist. to view your tr avelling information su ch as the distance and duration you have travelled, and your average and maximum speeds. The application must rece ive positioning information from at least four satellites to be used a s a travelling aid. 101 Travelling
The trip meter has limite d accuracy, and rounding errors may occur. Accuracy can also be affected by availability and qualit y of GPS signals. Use GPS data To check the signal strength of the satelli tes that provide the positioning information necessary for navigat ion, op en any of the three views and select Options > Satellite status . To set a landmark or location as the destination of your trip, select Navigation > Options > Set destination . Yo u can also enter the destinati on latitude and longitude coordinates. To remove the destination set for your trip, select Naviga tion > Options > Stop naviga tion . To save your current posi tion as a landmark, select Naviga tion or Po sitio n , and Options > Save positio n . To activate t he trip met er, select Trip distance > Options > Start . To stop the trip meter, select Options > Stop . To reset all fields and start calculati ng the trip again, select Trip distance > Opti ons > Restart . To change the measuring system in use, s elect Options > Settings > Measure ment system > Metric or Imperial . To enter the altitude calibration to correct the altitude received from the positioning satellites, select Options > Settings > Altitude calibrat ion . Landmarks Select Menu > GPS > Landmarks . Landmarks are coordina tes to geographic locations that you can save to your device for later use in different location-based services. You can create landmarks us ing the intern al GPS rec eiver of your device or network (network service). Create a landmark To create a landmark, select Options > New landma rk . Select Current pos ition to make a network request for the latitude and longitude coordinates of your current location, Select from map to select the location from a map, or Enter manually to fill in necessary location inform ation such as a name, category, address, la titude, longitude, and altitude. To show the landmark on the map , selec t Opt ions > Show on map . Edit landmarks To edit a landmark, select Options > Edit > Options and from the following: 102 Travelling
⢠Select categories â Organise the landmark to a group of similar landmark s. Select a ca tegory to modify landmark inform ation such as a name, category, address, latitude, lon gitude, and altitude. ⢠Retrieve current positio n â Request and automatically fill in the ge ographical latitude and longitude coordinates to make a landmark of your current location. ⢠Delete â Remove the landmark. ⢠Landmark icon â Change the icon of the landmark. ⢠Show on map â Show the land mark on the map. ⢠Send â Send the landmark to compatible devices. ⢠Editin g options â Edit the phone numbers and URL addresses assigned to th e landmark. ⢠Writin g language â Change the writing language. Landmark categories You can see the landmark cate gories in two views: one lists categories that alre ady contain landmarks , and the other lists all the categories your device has. To view the landmarks that a category contains, scroll to the category , and press th e scroll key. To create a new category, select Op tions > Edit categories > Options > New category . To move a landmark from one category to another, open the landmarks tab, select the landmark, and Options > Add to category . Select the old category to remove the mark next to it. Select the category or categories to which you want to add the landmark. Receive landmarks Select Menu > Communic. > Messaging . Open a message that conta ins a landmark you ha ve received from another devi ce. Scroll to the landmark, and press the scroll key. To save the landmark in your device, select Op tions > Save . To forward the landmark to compatible device s, select Options > Send . To show the received land mark on the map, select Options > Show on map . To find out how to navigate to the received landma rk, select Options > Show route . 103 Travelling
Nokia Office Tools Nokia Office Tools support mobile business and e nable effective communication with work teams. Active notes Select Menu > Office > Active note s . Active notes allows you to create, edit, an d view different kinds of notes, for example, meeting memos, hobby notes, or shopping li sts. You ca n insert images, videos, and sound in the notes. You can link notes to other applications, such as Cont acts, and send notes to others. Create and edit notes To create a note, start writing. To edit a note, scroll to it, a nd press the scroll ke y. To insert images, sound clip s, video, business cards, web bookmarks, and files, select Options > Insert object . To add new items to the note, sele ct Opti ons > Insert new . You can record sou nd and video clips, and capture images. To add boldface, italics, or underlining to your text or change the font colour, press and hold the shift key and use the scroll key to select the text. Then select Options > Text . To send the no te, select Options > Send . To link a not e to a cont act, select Options > Link note to call > Add contacts . You can see the note on the display of your device when making a call to or receiving a call from the contact. Settings for Active notes Select Settings . To save notes to your device memory, se lect Memory in use > Phone memory . To save them to a memory card, sele ct Memory in u se > Mem ory card . To change th e layout of ac tive notes, select Change view > Grid . To view the notes as a list, select Change view > List . To see a note in the ba ckground when making or receiving phone calls, select S h o w n o t e d u r i n g ca l l > Yes . 104 Nokia Office Tools
Tip: If you temporari ly do not want to see the notes during phone calls, select Show n ote during call > No . This way you do not have to remove the links between notes and con tact cards. Calculator Select Menu > Office > Calculator . This calculator has limited a ccuracy and is designed for simple calculations. To make a calculation, en te r the first number of the calculation. Select a function such as add or subtract from the function map. Ente r the second number of the calculation, and select = . The calculator performs operations in the order they are entered. The result of the calculation remains in the editor field and can be used as the first number of a new ca lculation. The device saves the re sult of the last calculati on in its memory. Exiting the Calculator application or switching off the device do es not clear the memory. To recall the last saved result the next time you open the Calculator application, select Options > Last re sult . To save the numbers or resu lts of a calculation, select Options > Memory > Save . To retrieve the results of a calculation from the memory and use them in a c alculation, select Options > Memory > Recall . File manager With File manager, you ca n mana ge the contents and properties of files and folders on your device memory and memory card. You can open, create, move, copy, rename, send, and search for files and folders. Copyright protection may prevent sending some files. Open the device tab or the memory card tab. To select multiple files, scroll to each file, and select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark . To send the selected files, select Option s > Send . To move or copy files or folders to another folder, select Options > Move to folder or Copy to folder . Default folders such as Sound clips in Gallery cannot be moved. To search for files, select Options > Find . Enter the search text, and press th e scroll key. The folders and files whose names con tain the search tex t are displayed. To view information about the selected file, select Options > View d etails . To view additional information about the file online, select Options > Additional details . Quickoffice Select Menu > Office > Quickoffice . Quickoffice consists of Quickword for Microsoft Word, Quicksheet for Microsoft Excel, Quickpoint for Microsoft 105 Nokia Office Tools
PowerPoint, and Quickm anager for purchasing software. Yo u can vi ew Micr osoft Office 20 00, XP, and 2003 documents (*.doc, *.xls, and *.ppt ) with Quickoffice. If you have the editor version of Quickoffice, you can also edit files. All file formats or feat ures are not suppo rted. Work with files To open a file, scroll to it, and press the sc roll key. To sort files according to the type , select Option s > Sort by . To view the details of a file, select Options > Details . The details include the name, size and location of the file, and the time and date when the file was last modified. To send files to a compatible device, select Options > Send and the send ing method. Converter Select Menu > Office > Converter . The converter has limited accuracy, and rounding errors may occur. Convert measurements 1. Scroll to the Type field, and select Option s > Conversion type to open a list of measures. Select the measure to use, and select OK . 2. Scroll to the first Unit field, and select Options > Select unit . Select the unit from which t o convert, and select OK . Scroll to the next Unit field, and select the unit to which to convert. 3. Scroll to the first Amount field, and enter the value to convert. The other Amount field changes automatically to show the converted v alue. Set base curren cy and exchange rate When you change base curr ency, you must enter new exchange rates because a ll previously set exchange rates are cleared. Before you can make currency co nversions, you must choose a base currency and add exchange rates. The rate of the base currency is always 1. The base currency determines the conversion rates of the other currencies. 1. To set the rate of exchan ge for the unit of currency, scroll to the Type field, and select O ptions > Currency rates . 2. Scroll to the currency type and enter the ex change rate you would like to set per single u nit of currency. 106 Nokia Office Tools
3. To change the base currency, scroll to the currency, and select Options > Set as base currency . 4. Select Done > Ye s to save the changes. After you have inserted all the necess ary exchange rates, you can make currency conversions. Zip manager Select Menu > Office > Zip . With Zip manager, you can create new archive files to store compressed ZIP format ted files; add single or multiple compressed files or directories to an archive; set, clear, or change the archive password for protected archives; and chan ge settings, s uch as compression level, and file name encoding. You can store the archive fi les on the device memory or on a memory card. PDF reader Select Menu > Office > Adobe PDF . With PDF reader you can read PDF documents on the display of your device; search for text in the documents; modify settings, s uch as zoom level and page views; and send PDF files using e-mail. Printing You can print documents, su ch as files, messages, or web pages, from the device, preview a print job, define page layout options, select a printer, or print to a file. You may not be able to print a ll types of docu ments. Print files To configure a printer for your device, select Menu > Office > Printers > Options > Add . Scroll to the printer and select Option s > Set as default . Before you print, make sure your device is properly connected to the printer. To print a document, select Option s > Printing options > Print . To print to a file, select Options > Printing options > Print > Print to file , and determine the location for the file. To change the prin ti ng options, select Options > Printing options . You can select the pr inter you want to use, the number of copi es and the r ange of pages you want to pri nt. To change the page la yout before printing, select Options > Printing options > Page setup . You c an change the paper size an d orientation, define the margins, and ins ert a header or a footer. The maximum length of the header and footer is 128 characters. 107 Nokia Office Tools
To preview a file or messag e before you print, select Options > Printing options > Preview . Printing options Open a document , such as a file or messag e, and select Options > Printing options > Print . Define the following options: ⢠Printer â Select an available printer from the list. ⢠Print â Sel ect All pages , Even pages , or Odd pages as the print range. ⢠Print range â Select All pages in range , Current page , or Defined pages as the page range. ⢠Number of copie s â Select the number of copies to print. ⢠Print to file â Select to print to a file and determine the location for the file. The available options may vary. Printer settings Select Menu > Office > Printers . To add a new printer, select Opt ions > Add . Define the following: ⢠Printer â Enter a name for the printer. ⢠Driver â Select a driver for the printer. ⢠Bearer â Select a bearer for the printer. ⢠Access point â Select the a ccess po int. ⢠Port â Select the port. ⢠Host â Define the host. ⢠User â Enter the user. ⢠Queue â Enter the print queue. ⢠Orientati on â Select the orientation. ⢠Paper si ze â Select the paper size. ⢠Media type â Select the media type. ⢠Colour mode â Select the colour mode. ⢠Printer model â Select the printer model. The available options may vary. Clock Select Menu > Office > Clock . In Clock, you can view your local time and time zone information, set and edit al arms, or modify date and time settings. Alarm clock Open the alarm clock tab. To set an ala rm, select Options > New alarm . When an alarm is a ctive, is displayed. To switch off the alarm, select Stop , or to stop the alarm for 5 minutes, select Snooze . If the alarm time is reached while the device is switched off, the device switches itself on and sta rts sounding the a larm tone. If you select Stop , the device asks whether you want to activate the device for calls. Select No to switch off the device or Yes to make and receive calls. Do not select Yes when wireless phone use may cause interference or danger. 108 Nokia Office Tools
To change the alarm time, select Opt ions > Res et alarm . To remove the alarm, select Op tions > Remove alarm . World clock Open the world clock tab to check the time in different cities. To add a city to the world clock view, select Option s > Add city . To change the city that determines the time and date in your device, select Options > Set as current city . The city is displayed in th e Clock main view, and the time in your device is ch anged according to the city selected. Check that the t ime is correct and matches your ti me zone. Clock settings Select Options > Settings . To change the time or date, select Time or Date . To change the clock shown on the home screen, select Clock type > Analogue or Digital . To allow the mobile phone network to up date the time, date, and time zone information to your device (network service), select Network operator time > Auto-update . To change the alarm tone, select Clock alarm tone . Notes Select Menu > Office > Notes . You can create and s end notes to other comp atible devices, and save received pl ain text files (.txt format) to Notes. Write and se nd notes To write a note, start entering the text. The note editor opens automatica lly. To open a note, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To send a note to other compatible devices, select Options > Send . To synchronise or to define synchronisation settings for a note, select Opti ons > Synchronisation . Select Start to initialise synchronisation or Settings to define the synchronisation settings for the note. Nokia Wireless Keyboard Wireless keyboards are available as separate enhancements. To set up the Nokia Wireless Keyboard or other compatible wireless keyboard supporting the Bluetooth Human In terface De vices (HID) profile for use with your device, use the Wireless keyboard application. 109 Nokia Office Tools
1. Activate Bluetooth connectivi ty on your device: select Menu > Connectivity > Bluetooth > Blueto oth > On . Ma ke sure that you have set My phone's v isibilit y > Shown to all . 2. Switch on the keyboard. 3. Sele ct Menu > Of fice > Wlss. keybd. . 4. To start searching for devices with Bluetooth connectivity, select Options > Find keyboard . 5. Select the keyboard from the list, and press the scroll key to start the connection. 6. To pair the keyboard wi th your device, enter a passcode of your choice (1 to 9 digits) on the device and the same passcode on your keyboard. 7. If you are asked for a keyb oard layout, select it from a list on your device. When the name of the keyb oard appears, its status changes to Keyboard connected , and the indicator of your keyboard blinks slowly ; the keyboard is ready for use. For details on the operation and maintenance of your keyboard, see its user guide. 110 Nokia Office Tools
Connectivity Your device offers several options to connect to the internet, a corporate intran et, or to another device or computer. Fast downloading High-spe ed downl ink pack et acce ss (HS DPA, al so call ed 3.5G, indicated by ) is a network service in UMTS networks and provides high-speed data downloads. When HSDPA support in the device is activated and the device is connected to a UMTS network that su pports HSDPA, downloading data s uch as messag es, e-mail, and browser pages through the cellular network may be faster. An active HSDPA connection is indicated by . The icon may vary between regions. To activate or deactivate HSDPA, select Menu > Tools > Settings > Conne ction > Packet d ata > High speed packet access . Some c ellular networks do not allow incoming voice calls when HSDPA is active, in which case you need to deactivate HSDPA to receive calls. Contact your network operator for details. For availability and subscription to data connection services, contact your service provider. HSDPA only affects the download sp eed; sending data to the network, such as me ssages and e-mail, is n ot affected. Nokia PC Suite You can install Nokia PC Suit e from the CD-ROM or from the web. Nokia PC Suite can be used with Windows XP and Windows Vist a. With Nokia PC Su ite, you can make backups, synchronise your device with a compatible computer, move files between your device and a compatible computer, or use your device as a modem. For more information about Nokia PC Suite, see the Nokia PC Suite guide. Data cable To avoid damaging the memory card, do not remove the data cable in the mi ddle of a data transfer. Transfer data between your device and a PC 1. Insert a memory card to your device and connect the device to a com patible PC with the USB data cable. 111 Connectivity
2. When the device asks which mode is used, select Mass storage . In this mode, you can see your device as a removable hard drive in your co mputer. 3. End the connection from the computer (for example, from an Unplug or Eject Hardware wizard in Windows) to avoid damaging the memory card. To use Nokia PC Suite with your device, install Nokia PC Suite on your PC, connect th e data cable, and select PC Suite . To use your device to connect your PC to the web, connect the data cable, and s elect Connect PC to web . To synchronise the music in your device with Nokia Music Player, install the Nokia Music Player software on your PC, connect the data cable, an d select Media transfer . To change the USB mode you normally use with the data cable, select Menu > Connectivity > USB > USB conne ction mo de and the desire d option. To set the device to ask for the mode each time you connect the USB data cable to the device, s elect Menu > Connectivity > USB > Ask on connection > Yes . Infrared Do not point the infra red (IR) beam at anyon e's eye or allow it to interfere with ot her IR devices. This device is a Class 1 laser product. Use infrared to connect two devices and transfer data between them. With infrared, you can transfer data such as business ca rds, calendar note s, and medi a files with a compatible device. 1. Ensure that the infrared ports of the devices face each other. The positioning of the devices is more important than the angle or distance. 2. Sele ct Me nu > Connectivity > Infrared to switch on infrared on your device. 3. Switch on infrared on th e other device and wait a few seconds until the infrared connection is established. 4. Locate the desired file in an application or File manager, and select Option s > Send > Via infrared . If the data transfer is not started wi thin 1 minut e after the activation of the infrared port, the connection is cancelled and must be started again. All items received through in frared are placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging. Positioning the devices away from each other breaks the connection, but the infr ared light beam remains active on your device until it deactivate s. Bluetooth Select Menu > Connectivity > Bluetoot h . 112 Connectivity
About Bluetooth Bluetooth technology ena bles wireless connections between electronic devices within a range of 10 metres (33 feet). A Bluetooth conn ection can be used t o send images, videos, te xt, business cards, calendar notes, or to connect wirelessly to devices that use Blue tooth technology. Since devices using B luetooth technology communicate using radio wa ves, your device and the other devices do not need to be in direct line-of-sight. The two devices only need to be within a maxim um of 10 metres of each other, although the connection can be subject to interference from obstructions such as walls or other electronic devices. Several Bluetooth conn ections can be active at a time. For example, if your device is connected to a headset, you can also tr ansfer files to another compat ible device at the same time. Features usin g Bluetooth tech nology increase t he demand on battery power an d reduce the battery life. Send and receive data with Bluetooth 1. When you activate Bluetooth for the first time, you are asked to give a name to your device. Giv e your device a uniqu e name t o make it eas y to reco gnis e if there are several Bluetooth devices nearby. 2. Select Bluetoot h > On . 3. Select My phone's visibili ty > Shown to all or Define p eriod . If you select Define period , you need to define the time during which your device is visible to others. Your device and the name you entered can now be seen by other users with devices using Bluetooth t echnology. 4. Open the application wh ere the item you want to send is stored. 5. Select the item and Optio ns > Send > Via Blueto oth . The device searches for other devices using Bluetooth technology within range and lists them. Tip: If you have sent data using Bluetooth before, a list of the pr evious sea rch results is displayed. To search for more Bluetooth devices, select More devices . 6. Select the device wi th which you want to connect. If the other device requires pairing before data can be transmitted, you are asked to enter a passcode. When the connection ha s been established, Se nding data is shown. The Sent folder in the Messa ging application does not store messages sent using Bluetooth connectivity. To receive data using Bluet ooth, select Bluetooth > On and My phone's visibility > Shown to all to receive data from a non-paired device or Hidden to receive data from a paired device only. When you receive data through Blue tooth, depending on the settings of an active profil e, a tone soun ds, and you are asked if you want to accept the message in which the 113 Connectivity
data is included. If you accept, the mes sage is placed in the Inbox folder in the Messaging application. Tip: You can access th e files in the device or on the memory card using a compatible accessory that supports the File Transfer Profile Client service (for example, a laptop computer). A Bluetooth connection is disconnected automatically after sending or receiving da ta. Only Nokia PC Suite and some enhancements such as headsets may maintain a connection even if not actively used. Pair devices Open the paired devices tab. Before pairing, decide on your own passcode (1-16 digits), and a gree with the user of the other device to use the same code. Devices th at do not have a user interface have a fixed passcode. You need the passcode only when you connect the devices for the first ti me. After pairing, it is possible to authorise the connection. Pairing and authorising the connection makes connecting quicker and easier, as you do not have to accept the connection betw een paired devices every time you establish a connection. The passcode for remote SIM access must have 16 digits. 1. Sele ct Options > New paired device . The dev ice starts to search for Bluetooth de vices within range. If you have sent data using Bluetooth before, a list of the previous search results is displayed. To sea rch for more Bluetooth devices, select More devices . 2. Select the device with which you want to pair, and enter the passcode. The same pass code must be entered to the o ther device as w ell. 3. Sele ct Yes to make the connection between your device and the other device automatic, or No to confirm the connection manually every time a connection attemp t is made. After pairing, the device is saved to the paired devices page. To give a nic kname to the pa ired device, select Options > Assign short name . The nickname is only displayed in your device. To delete a pairing, select the device whose pairin g you want to delete and Options > Delete . To delete all pairings, select Opti ons > Delete all . If y ou are currently connected to a devi ce and cancel the pairing with that device, pairing is removed immediately, and the connection is ended. To allow a paired device to connect automatically to your device, select Set as authorised . Connections between your device and th e other device can be made without your knowledge. No separate ac ceptance or authorisation is needed. Use this status for your ow n devices, such as your compatible headset or computer, or devices that belong to someone you trust. If you want to accept connection requests from the other device separately every time, select Set as unautho rised . To use a Bluetooth audio enhancement such as a Bluetooth handsfree or headse t, you need to pair your device with the enhancem ent. See the enhancement user guide for the passcod e and further instructions. 114 Connectivity
To connect to the audio en hancement, switch on the enhancement. Some aud io enhancements connect automatically to your device. Ot herwise open the paired devices tab, scroll to the enha nc ement, and select Options > Connect to audio devi ce . Security tips When you ar e not using Bluetooth connect ivity, select Bluetooth > Off or My phone's visibility > Hidden . Do not pair with an unknown device. SIM access profile With the SIM access profile, you can access the SIM card of your device from a compatible car kit device. This way, you do not need a separate S IM card to access SIM card data and connect to th e GSM network. To use the SIM access profile, you need the following: ⢠Compatible car kit device that suppor ts Bluetoo th wireless technology ⢠Valid SIM card in your device When the wireless device is in the remote SIM mode, you can only u se a compatible connect ed enhancement, such as a car ki t, to make or receive calls. Your wireless device will not make any calls, except to the emergency numbers progra mmed into your devi ce, while in this mode. To make calls from your device, you must first leave the remote SI M mode. If the devic e has been locked, enter the lock code to unlock it first. For more information about car kit devices and compatibility with your device, see the Nokia web site and your car kit user guide. Use the SIM access profile 1. Select Menu > Connec tivity > Bluetooth > Remote SI M mode > On . 2. Activate Bluetoo th in the car kit. 3. Use your car kit to start a s earch for compatible devices. For instructions, see the user guide of your car kit. 4. Select your device from the list of compatible device s. 5. To pair the devices, enter the B luetooth passcode shown on the display of the car kit to your device. Tip: If you have already accessed the SIM card from the car kit with the active user profile, the car kit searches automatically for a device with the SIM card. If it finds your device, and automatic authorisation is a ctivated, the car kit automatically connects to t he GSM network when you switch on the car ignition. When you acti vate the remote S IM access pro file, you can use applications on your device that do not need network or SIM services. To make connections between your device and the car kit without separate acceptance or authorisati on, select Menu > Connectivity > Bluet ooth , a nd open 115 Connectivity
the paired devices tab. Scroll to the car kit, press the scroll key, and enter the Bluetoo th passcode. When the device asks to make the connection automatic, select Yes . If you select No , connection requests from this car kit must be accepted separately every time. To end the remote SIM access connection from your device, select Menu > Connectivity > Bluetooth > Remote SI M mode > Off . Wireless LAN Your device can detect and connect to a wireless local area network (WLAN). To us e WLAN, a netw ork must be available in the location and your device must be connected to it. WLAN connections Important: Always enable one of the available encryption methods to increase th e security of your wireless LAN connection. Usin g encryption reduces the risk of unauthorised access to your data. To use WLAN, you must create an internet a ccess point in a WLAN. Use the access point for applications that need to connect to the inte rnet. A WLAN connection is established when you create a data connection using a WLAN access point. The active WLAN connection is ended when you end the da ta connection. You can al so end the connection manually. See "Connection manager" , p. 118 . You can use WLAN during a voice call or when packet data is active. You can only be connected to one WLAN access point device at a time, but several applicat ions can use the same internet access point. When the device is in the O ffline profile, you can still use WLAN, if available. Remember to comply with any applicable safety requirements when establishing and using a WLAN con nection. If you move the device to another location within the WLAN and out of range of a WLAN acce ss point, the roaming functionality can automatically connect your device to another access point that belongs to the same WLAN. As long as you rema in within range of access points that belong to the same network, your device can stay connected to the network. Tip: To check the unique media access control (MAC) address th at identi fies your device, for example to configure the MAC address of your device to a WLAN router, enter *#6220 9526# on the device keypad. The MAC address is shown on the device display. See WLAN availability To have your device show WLAN availabilit y, select Menu > Tools > Se ttings > Co nnection > Wireless LAN > Show WLAN availability . If WLAN is available, is shown on the display. 116 Connectivity
Tip: You can also scan fo r networks in range. WLAN wizard Select Menu > Connectivity > WLAN w iz. . The WLAN wizard helps you find an d connect to a wireless LAN. When you open the application, your device starts to scan for av ailable WLANs and list s them. To update the list of available WLAN s, select Options > Refresh . To ma r k u p W L A N s in t h e l i st of found networks, select Filter WLAN net works . The selected networks are filtered out the next time the ap plication searches for wireless LANs. To start or continue browsing the web using the access point of the WLAN, scroll to the desired n etwork, and select Options > Start web brows ing or Cont.web browsing . To disconnect the activ e connection to the WLAN , select Options > Disconnect WLAN . To view the details of the WLAN, select Option s > Details . To save the access point of the WLAN, select Options > Define access point . Always enable one of the av ailable encryption methods to increase the security of your WLAN connection. Using encryption reduces the risk of unauthorised access to your dat a. Use the wizard on the home screen On the home screen, the WL AN wizard shows the status of your WLAN connections and network searches. To view the available options, scroll to the row showing the status, and p ress the scroll key . Depending on t he status, you can st art the web browser using a WLAN connection, connect to y our net call service, disconnect from a WLAN, search for WLANs, or set the network scanning on or off. If WLAN scanning is off and you are not connected to any WLAN, WLAN scanning off is displayed on the home screen. To set scanning on and search for available WLANs, scroll to the row sh owing the status, and press the scroll key. To start a search for available WLANs, scroll to the row showing the status, press the scroll ke y, and select Search for WLAN . To set WLAN scanni ng off, scroll to the row showing the status, press the scroll key, and select Switch WLAN scan off . When Start web brows ing or Use for is selected, the WLAN wizard au tomatically creates an access poin t for the selected WLAN. The acce ss point can also be used with other applications re quiring WLAN connection. 117 Connectivity
If you select a secured WLAN, you are asked to enter the relevant passcodes. To connect to a hidden network, you must enter the correct service set identifier (SSID). To use the found WLAN for a net call connecti on, scroll to the row showing the status, and press the scroll key . Select Use for , the desired net ca ll service, and the WLAN to be used. Modem Select Menu > Connectivity > Modem . Together with a compatible computer, you can use your device as a modem to connect to the web, for example. Before you can use your dev ice as a modem ⢠You need an appropriate data communications software on your computer , such as Nokia PC Suite. For more information, see the Nokia PC Suite guide. ⢠You must subscribe to the appropria te network services from your service provider or internet service provider. ⢠You must have the appropriate drivers installed on your computer. You must install drivers for the cable connection, and you may need to ins tall or update Bluetooth or infrared drivers. To connect the device to a compatible computer using infrared, press the scroll key. Make sure the infrared ports of the device and computer are directly facing each other with no ob stacles between them. To connect your device to a computer us ing Bluetooth wireless technology, initiate the connection from the computer. To activa te Bluet ooth in your device, select Menu > Connectivity > Bluet ooth and select Bluetoot h > On . If you use a cable to connect your device to a computer, initiate the connection from the computer. You may not be able to use some of the other communication features when the device is used as a modem. Connection manager Select Menu > Connectivity > Conn. mgr. . View and end active connections To see the open data connections, select Active data connections . To view detailed information about network connections, select a conn ection from the list and Options > Details . The type of information shown depends on the connection type. To end the selected network connection, select Options > Disconnect . 118 Connectivity
To end all active network connections simult aneously, select Options > Disconnect all . Search for WLAN To search for WLANs available within range, select Available W LAN networks . The available WLANs are listed with their network mo de (infrastructure or ad- hoc), signal strengt h, and network en cryption indicators, and whether your device has an active connection with the net work. To view the details of a network, scroll to it, and press the scroll key. To create an internet access point for a network, select Options > Define access point . 119 Connectivity
Security and data management Manage the data and software on your device, and t ake care of the security of th e device and its c ontents. Important: Your device can only support one antivirus application. Having more than one application with antivirus functionality could affect performance and operation or cause the device to stop function ing. Lock the device Important: If the device has been loc ked, enter the lock code to activate the phone function. When the device is locked, calls may be possible to the official emergency number. Making an emergency call in the offline profile or when the device is locked requires that the device recognise th e number to be an official emergency number. It is advisable to change the profile or unlock the device by entering the lock code before you make the emergency call. To prevent access to the contents of your device, lock the device when in home screen. Press the power key, select Lock phone , and enter your lock code. The default lock code is 12345. To change the lock code, select Menu > T ools > Settings > General > Securit y > Pho ne and SIM card > Lock code . Enter the old code and then the new code twice. The new code can be 4-255 characters long. Both alphabet s and digits can be u sed, and both uppercase and lowercase alphabets are possible. You can also lock the device remotely by sending a text message to the device. To enable remote locking and to define the text for the message, select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Security > Ph one and SIM card > Allow remote lock > Yes . Enter the remote loc k message and con firm the messag e. The message must be at least 5 characte rs long. Memory card security Select Menu > Tools > Memory . You can protect a memory ca rd with a password to prevent unauthorised access. To set a password, select Options > Set password . The password can be up to 8 characters long and is case-sensitive. Th e password 120 Security and data m anagement
is stored in your device. You do not need to enter it again while you use the memory card on the same device. If you use the memory card on another device, you are asked for the password. Not all memory cards support password protection. To remove the memory card password, select Options > Remove password . When you remove th e password, the data on th e memory card is not protected against una uthorised use. To open a locked memory card, select Opt ions > Unlock memory card . En ter the password. If you cannot recall the password to unlock a locked memory card, you may reformat the card, in which case the card is unlocked and password removed. Formatting a memory card de stroys all data stored on the card. Encryption Select Menu > Tools > Encryption . Encrypt your device or memory card to prevent outsiders from accessing yo ur important information. Encrypt device memory or memory card To encrypt the device memory, select Phone memory . To encrypt the memory card, select Memory card and from the following: ⢠Encrypt without savin g key â Encrypt the memory card without saving the encryp tion key. If you select this option, you cannot us e the memory card in other devices, and if you restore factory settings, you cann ot decrypt the memory card. ⢠Encrypt and save key â Encrypt the mem ory card and save the key manually i n the default folder. For security, store the key to a sa fe place outsi de the device. For example, you can send the key to your computer . Enter a pas s ph rase for the key and a name for the key file. The pa ss phrase should be long and complex. ⢠Encrypt with rest ored key â Encry pt the memory card with a key you have re ceived. Select the key file, and enter the pass phrase . Decrypt device memory or memory card Always remember to decrypt the dev ice memory and/ or the memory card before updating the device software. To decrypt the device memory, select Phone memory . To decrypt the memory card without destroying the encryption key, select Memory card > Decrypt . 121 Security and data m anagement
To decrypt the memory card and destroy the encryption key, select Memory card > Decrypt and turn off enc ryption . Fixed dialling Select Menu > Communic. > Contacts > Options > SIM contacts > Fixed dial contacts . With the fixed dialling serv ice, you can restrict calls from your device to certain phone numbers. Not all SIM cards support the fixed dia lling service. Contact your service provider for more information. When fixed dialling is acti vated, calls may be possible to the official emergenc y number programmed into your device. 1. To restrict calls from your device, select Options > New SIM contact and enter the contact name and phone number to the list of numbers to which calls are allowed, or select Add from Contacts to copy the contact from Contacts. To restrict calls by a country pr efix, enter the country prefix in the list of numbers. All phone numb ers to which calls are allowed must start with this coun try prefix. 2. Sele ct Options > Activate fixed dial ling . You need your PIN2 code to activate and deacti vate fixed dialling or edit your fixed dialling contacts. Contact your service provider if you do not have the code. To cancel the service, select Options > Deactivate fixe d dialling . Tip: To send text messag es to the SIM contacts while the fixed dialling servi ce is active, you need to add the text message centre number to the fixed dialling list. Certificate manager Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Gener al > Security > Certifi cate mana gement . Digital certificates are used to verify the origins of software but do not guaran tee safety. There are four different types of certificat es: authority certificates , personal certificates, trus ted site certificates, and device certificates. During a secure connection, a server may send a server certificate to your device. Upon receipt, it is checked through an authority certif icate stored in your device. You receive notification if the identity of the server is no t authenti c or if you do no t have the correct certificate in your device. You can download a certificate from a web site, or receive a certificate as a message. Certificates should be used when you connect to an online bank or a remote server to transfer confidential information. T h e y s h o u l d a l s o b e u s e d i f y o u w a n t t o r e d u c e t h e r i s k of viruses or other maliciou s software, and to check the authenticity of software when you download and install software to your device. Tip: When you add a new certificate, check its authenticity. 122 Security and data m anagement
View certificate details You can only be sure of the correct identity of a server when the signature and the validity period of a server certificate have been checked. To view certificate details, open a certificate folder, and select a certificate and Options > Certificate details . One of the following notes may appear: ⢠Certificate not truste d â You have not set any application to use the certifi cate. You may want to change the trust settings. ⢠Expired certificate â The period of validity has ended for the sele cted certificate. ⢠Certificate not valid yet â The period of validity has not yet begun for the selected certificate. ⢠Certificate corrupted â The certif icate cannot be used. Contact the certificate issu er. Certificate trust settings Trusting a certificat e mean s that you authorise it to verify web pa ges, e-mail se rvers, software packages, and other data. Only trusted certificates can be used to verify services and software. Important: Even if the use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote conne ctions and software installation consid erably smaller, they must be used correctly in order to benefi t from increased security. The existence of a certificate does not offer any protection by itself; th e certificate manager must contain correct, authentic, or trusted certificates for increased security to be avai lable. Certificates have a restricted lifetime. If "Expired certificate" or "Certificate not valid yet" is shown, ev en if the certificate should be valid, check that the cu rrent date and time in your device are correct. Before changing an y certificate settings, you mus t make sure that you really trust the owner of the certificate an d that th e certificate really belong s to the listed owner. To change the trust sett ings, select a certificat e and Options > Trus t settings . Select an ap plication field and press the scroll key to select Ye s or No . You cannot change the trust setti ngs of a personal certificate. Depending on the certificate, a list of applications that can use the certificate is displayed: ⢠Symbian installatio n â New Symbian operating system application. ⢠Internet â E-mail and graphics. ⢠App. installation â New Java⢠application. ⢠Online certif. check â Online certificate status protocol. Security modules Select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Security > Security module . 123 Security and data m anagement
View and edit security modules To view or edit a security module, scr oll to it, and press the scroll key. To view detailed information about a security module, select Options > Security deta ils . To edit the PIN codes for the security module, select Module PIN to edit the PIN code for the security module or Signing PIN to edit the PIN code for digital signatures. You may not be able to chan ge these codes for all security modules. The key store contains the contents of the sec urity module. T o dele te the key store, se lect Ke y store , select the desired key store , and Opti ons > Delete . You may not be able to delete the key store of all security modules. Back up data It is recommended to back up device memory regularly to the memory card or a compatible computer. To back up information from the device memory to a memory card, select Menu > Tools > Memory > Options > Back up phone memory . To restore information from the memory card to the device memory, select Menu > Tools > Memory > Options > Restore from card . You can also connect your device to a comp atible computer and use Nokia PC Suite to b ack up data. Remote configuration Select Menu > Tools > Device mgr. . With Device manager, you can manage setting s, data, and software on your device remotely. You can connect to a server, and receive configuration settings for your device. You may receive server profiles and different configuration set tings from your servic e providers or company information management department. Configuration se ttings may include connection and other settings used by different applications in your device. The available options may vary. The remote configuration connection is usually started by the server when the device settings need to be updated. To create a new server profile, select Options > New server profile . You may receive these settings from your service provider in a configuration message. If no t, define the following: ⢠Server name â Enter a name for the config uration server. ⢠Server ID â Enter the unique ID to identify the configuration server. ⢠Server password â Enter a password to identify your device to the server. 124 Security and data m anagement
⢠Session mode â Select the preferred connection type. ⢠Access point â Select the access point to use for the connection, or create a new access point. You can also choose to be asked for the access point every time you start a connection. This setting is available only if you have selected Internet as the bearer ty pe. ⢠Host address â Enter the web address of the configuration server. ⢠Port â Enter the port number of the server. ⢠User nam e â Enter your user ID for the configuration server. ⢠Password â Enter your password for the configuration server. ⢠Allow configuration â Select Yes to allow the server to initiate a configuration session. ⢠Auto-accept all reques ts â Select Yes if you do not want the server to ask for your confirmation when it initiates a configuration session. ⢠Network au thenticat ion â Select whether to use http authentication. ⢠Network user name â Enter your user ID for the http authentication. This se tting is available only if you have selected Network au thenticatio n to be used. ⢠Network pa ssword â Enter your password for the http authentication. This se tting is available only if you have selected Network au thenticatio n to be used. To connect to the server and receive configuration settings for your device, select Options > Start configuration . To view the configuration log of the selected profile, select Options > View log . Application manager Select Menu > Instal lations > App. mgr. . You can install two types of applicati ons and software on your device: ⢠Applications and software specifically intended for your device or compatible with the Symbian operating system. These soft ware installation files have the extension .sis or .sisx. ⢠Java ME⢠applications comp atible with the Symbian operating system. The Java application installation file extensions are .jad or .jar. Installation files may be transferred to you r device from a compatible comp uter, downloaded during browsing, or sent to you in a multimedia mes sage, as an e-mail attachm ent , or with Bluetooth. During the installation, the device checks the integrity of the package to be installed. The device shows information about the checks being carried out, and you are given options to continue or cancel the installation. 125 Security and data m anagement
If you install applications that require a network connection, note that the power consumption of your device may increase wh en you use these applications. Tip: When browsing web pages, you can download an installat ion file and install it immediately. Note, howe ver, that the connection runs in the background during the installation. Install applications Important: Only install and us e applications and other software from trusted sources, su ch as applications that are Symbian Signed or have passed the Java Verified⢠testing. To download and install soft ware from the web, select Download apps. . Select t he applicat ion and Options > Install . To view the details of an installed software package, select the application and Opt ions > View details . To view the installa tion log, select Options > View log . A list s hows what software has been inst alled and removed, and the date of th e installation or removal. If you encounter problem s with the device after installing a software package, use this list to find out which software package may be the cause of the problem. The information in th is list may also help you pinpoint problems that are caused by software packages that a re incompatible wi th each other. To remove software, select Options > Remove . If you remove software, you can only reinst all it by using the original software package fi le, or by restoring a full backup that contains the removed software package. If you remove a software package, you may no longer be able to open files created with that software. If another software package depends on the software package that y ou removed, the other software package may stop working. Refer to the documentation of the installed software package for details. Installation settings To modify the installa tion settings, select Options > Settings and from the following: ⢠Software installation â Select to install signed applications only or all applications. ⢠Online certificate check â To check the validity of certificates when an applic ation is installed, select On . If validity cannot be verified, you are asked if you want to continue installation. ⢠Default web address â The validity of a certificate is checked from the default address if the certificate does not include its own web address. To change the default address, select Default web address , and enter the new address. Java security settings To specify security settings for a Java applicati on, select Options > Settings . 126 Security and data m anagement
You can define which functions the Java application can access. The value that you ca n set for each functionality depends on the protection domain of the software package. ⢠Access point â Select an access point that the application may use wh en making net work connections. ⢠Network access â Allow the appli cation to create a data connectio n to the network. ⢠Messaging â Allow the app lication to send messages. ⢠Application auto-start â Allow the application to start automati cally. ⢠Connecti vity â Allow the a pplication to activate a data connection , such as a Blu etooth connection . ⢠Multimedia â Allow the appl ication to use the multimedia features of your device. ⢠Read user data â Allow the application to read your calendar entries, contacts , or any other personal data. ⢠Edit user data â Allow the applicat ion to add personal data, such as entries to Con tacts. ⢠Positio ning â Allow the appl ication to use the location data in your device. ⢠Landma rks â Allow th e application to use the landmarks in your device. You can define how you are prom pted to confirm the Java application's access to the device functions. Select one of the following values: ⢠Ask every time â Require the Java application to ask for your confirmation each time it use s the functionali ty. ⢠Ask first time â Require the Java application to ask for initial confirmation to use the functionality. ⢠Always allowed â Allow the Java application to use the functionality with out your confirmation. The security s ettings help protect your dev ice against harm ful Java app lications that may use the functions of your device without your permission. Only select Always allowed if you know the supplier and trustworthiness of the application. ⢠Not allowed â Prevent the Java application from using the fu nctionality. Activation keys Select Menu > Tools > Actv. keys . Some media files, such as im ages, music, or video clips, are protected by digital usage rights. The activation keys for such files may allow or restrict their usage. For example, with som e activation keys you may li sten to a music track only a limited num ber of times. During one playback session you may rewind, fast -forward, or pause the track, but once you stop it, y ou have used one of the instances allowed. Use activation keys Digital rights manag ement (DRM) protected con tent comes with an associated activation key that defines your rights to use the content. If your devi ce has OMA DR M-protected c ontent, to back up both the ac tivation keys and the content, us e the 127 Security and data m anagement
backup feature of Nokia PC Suite. Other transfer methods may not transfer the activ ation keys which need to be restored with the content for you to be able to continue the use of OMA DRM-protected content after the device memory is formatted. You may also need to restore the activation keys in case the files on your device get corrupted. If your d evice has WM DRM-protected c ontent, both the activation keys and the content wi ll be lost if the device memory is formatted. You may also lose t he activation keys and the content if the files on your device get corrupted. Losing the activati on keys or the content may limit your ability to use the same content on your device again. For more information, contact your service provider. Some activation keys may be connected to a specific SIM card, and the protected content can be accessed only if the SIM card is inserted in the device. To view your activation keys by typ e, select Valid keys , Invalid ke ys , or Not in use . To view the key details, select Options > Key details . The following details are displayed for each media file: ⢠Status â The status is Activatio n key is valid , Activation key expired , or Activation key not yet valid . ⢠Content sending â Allowed means that you can send the file to another device. Not allo wed means that you cannot send the file to another device. ⢠Content i n phone â Yes means that the file is in the device and the path of the file is displayed. No means that the related file is not currently in the device. To activate a key, g o to the Activat ion keys main view , and select Invalid keys > Options > Get activati on key . Establish a network connection at the prompt, and you are directed to a web site where you ca n purchase rights to the media. To remove file rights, open the valid keys tab or the keys not in use tab, scroll to the desired file, and select Options > Delete . If there are several rights related to the same media file, all th e rights are deleted. The group key view displays a ll of the files related to a group right. If you have downloaded multiple media files with the same rights, th ey are all displayed in this view. You can open the group view from either the valid k e y s o r i n v a l i d k e y s t a b s . T o a c c e s s t h e s e f i l e s , o p e n t h e group rights folder. Data synchronisation Select Menu > Tools > Sync . With Sync, you can synchronise your contacts , calendar entries, or notes with corresponding applications on a compatible computer or remote internet server. Yo ur synchronisation settings are saved in a synchronisation profile. The Sync application uses SyncML technology for remote synchronisation. For information on SyncML compatibility, contact the 128 Security and data m anagement
supplier of the applications with which you want to synchronise your device. You may receive the syn chronisation settin gs as a message from your service provider. The available applications you can sy nchr onise may vary. Contact your service provider for more information. Create a synchronisation profile There is a Nokia PC Suit e synchronisation profile available in your device. You do not need to edit it if you synchron ise your device wit h a computer using Nokia P C Suit e. To create a new profile, select Options > New sync profile and as sign a name fo r the profile, select the applications to synchronise with the profile, and specify the needed connect ion settings. Contact your service provider for details. Select applications to synchronise 1. To select the applications to synchronise with a synchronisation profile, select Options > Edit sync profile > Applications . 2. Select the desired application, and select Include in sync > Yes . 3. Specify the Remote databas e and Synchro nisatio n type setti ngs. Synchronisation connection settings To define the connection settings of a new profile, select Options > New sync profile > Connection settings and define the following settings: ⢠Server versio n â Select the Syn cML version yo u can use with the remote server. ⢠Server ID â Enter the server ID of the remote server. This setting is only available if you select 1.2 as the SyncML version. ⢠Data bearer â Select the data bearer to connect to the remote server during synchroni sation. ⢠Access point â Select the access point to use for the synchronisation connection, or create a new access point. You can also choose to be asked for the access point every time you start synchronising. ⢠Host address â Enter the web address of the server that contains the data base with which you wa nt to synchronise yo ur device. ⢠Port â Enter the port number of the remote databas e serve r. ⢠User name â E n t e r y o u r u s e r n a m e t o i d e n t i f y y o u r device to the server. ⢠Passwor d â Enter your password to identify your device to the server. 129 Security and data m anagement
⢠Allow sync requests â To allow synchronisation to start from the remote databa se server, select Yes . ⢠Accept all sync requests â To have your device ask for your confirmation befor e accepting synchronisation from the server, select No . ⢠Network authent ication â To authenticate your device to the network before synchronisation, select Yes . Enter your network user name and netw ork password. Mobile VPN Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > VPN . The Nokia m obile virtual pr ivate networ k (VPN) client creates a secure conn ect ion to compatible corporate intranet and ser vices, such as e- mail. Your device connects from a mobile network, through the in ternet, to a corporate VPN gateway tha t acts as a front door to the compatible corporate network. VPN client uses IP Security (IPSec) tech nology. IPSec is a framework of open standa rds for supp orting secure exch ange of data over IP networks. VPN policies define the method used by the VPN client and a VPN gateway to authentica te each other, and the encryption algorithms that they use to help protect the confidentiality of da ta. Contact your comp any's IT department for a VPN policy. To install and con figure the VPN client , certificates, and policies, contact the IT administrator of your organisation. Manage VPN Select VPN management , and from the following: ⢠VPN policies â Install, view, and update VPN policies. ⢠VPN policy servers â Edit the connection settings of VPN policy servers from which you can install and update VPN policies. A policy server refers to a Nokia Security Service Manag er (NSSM), which is no t necessarily required. ⢠VPN log â View the log for your VPN policy installations, updates an d synchronisations, and other VPN connections. Create VPN access points Select Settings > Co nnectio n > VPN . An access point is where yo ur phone connects to the network. To use e-mail and mult imedia services or to browse web pages you must first define internet a ccess points for these services. VP N access po ints pair VPN policies with regular intern et access points to create secure connections. Your service provider may preset some or all ac cess points for your device, and you may not be able to create, edit, or remove them. 130 Security and data m anagement
Contact your company's IT department for the correct settings. Open a destination, select a VPN access point, select Edit , and define the following: ⢠Connection name â Enter a name for the VPN access point. ⢠VPN policy â Select the VPN policy to combine with the internet access point. ⢠Internet access point â Select the internet access point wi th which to combin e the VPN polic y to create secure connections for data transfer. ⢠Proxy server addres s â Enter the proxy server address of the private network. ⢠Proxy port numb er â Enter the proxy port number. Use a VPN connection in an application You may have to prove your i dentity when you log on to the enterpri se network. Cont act your comp any's IT department for the credentials. To use a VPN connection in an application, the application must be associat ed with a VPN a ccess point. Tip: You can configure the application's connection setting to Always ask , in which ca se you select the VPN access p oint from a list of connections when a conn ection is established. 1. In the applicat ion in which you w ant to create a VPN connection, s elect a VPN access p oint as the access point. 2. If you are using legacy a uthentication, enter your VPN user name and passcode or password. If the SecurID token has become out of synchronisation with the clock of the ACE/Server, enter the next passcode. If you are us ing certificate-based authentication, you ma y have to enter the key store password. Barcode reader Select Menu > Tools > Barcode . Use the Barcode reader application to decode barcodes. The codes may co nt ain information such as URL links, e-mail addres ses, phone numbers, and business cards. The Barcode read er does not support 1D codes. The Barcode reader uses the camera in your device to scan codes. To scan a code, sele ct Scan code . After a valid code is detected in the viewfinder, the decoded information appears on the dis play. To scan a code that is located at some distance from your device, deactivate the close-up mode by selecting Options > Deactiv. clo se- up mode . To save the scanned data, select Options > Save . The data is saved in the BCR file format. To save scanned da ta to Contac ts, select Options > Add to Contacts or Save business card , depending on 131 Security and data m anagement
the data you are saving. If th e data you scanned includes a mobile phone num ber or an e-mail address, you can call or send a message to the nu mber or send an e-mail to the address by selecting Options > Call or Op tions > C reate message: . If the data you scanned includes a URL link, you can open i t by selecting Opti ons > Op en link . To view previously saved, decoded info rmation, select Saved data in the main view. 132 Security and data m anagement
Settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings . You can define and modify various settings of your device. Modifying these se ttings affects the operation of your device across several applications. Some settings may be preset for the device or sent to you in a special message by your service provider. You may not be able to change such s ettings. Select the setting you want to edit to do the following: ⢠Switch between two values , such as on or off. ⢠Select a value from a list. ⢠Open a text editor to enter a value. ⢠Open a slider to decrease or increase the value by scrolling left or right. General settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > General . Select from the following: ⢠Personalisation â Change the display setting s and personalise the device. ⢠Date and time â Change the date and time. ⢠Slide handling â Change the slide settings. ⢠Enhancement â Define the settings for your enhancements. ⢠Security â Define the security settings. ⢠Factory settings â Restore the original settings of the device. ⢠Positio ning â Define the positioning method and server for GPS-based applicat ions. Personalisation settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation . Display settings To turn the automatic display rotat ion on or off, select Display > Display rotation . To select whether you wan t the image to change to full screen in the landscape mode, select Displ ay > Turn to full view . To define the level of ligh t that the device needs before switching on the backlight, select Display > Light sensor . To change the text size, select Display > Font size . 133 Settings
To adjust the length of time the display can be left idle before the screen saver is activated, select Display > Power saver time-out . To select a welcome note or logo for the display, select Display > Welcome note / logo . You can either choose the default welcome note, enter your own text, or select an imag e. To set how quickly the display dims after th e last keypress, select Display > Light time-out . Standby mode settings To select whether to use the home screen, select Home screen > Home screen . To change the home screen mode settings, select Home screen > Mode settings . To assign shortcuts for the de vice keys, select Home screen > Key shortcuts . These shortcuts are not available in the home scree n. To select whether to show or hide the operator logo, select Home screen > Operator logo > On or Off . To select the mailbox that is shown in the home screen, select Home screen > Home screen mailbox . Tone se ttings To select a ringing tone for voice calls, select Tones > Ringing tone . To select a ringing tone for video calls, select Tones > Video call tone . To set the ri nging type, select Tones > Ringing type . You can also s et the device to sound a ringing tone that is a combination of the sp oken name of the caller and the sele cted ringing tone, when someon e from your contacts li st calls you. Select Tones > Say caller's name . To set the volume level of the ringing tone, select Tones > Ringing volume . To set the various alert t ones, select To nes > Message alert tone , E-ma il alert tone , Calendar alarm tone , or Clock alarm tone . To set the device to vibrate when you receive a call, select Tones > Vibr ating alert . To set the volume level of the device keypad tones, select Tones > Ke ypad ton es . To set the warning tones on or off, select Tones > Warning tones . To select whet her you want the alarms and incom ing calls to be silenced when you turn the device face down, sel ect Turn to silence . To select whet her you want the alarms and incom ing calls to be silenced when you tap the device twi ce, select Tap to sile nce . Language settings To set the lan guage used on th e device display, select Language > Phone language . To select the language in which you write notes and messages, select Language > Writing language . 134 Settings
To select whether to use the predictive text input, select Language > Predicti ve text . Notification light When you receive a message or miss a call, the scroll key starts blinking to indicate the event. To set the length of time you wan t the scroll key to blink, select Notification light > Blink light for . To select of which events you want to be notified, select Notification light > Notified event s . Settings for One-touch keys Select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > One-touch keys . To select which application and task is opened when you press a One-touch key, select the key and Options > Open . To restore the preset applications and tasks, select Restore def aults . Date and time settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Date and time . To set the current date and time, select Date and Time . To define your time zone, select Time zone . To update the time, date , and time zone information automatic ally (network service), select Networ k operator time > Auto-update . To select whether to use th e 12-hour or 24-hour clock system and with w hich symbol to separa te hours and minutes, sele ct Time format an d Time separa tor . To determine the date format and se parator, select Date format and Date separato r . To define the clock type, select Clock type > Analogue or Digital . To select the tone for the alarm clock, select Clock alarm tone . To determine the week days that are work days for you, select Workdays . Slide settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Slide handling . To select whether you want to answer a ca ll by opening the slide, select Opening the s lide . To select whether y ou want to end a call by closing the slide, select Closing the slid e . To select whether you want to lock the keypad when you close the slide, select Keyguard acti vation . 135 Settings
Enhancement settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Enhancemen t . Common enhancement settings With most enhancements, you can do the following: To determine which profile is activated when you attach an enhancement to your device, select the enhancement and Default profile . To let the device answer phone ca lls automatically af ter 5 seconds when an enhanc ement is attached, select Automati c answer > On . If the ringing type is set to Beep once or Sile nt in the selected profile, the automatic ans wer is disabled. To illuminate the device while it is a ttached to an enhancement, select Lights > On . E-mail key settings To select which mailbox to open with the e-ma il key, select E-mail key settings > E-mail key , and press the scroll key. Security settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Security . Define the following security settings: ⢠Phone and SIM card â Adjust the s ecurity set tings for your device and SIM card. ⢠Certificate management â Manage your security certificates. ⢠Security module â Manage your se curity module. Avoid using codes that are si milar to emergency numbers to prevent acciden tal dialling of the emergency number. Codes are shown as asterisks. When you chan ge a code, en ter the current code, then the new code twice. Device and SIM card security To change the PIN code, select Phone and SIM card > PIN code . The new code mu st be 4 to 8 digits lon g. The PIN code protects your SIM ca rd against un authorised use and is provided with the SIM card. After three consecutive incorrect PIN co de entries, the code is blocked, and you need to use the PUK code to unblock it before you can us e the SIM card again. To set the keypad to lock a utomatically after a defined period, select Phone and SIM card > Keypad autolock period . To set a t ime-out aft er which the dev ice is automatically locked and can be used only if the correct lock code is entered, select Phone and SIM card > Phone autol ock period . Enter a number for the time- out in minutes, or select None to set off the autolock period. When the device is locked, you can still answer incoming calls, and calls may still be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your devic e. 136 Settings
To set a new lock code, select Phone and SI M card > Lock code . The preset lock code is 12345. Enter the current code and then the new code twice. The new code can be 4-255 characters long. Both alphabets and digits can be used, and bo th uppercase and lowercase alphabets are possible. The device notifies you if the lock code is not properly formatted. Restore original settings To restore the original device settings, select Factory settings . To do this, you need your device lock code. After resetting, the device may take a long er time to power on. Documents, cont act information, calendar entries, and files are unaffected. Telephone settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Phone . Select from the following: ⢠Call â Define general call settings. ⢠Call divert â Define your call divert settings. See "Call divert" , p. 88 . ⢠Call barring â Define your call barring settings. See "Call barring" , p. 88 . ⢠Network â Adjust the network settings. Call settings To display your phone number to the person you are calling, select Call > Send my caller ID > Ye s . To let the network determ ine whether yo ur caller ID is sent , select Set by network . To display your net call address to the person you are calling using a net call, select Call > Send my internet call ID > Yes . To be notified of a new incoming call while you have a call in progress, select Call > Call waiting > Options > Activ ate . To check if the function is active on the network, select Options > Check status . To select whether net calls alert or not, select Call > Internet cal l alert . You are notified of missed net calls with a notification. To set the default call type, select Call > Default call type and select Voice call if you make a GSM calls, or Internet call if you make net calls. To send a text message a utomatically to the pe rson who is calling you inform ing why you cannot ans wer the incoming call, select Call > Reject call with SMS > Ye s . To set the text for the message, select Call > Message text . Network settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Phone > Network . 137 Settings
To select the n etwork mo de, select Network mode and Dual mode , UMTS , or GSM . In the dual mode, the device switches automatica lly between networks. Tip: UMT S enables faster data transfer, but may increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life. In region s close to both GSM and UMTS networks, selecting Dual mode may cause constant ju mping between the two networks, which also in creases the dema nd on battery power. To select the operator, select Operator selectio n and Manual to choose from available networks, or Automati c to have the device select the net work automatica lly. To set the device to indicate when it is used in Micro Cellular Network (MCN), select Cell info display > On . Connection settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection . Select from the following: ⢠Bluetooth â Edit the Bluetooth settings. See "Send and receive data with Blue tooth" , p. 113 . ⢠USB â Edit the data cable settings. See "Data cable" , p. 111 . ⢠Access points â Set up new or edit existing access points. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service provider, and you may not be able to create, edit, or remove them. ⢠Packet data â Determine when packet data connections are used, and en ter the access point if you use your device as a modem for a computer. ⢠Wireless LAN â Dete rmine if the device displays an indicator when a WLAN is availa ble, and how often the device searches for networks. ⢠Data call â Set the time-out period after which data call connections au toma tically end. ⢠SIP settings â View or create session initiation protocol (SIP) profiles. ⢠Intern et tel. â Define settings for net calls. ⢠Configuratio ns â View and delete trusted servers from which your device may receive configuration settings. ⢠APN control â Restrict packet data con nections. See "Restrict packet data" , p. 143 . Access points Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connecti on > Access points . An internet access point is a collection of settings, which define how the devi ce creates a data connection to the network. To use e-ma il and multimedia services or to browse web pages, you must first define access points for these services. Some or all access points may be preset for your device by your service provider, and you may not be a ble to create, edit, or remove them. To create a new a ccess point, select Options > New access point or selec t an existing access point from the 138 Settings
list and then Options > Duplicate access point to use the access point as a basis for the n ew one. Packet data (GPRS) settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Packet data . Your device supports packet data connections, such as GPRS in the GSM network. When you are using your device in GSM and UMTS netw orks, it is possible to have multiple data connecti ons active at the same t ime; access points can share a data connection, and data connections remain active, for example, during voice calls. See "Connect ion manager" , p. 11 8 . To define the packet da ta settings, select Packe t data connection and select When available to register the device to the packet data network wh en you switch the device on in a supported network, or When nee ded to establish a packet data connection only when an application or action requires it. Select Access point and enter the access point name provided by your service provider to use the device as a packet data modem to your computer. To use a hig h-speed data connection, select High speed packet access > Enabled . These settings affect all a ccess points for packet data connections. WLAN settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Wireless LAN . To have an indicator displa yed when there is a WLAN available in your current location, select Show WLAN availability > Yes . To select the interval for your device to scan for available WLANs and upda te the indicator, select Scan for networks . This setting is not available unless you select Show WLAN availability > Yes . Advanced WLAN settings Select Options > Advanced settings . The advanced WLAN settings are no rmally defined automatically, and changing them is not recommended. To edit the settings manua lly, select Automatic configuration > Disabled , and define the following: ⢠Long re try lim it â Enter the maxi mum number of transmission attempts if the device does not receive a receiving acknowledgem ent signal from the network. ⢠Short retry limi t â Enter the maximum num ber of transmission attempts if the device does not receive a clear-to-send signal from the network. ⢠RTS threshold â Select the data packet size at which the WLAN access poin t device issues a request to send before sending the packet. ⢠TX power level â Select the power level of your device when sending data. 139 Settings
⢠Radio measurements â Enable or disable the radio measurements. ⢠Power saving â Select whether to use the WLAN power saving mechanism to save the power in the device battery. Using the power saving me chanism enhances the battery performance but may weaken WLAN interoperability. To restore all settings to their ori ginal values, select Options > Restore default s . WLAN security settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points > Options > New access point , or select an access point and Option s > Edit . In the access point settin gs, sele ct WLAN security mode and the desired mode. WEP security settings Select WEP as the WLAN security mode. The wired equivalent privacy (WEP) encryption method encrypts data before it is transmit ted. Access to the network is denied to users who do not have the required WEP keys. When th e WEP security mode is in use, and your device rece ives a data packet not encrypted wit h the WEP keys, the data is dis carded. In an ad-hoc n etwork, all devic es must use the sa me WEP key. Select WLAN security sett ings and from the following: ⢠WEP key in use â Select the desired WEP key. ⢠Authen tication type â S elect Open or Shared . ⢠WEP key settings â Edit the settings for the WEP key. WEP key settings In an ad-ho c network, a ll devices must us e the same WEP key. Select WLAN securit y settings > WEP key settings and from the following: ⢠WEP encryptio n â Select the desired WEP encryption key length. ⢠WEP key format â Select whether you want t o enter the WEP key data in ASC II or Hexadecim al format. ⢠WEP key â Enter the WEP key data. 802.1x security settings Select 802.1x as the WLAN security mode. 802.1x a uthenticates an d authorises devices to a ccess a wireless network, and prevents access if the authorisation process fails. Select WLAN security sett ings and from the following: ⢠WPA/WPA2 â Se lect EAP (Ex tensible Authentication Protocol) or Pre-shared key (a secret key used for device identification). 140 Settings
⢠EAP plug-in settings â I f you selected WPA/ WPA2 > EAP , select which EAP plug-ins defined in your device to use with the access point. ⢠Pre-shared key â I f you selected WPA/WP A2 > Pre-shared key , enter the shared private key that identifies your device to the WLAN to which you connect. WPA security settings Select WPA/WPA2 as the WLAN security mode. Select W LAN security se ttings and from the following: ⢠WPA/WPA2 â Sel ect EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) or Pre-shared key (a secret key used for device identification). ⢠EAP plug-in settings â If you select WPA/WPA2 > EAP , select which EAP p lug-ins defined in yo ur device to use with the access poin t. ⢠Pre-shared key â If you select WP A/WPA2 > Pre- shared key , enter the shared private key that identifies your device to the WLAN to which you connect. ⢠WPA2 only mode â To allow both TKIP and AES (Advanced Encryption Stan dard) encryption, select Off . To allow AES only, select On Wireless LAN plugins Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points . The EAP (extensible authenti cation protocol) plug-ins are used in wireless networks to authenti cate wireless devices and authentication servers, and the different EAP plug-ins make possible the use of various EAP methods (network service). You can view the EAP p lug-ins current ly installed in your device (network service). EAP plug-ins 1. To define the EAP plug-in settings, select Opti ons > New access point an d define an access point that uses WLAN as a data bearer. 2. Select 802. 1x or WPA/WPA2 as the security mode. 3. Select WLAN security se ttings > WPA/W PA2 > EAP > EAP plug-in setting s . Use EAP plug-ins To use an EAP plug-i n when you connect to a WL AN using the access point, select the desired plug-in a nd Options > Enable . The EAP plug-ins enabled for use with this access point have a check mark nex t to them. To not use a plug-in, select Optio ns > Disable . To edit the EAP plug-in settings, select Options > Edit . To change the priority of th e EAP plug-in settings, select Options > Raise priorit y to attempt to use the plug- in before other plug-ins when connecting to the network with the access point, or Options > Lower priority to use this plug-in for network authentication after attempting to u se other plug-ins. 141 Settings
See the device help for more information on EAP plugins. Session initiation protocol (SIP) settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > SIP settings . Session initiation protocols (SIP) a re used for creat ing, modifying, and terminating certain types of communication sessions with one or more participants (network service). Typical communication sessions are video sharing and net calls. SI P profiles include settings for these sessions. The SIP profile used by default for a communication session is underlined. To create a SIP profile, select Optio ns > New SIP profile > Use default profile or Use exis ting profile . To select the SIP profile you want to use by default for communication sessions, select Op tions > Default profile . Edit SIP profiles Select Optio ns > Edit , and select from the following: ⢠Profile name â Enter a name for the SIP profile. ⢠Service prof ile â Select IETF or Nokia 3GPP . ⢠Default access poin t â Select the access point to use for the intern et connection. ⢠Public user name â Enter your user name received from your service provider. ⢠Use compr ession â Select if compression is used. ⢠Registration â Select the registration mode. ⢠Use securit y â Select if security negotiation is used. ⢠Proxy serve r â Enter the proxy server settings for this SIP profile. ⢠Regist rar server â Enter the registration server settings for this SIP profile. Edit SIP proxy servers Select Options > New SIP prof ile or Edit > Proxy server . Proxy servers are intermed iate servers between a browsing service and its use rs used by some service providers. These servers may provide additional security and speed up access to the service. Select from the following: ⢠Proxy ser ver a ddress â Enter the h ost name or IP address of the proxy server in use. ⢠Realm â Enter the proxy server realm. ⢠User nam e and Password â Enter your user na me and password for the proxy serv er. ⢠Allow loose routing â Select if loose routing is allowed. ⢠Transport type â Select UDP , Auto , o r TCP . ⢠Port â Enter the port number of the proxy server. 142 Settings
Edit registration servers Select Options > New SIP profile or Edit > Registrar server . Select from the following: ⢠Registrar server address â Enter the host name or IP address of the re gistrar server in use. ⢠Realm â Enter the registrar server realm. ⢠User name and Password â Enter your user name and password for the registrar server. ⢠Transport type â Select UDP , Auto , or TCP . ⢠Port â Enter the port number of the registrar server. Net call settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Internet te l. . To create a new net call profile, select Option s > Ne w profile . To edit an existing profile, select Options > Edit . Configuration settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Configurations . You can receive messages from your service provider or company information management containing configuration settings for tru sted servers. These settings are automa tically saved in Configurations . You may receive configuration settings for access points, multimedia, or e- mail services, and IM or synchronisation settings from trusted servers. To delete configurations for a trus ted server, select Options > Delete . The configuration settings for other applications provided by this server are also deleted. Restrict packet data Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > APN control . With the access point contro l service, you can restrict packet data connections from your device to certain access points only. Your SIM card may not support the access point control servic e. Contact your s ervice provider for more information. To restrict the packet data connections from your device, select Options > Activate restrictions . You need your PIN2 code to ac tivate and deacti vate access point control or to edit th e packet data access points on the control list. To add access points that can be used for packet data connections to the control list, select Options > Add name manually . To enable connections to an operator-provided a ccess point, create an empty access point. To remove access points from the list, select Options > Remove . 143 Settings
Application settings Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Applications . Select an application from the list to adjus t its settings. 144 Settings
Shortcuts Here are some of the available keyboard shortcuts in your device. Shortcuts ca n make the use of the applications more efficient. General shortcuts General shortcuts Power key Press and hold to switch your device on and off. Press once to switch between profiles. Home screen Left selection key * Lock and unlock the keyp ad. Call key Open the call log. 0 Press and hold to open your home page in the Web browser. # Press and hold to switch between the Silent and General profiles. 1 Press and hold to call your voice mailbox. Number key (2â 9) Call a phone number using speed dialling. You must first ac tivate speed dialling at Menu > Tools > Settings > Pho ne > Call > Speed dialling > On . Web * Zoom in the page. # Zoom out the page. 2 Open the search dialog. 5 View the active pages. 8 View the page overview. 9 Open the dialog for entering a new web address. 0 Open the bookmarks folder. Image viewer Call key Send the image. 145 Shortcuts
0 Zoom out. 5 Zoom in. 7 Zoom in. Press twice for the full screen size. 4 Scroll left in the zoomed image. 6 Scroll right in the zoomed image. 2 Scroll up in the zoomed image. 8 Scroll down in the zoomed image. 3 Rotate clockwise. 1 Rotate counterclockwise. * Switch between th e full screen size and normal view. 146 Shortcuts
Glossary Glossary 3G 3rd generation mobile communications. A digital system for mobile commu nications which aim s at global use and provides increased bandwidth. 3G lets a mobile device user access a wide variety of services, such as multimedia. Ad-hoc operating mode A WLAN network mode where tw o or more devices co nnect to each other using WLAN directly without a WL AN access point. Cookies Cookies are little pieces of information, given by the serv er to you, to store information about your vis its to a web site. When you accept cookies, the server is able to evaluate your use of the web site, what you are interested in, what you want to read, and so on. DNS Domain name service. An internet service that translat es domain names such as www.n okia.com into IP addresses such as 192.100.124.195 . Domain names are easier to remember but this translation is needed because the internet is based on IP addresses. DTMF tones Dual-tone multifrequency tones. The DTMF system is used by touch-tone telephones. DTM F assigns a specific frequency, o r tone, to each key so that it can easily be identified by a microprocessor. DTMF tones allow you to communicate with voice mailboxes, computerised te lephony systems, and so on. EAP Extensible authenti cation protocol. EAP plug-ins are used in wireless networks to authenticate wireless devices and authentica tion servers. EGPRS Enhanced GPRS. EGPRS is similar t o GPRS, but it enables faster connection. For availability and data transfer speed, contact your service provider. 147 Glossary
GPRS General packet radio service. GPRS enables wireless access for mobile phones to data networks (network service). GPRS uses packet data technology where in formation is sent in short bursts of data over the mobile network. The benefit of sending data in packets is that the network is occupied only when sending or receiving data. As GPRS uses the network efficiently, it allows for quick data connection setup and fast data transmission spee ds. You must subscribe to the GPRS service. For availability and su bscription to GPRS, contact your service provider. During a voice call, you ca nnot establish a GPRS connection, and an y existing GPRS connection is put on hold unless the network support s dual transfer mode. GPS Global positioning system. GPS is a worldwide radio navigation system. HSDPA High-speed downlink packet access. HSDPA brings high-s peed data delivery to 3G terminals, ensuring that users requiring effective multimedia capabilities benefit from data rates previously unavai lable because of limitations in the radio access network. HTTP Hypertext tran sfer protocol. A document transfer protocol used in the web. HTTPS HTTP over a secure connection. IMAP4 Internet mail access protocol, version 4. A protocol used for accessing your remote mailbox. Internet access point An access point is where your device connects to a network. To use e-mail and multimedia services or to connect to the internet and browse web pages, you must first define internet access points for these services. Infrastructur e operating mode A WLAN network mode where devices are connected to WLAN using a WLAN access point. PIN Personal identity number. The PIN code protects your device from unauthorised use. The PIN code is supplied with the SIM card. If the PIN code request is selected, the code is required each time the device is switched on. The PIN code must be 4 to 8 digits long. PIN2 The PIN2 code is supplied with some SIM cards. The PIN2 code is required to access certain funct ions supported by the SIM card. The le ngth of the PIN2 code is 4 to 8 digits. 148 Glossary
POP3 Post office protocol, version 3. A common mail protocol that can be used for accessing your remote mailbox. PUK and PUK2 Personal Unblocking Key. PUK and PUK2 codes are required to change a blocked PIN code or PIN2 code, respectively. The length of the code is 8 digits. SIP Session Initiation Pr otocol. SIP is used for creating, modifying, and terminating certain types of communication sessions with one or more participants. SSID Service set identifier. SSID is the name that identifies the specific WLAN. Streaming Streaming audio and video files means playing them direct ly from the web without downloadin g them first to your device. UMTS Universal Mobile Telecommunications System. UMTS is a 3G mobile communication syst em. Besi des voice and data, UMTS enables audio and video delivery to wireless devices. When you use your device in GSM and UMTS networks, multiple data connections can be active at the s ame time, and acce ss points can share a data connection. In the UMTS network, data connections remai n active during voice calls. You can, for example, browse the web faster than previou sly possible while simultaneously speaking on the phone. UPIN PIN code used in UMTS network. UPUK UPIN Unblocking Key. UPUK code is required to change a blocked UPIN code or PIN2 code. The length of the code is 8 digits. USIM SIM card used in UMTS network. USSD command A service request, such as request to activate an application or configure various settings remotely, t hat you can send to your operator or service provider with your device. VoIP Voice over IP technology. VoIP is a set of protocols that facilitate phone calls over an IP network, such as the internet. VPN Virtual private network. VP N creates a secure connection to compatible corporate intranet and services, such as e-mail. WAP Wireless application protocol. WAP is an international standard for wireless communica tion. 149 Glossary
WEP Wired equivalent privacy. WEP is an encryption method that encrypts data before it is transmitted in WLAN. WLAN Wireless local area network. WPA Wi-Fi Protected Access. Security method for WLAN. WPA2 Wi-Fi Protected Access 2. Security method for WLAN. 150 Glossary
Nokia original enhancements Warning: Use only batteries, chargers, and enhancements approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The use of any other types may invalidate any approval or wa rranty, and may be dangerous. For availability of appr oved enhancements, please check with your dealer. When you disconnect the power cord of any enhanc ement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord. An extensive range of enhancements is available for your device. Please visit www.nokia-asia.com/ enhancements for more details. Important : Battery talk and standby times are estimates only and de pend on signal st rength, network conditions, features used, battery age and condition, temperatures to which battery is expo sed, use in digital mode, and many othe r factors. The amount of time a device is used for calls will affect its standby time. Likewise, the amount of ti me that the device is turned on and in the standby mode will affect its talk time. 151 Nokia orig inal enhanceme nts Battery Battery model Talk time Standby BL-4U Up to 7.5/ 3.4 WCDMA ) Up to 11/14 WCDMA ) hours (GSM/ s (GSM/ day
Troubleshooting To see frequently asked qu estions about your device, visit the product support pages at t he Nokia web site. Q: What is my lock, PIN, or PUK code? A: The default lock code is 12345 . If you forget or lose the lock code, contact your device dealer. If you forget or lose a PIN or PUK code, or if you have not received such a code, contact your network service provider. Q: How do I close an applic ation that is not responding? A: Press and hold the home key. Scroll to the application, and press the backspac e key to close the application. Q: Why do images look smudgy? A: Ensure that the camera lens protection windows are clean. Q: Why do missing, discoloured, or bright dots appear on the screen every time I switch on my device? A: This is a characteristic of this type of disp lay. Some displays may contain pixels or dots that rema in on or off. This is normal, not a fault. Q: Why canâÂÂt I fi nd my friendâÂÂs devi ce while using Bluetooth connecti vity? A: Check that both devi ces are compa tible, have activated Bluetooth connecti vity, and are not in the hidden mode. Check also that the distance between the two devices is not over 10 metres (33 feet) and tha t there are no walls or othe r obstructions between the device s. Q: Why canâÂÂt I end a Bluetooth conn ection? A: If another device is connected to your device, you can end the connection usin g the other device or by deactivating B luetooth connectivity. Select Menu > Connectivi ty > Bluetooth > Bluetooth > Off . Q: Why can't I see a WLAN access point even though I know I'm within its range? A: Check that the Offline pr ofile is not in use in your devic e. The WLAN access point may u se a hidden service set identifier (SSID). You can on ly access networks that use a hidden SSID if you know the correct SSID, and have created a WLAN access point for the n etwork on your Nokia device 152 Troubleshooting
Check that the WLAN access point is not on chan nels 12-13, as they cann ot be associated with. Q: How do I switch WLA N off on my Nok ia device? A: The WLAN on your Nokia device switches off when you are not trying to connect , not connected to another access point, or not scannin g for available net works. To further reduce battery consumption, you can sp ecify that your No kia device does not s can, or scans less often, for available networks in the background. WLAN switches off in between background scans. To stop the backgrou nd scans, select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Wi reless LAN > Sho w WLAN availability > Never . You can still manually scan for available WLAN networks a nd connect to WLAN networks as usua l. To increase the background scan inte rval, select Show WLAN availability > Yes , and define the interval in Scan for networks . Q: Why can't I browse the web even though the WLAN connection is working and th e IP settings are correct? A: Check that you have define d the HTTP/ HTTPS prox y settings correctly in the advanced s ettings of your WLAN access point. Q: How do I check the signal quality of my WLAN connection? Select Menu > Connectivity > Conn. mgr. > Act ive data connection s > Optio ns > Det ails . If the signal quality is weak or mode rate, you may encounter connection problems. Try again closer to the access point. Q: Why do I have prob lems with the security mode? A: Check that you have configured th e security mode correctly, and that it is the same that the network uses. To check the security mode the n etwork uses, select Menu > Connecti vity > Conn. mgr. > Active data connections > Options > Details . Check also the following: you have th e correct WPA mode (preshared key or EAP) , you have disabled all EAP types that are not needed, and all the EAP type settings are correct (passwords, us er names, certificates). Q: Why canâÂÂt I select a contact for my message? A: The contact card does not have a phone number, an address, or an e-mail ad dress. Select Menu > Communic. > Contacts , and edit the contact card. Q: The note Retrieving message is shown briefly. What is happening? A: The device is trying to retrieve a multimedia message from the multimed ia messaging centre. This note is shown if you have s elected Menu > Communic. > Messaging > Optio ns > Settings > Multimedia message > Multimed ia retrieval > Always a utomati c . Check that the settings for multimedia messaging are defined correctly and that 153 Troubleshooting
there are no mistakes in phone numbers or addresses. See "Multimedia me ssage settings" , p. 79 . Q: How can I end the data connection when the device starts a data connection aga in and again? A: The device may be trying to retrieve a multimedia message from the multimed ia message cent re. To stop the device from making a data connection, s elect Menu > Communic. > Messagi ng > Options > Settings > Multimedia message > Multimedia retrieval > Manual to have the multimedia mes s agi ng ce ntr e s av e m es sag es to be ret ri ev ed l at er, or Off to ignore all incoming multimedia m essages. If you select Manual , you receive a notification when there is a new multimedia message that you can retrieve in the multimedia message centre. If you select Off , the device does not ma ke any network con nections related to multimedia messaging . To set the device to use a packet data connection only if you start an application or action tha t needs it, select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connecti on > Packet data > Packet data connection > When needed . If this does not help, switch the device off, and swit ch it on again. Q: How do I save battery power? A: Many features in your device increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life time. To save battery power, do the following: ⢠Switch off Bluetooth when you do not need it. ⢠Stop the background sc ans for WLAN. Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Wireless LAN > Show WLAN availability > Never . You can still manually scan for av ailable WLAN networks and connect to WLAN networks a s usual. ⢠Set the device to use a pa cket data connection only if you start an applicati on or action that needs it. Select Menu > Tools > Settings > Connection > Packet data > Packet data connection > When needed . ⢠Prevent the device from automatically downloading new maps in the Maps application. Select Menu > GPS > Maps > Optio ns > Settings > Intern et > Use network Neve r . ⢠Change the time-out after which the ba cklight is switched off. Select Menu > Tools > Settings > General > Personalisation > Display > Light time-out . ⢠Close the applications you do not use. Press and hold the home key. Scroll to the applicati on, and press the backspace key to close the application. 154 Troubleshooting >
Battery and charger information Battery and charger information Your device is powered by a rechargeable battery. The battery intended for use wi th this device is BL-4U. Nokia may make addition al battery models available for this device. This device is intended for use when supplied with power from the following chargers: AC-5. The exact charger model number may vary depending on the type of plug. The plug variant is identified by one of the follo wing: E, EB, X, AR, U, A, C, or UB. The battery can be charge d and discharged hundreds of times, but it will eventually wear out. When the ta lk and standby times are noticea bly shorter than n ormal, replace the battery. Use only Nokia appro ved batteries, and recharge your battery only with Nokia approved chargers designated for this device. Use of an unapproved battery or char ger may present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard. If a battery is being used for the first time or if the battery has not been used for a prolonged period, it may be necessary to connect the charger, th en disconnect and reconnect it to begin ch arging the battery. If the battery is co mpletely discharged, it may take several minutes before th e charging indicator appears on the display or be fore any calls can be made. Always switch the device off and disconnect the charger before removing the battery. Unplug the charger from the electrical plug and the device when not in us e. Do not leave a fully charged battery connected to a ch arger, since overcharging may shorten its lifetime. If left unused, a fully charged battery will lose its charge over time. Always try to keep the battery betw een 15ðC and 25ðC (59ðF and 77ðF). Extreme temperat ures reduce the capacity an d lifetime of the battery . A device with a hot or cold battery may n ot work temporarily. Ba ttery performance is particularly limited in temperatures well below freezing. Do not short-circuit the b att ery. Accidental short- circuiting can occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct connection of the positive ( ) and neg ative (-) terminals of t he battery. (These look like metal strips on the battery.) This might happen, for example, when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Sh ort-circuiting th e terminals may damage the battery or the connecting object. 155 Battery and charger information
Do not dispose of batteries in a fire as they may explode. Batteries may also explode if damaged. Dispose of batteries accord ing to local regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as household waste. Do not dismantle, cut, open, crush, bend, deform, puncture, or shred cells or batteries. In the event of a battery leak, do not allow the liquid to come in contact with the skin or eyes. In th e event of s uch a leak, flush your skin or eyes immediately with water, or seek medical help. Do not modify, remanufactu re, attempt to insert foreign objects into the ba ttery, or immerse or expose it to water or other liquids. Improper battery use may resu lt in a fire, explosion, or other hazard. If the device or battery is dropped, especially on a hard surf ace, and you believe the battery has been damaged, take it to a service centre for inspection before continuing to use it. Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Never use any charger or battery that is damaged. Kee p your battery out of the reac h of small children. Nokia battery authentication guidelines Always use original Nokia batteries for your safety. To check that you are getting an original Nokia ba ttery, purchase it from a Nokia au thorised service centre or dealer, and inspect the hologram label us ing the following steps: Successful completion of the steps is not a total assurance of the authenticity of the battery. If you have any reason to believe that your battery is not an authentic, original Nokia ba ttery, you should refra in from using it, and take it to the nearest Nokia authorised service centre or dealer for assistance. If authenticity cannot be verified, retu rn the battery to the place of purchase. Authenticate hologram 1. When you look at the hologram on the label, you should see the Nokia connecting ha nds symbol from one angle and the Nokia Original Enhancements logo when looking from another angle. 156 Battery and charger information
2. When you angle the hologram left, right, down and up, you should see 1, 2, 3 and 4 dots on each side respectively. What if your battery is not authentic? If you cannot confirm th at your Nokia ba ttery with the hologram on the label is an au thentic Nokia batte ry, please do not use the batter y. Take it to the nearest Nokia authorised service centre or dealer for assistance. The use of a battery that is not approved by Nokia may be dangerous and may result in poor performance and damage to your device and its accessories. It may also invalida te any approval or warranty app lying to th e device. To find out more about original Nokia batteries, see www.nokia-asia.com/batterych eck. 157 Battery and charger information
Care and maintenance Your device is a product of superior design and craftsmanship and s hould be treated with care. The following suggestions wi ll help you protect y our warranty coverage. ⢠Keep the device dry. Prec ipitation, humidity, and all types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If your device does get wet, remove the battery, an d allow the device to dry completely before replacing it. ⢠Do not use or store the device in dusty, dirty areas. Its moving parts and elec tronic components can be damaged. ⢠Do not store the device in hot areas. High temperatures can shorten the life of electronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. ⢠Do not store the device in cold areas. When the device returns to its normal temp erature, moisture can form inside the devi ce and damage electronic circuit boards. ⢠Do not attempt to open the device other t han as instructed in this guide. ⢠Do not drop, knock, or shake the device. Rough handling can break interna l circuit boards and fine mechanics. ⢠Do not use harsh chemic al s, cleaning solvents, or strong detergents to clean the device. ⢠Do not p aint the devi ce. Paint can clo g the movin g parts and prevent proper operation. ⢠Use a soft, clean, dry cloth to clean any lenses, such as camera, proximity sensor , and light sensor lenses. ⢠Use only the supplied or an appr oved replacem ent antenna. Unauthorised a ntennas, modificati ons, or attachments could dama ge the device and may violate regulations governing radio devices. ⢠Use chargers indoors. ⢠Always create a backup of data you want to keep, such as contacts an d calendar notes. ⢠To reset the device from time to time for op timum performance, power off th e device and remove the battery. These suggestions apply equally to your device, battery, charger, or any en hancement. If any device is not working properly, take it to the nearest authorised service facility for service. 158 Care and ma intenance
Additional safety information Small children Your device and its enhancements may con tain small parts. Keep them out of th e reach of small children. Operating environment This device meets RF exposure guidelines when used either in the normal use position against the ear or when positioned at least 2.2 centimetres (7/8 inch) away from the body. When a carry case, belt clip, or holder is used for bod y-worn operation, it should not contain metal and should position the devi ce the above-stated distance from your body. To transmit data files or messages, this device requires a quality connection to the network. In some cases, transmission of data files or messages may be delayed until such a connection is available. Ensure the above separation distance instru ctions are followed until the transmission is completed. Parts of the device are magnetic. Metallic materials may be attracted to the device. Do not place credit cards or other magnetic storag e media near the dev ice, because information stored on them may be erased. Medical devices Operation of any radio transmit ting equipment, including wireless phones, may interfere with the functionality of inadequately protected medical devices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off your device in health care facilities when any regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or heal th care facilities may be using equipment th at could be sensitive to external RF energy. Implanted medical devices Manufacturers of medical devices recommend that a minimum separation of 15.3 centimetres (6 inches) should be maintained betw een a wireless device and an implanted medical device , such as a pacemaker or implanted cardioverter defibri llator, to avoid potential 159 Additional safety information
interference with the medical device. Persons who have such d evices should: ⢠Always keep the wireless device more than 15.3 centimetres (6 inches) from the medical device when the wireless device is turned on. ⢠Not carry the wireless device in a breast pocket. ⢠Hold the wireless device to the ear opposite the medical device to minimise the pot ential for interference. ⢠Turn the wireless device off immediately if there is any reason to suspect that interference is taking place. ⢠Read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of their implanted medical device. If you have any questi ons about using you r wireless device with an implanted medical device, consult your health care provider. Hearing aids Some digital wireless devi ces may interfere with some hearing aids. If interfer ence occurs, consult your service provider. Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic sy stems in motor vehicles such as electron ic fuel injection systems, electronic antiskid (ant ilock) braking systems, electronic speed control systems, and air bag sy stems. For more information, check with the m anufacturer, or its representative, of your vehicle or any equipment that has been added. Only qualified personnel should service the device or install the device in a vehi cle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty that may apply to the device. Check regula rly that all wireless device eq uipment in your vehicle i s mounted and operating proper ly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive mate rials in the same compa rtment as the devi ce, its parts, or enhancements. For vehicles equipped with an air bag, r e m e m b e r t h a t a i r b a g s i n f l a t e w i t h g r e a t f o r c e . D o n o t place objects, including installed or portable wireless equipment in the area over th e air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in-veh icle wireless equipment is improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result. Using your device while flying in aircraft is prohibited. Switch off your device before boarding an aircra ft. The use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft , disrupt the wireless telephone networ k, and may be illegal. 160 Additional safety information
Potentially explosive environments Switch off your device wh en in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere, and obey all signs and instructions. Potentially explosive at mospheres include areas where you would normally b e advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire re sulting in bodily injury or even death. Switch off the device at refuelling points such as near gas pu mps at service stations. Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, storage, and dist ribution areas; chemical plants; or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially ex plosive atmosphere are often, but not always, clearly ma rked. They include below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage facilities and areas where th e air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust, or metal powders. You should check with the manufa cturers of vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (suc h as propane or butan e) to determine if this device ca n be safely used in their vicini ty. Emergency calls Important: This device operates using radio signals, wireless networks, lan dline networks, and user-programmed functions. If your device supports voice calls over the internet (internet calls ), activate both the internet calls and the cellular p hone. The device will attempt to make emergency calls over both the cellular networks and th rough your internet call provider if both are activa ted. Connections in all conditions cannot be guaranteed. You s hould never rely solely on any wireless device for essential communications like medical emergencies. To make an emergency call: 1. If the device is not on, switch it on. Check for adequate signal strength . Depending on your device, you may also need to complete the following: ⢠Insert a SIM card if your device uses one. ⢠Remove certain call restrictions you have activated in your device. ⢠Change your profile from offline or flight profile mode to an active profile. 2. Press the end key as many times as needed to clear the display and ready the device for calls. 3. Enter the official emergency num ber for your present location. Emer gency numbe rs vary by location. 4. Press the call key. When making an emergency call, give all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Your wireles s device may be the only mean s of comm unication at the scene of an accident. Do not end the call until g iven permission to do so. 161 Additional safety information
CERTIFICATION INFORMATION (SAR) This mobile device meet s guidelines for exposure to radio wav es. Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio waves recommended by international guidelines. These guidelines were developed by the independent scientific organi sation ICNIRP and include safety margins designed to assure the protection of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure guidelines for mobile devices employ a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate or SAR. The SAR limit stated in the ICNIRP guidelines is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over 10 grams of tissue. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions with the device transmitting at its highes t certified power level in a ll tested frequency bands. The actual SAR level of an operating device can be below the maximum value because the device is design ed to use only the power required to reach the network. That amou nt changes depending on a number of factors such as how close you are to a network base station. The highest SAR value under the ICNIRP guidel ines for use of the device at the ear is 1.37 W/kg. Use of device accessorie s and enhancements may result in different SAR va lues. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting and testing requirements and the netw ork band. Additional SAR information may be provided under product information at www.nokia.com. 162 Additional safety information
MANUFACTURERâÂÂS LIMITED WARRANTY This Limited Warranty is in addition to, and does not affect your legal (statu tory) rights under your applicable national laws relat ing to the sale of consumer products. Nokia Corporation (âÂÂNokiaâÂÂ) provides this Limited Warranty to person who has purchased the Nokia product(s) included in the sa les package (âÂÂProductâÂÂ). Nokia warrant s to you that du ring the wa rranty period Nokia or a Nokia authorised service compan y will in a commercially reasonable time remedy defects in material s, desi gn and work manship free of cha rge by repairing or, should Nokia in its absolute discretion deem it necessary, replacing the Product in accordance with this Limited Warra nty (unless otherwise required by law). This Limited Wa rranty is only valid and enforceable in the country where you have purchased the Product provided that it is intended for sale in that country. Warranty period The warranty period starts at the time o f Product 's original purchase by the first end-user. The Product may consist of several di fferent parts and different parts may be covered by a different warranty period (hereinafter âÂÂWarranty PeriodâÂÂ). The different Warranty Periods are: a) twelve (12) months fo r the mobile device and accessories (whether included in the mobile device sales package or so ld se parately) other than the consumable parts and access ories listed in (b) and (c) below; b) six (6) months for the following consumable pa rts and accessories: batteries, chargers, desk stands, headsets, cables a nd covers; and c) ninety (90) days for the media on which any software is provided, for example, CD-ROM or memory card As far as your national laws permit, the Warranty Period will not be extended or renewed or otherwise affected due to subseq uent resale, repair or replacement of the Product. However, repaired part(s) will be warranted for the remainder of the original Warranty Period or for sixty (60) days from the dat e of repair, whichever is longer. 163 MANUFACTURERâÂÂS LIMITED WARRANT Y
How to get warranty service If you wis h to make a clai m under the Limited Warranty, you may call the No kia call centre (where this is available and please note n ational rates appl y to calls) and/or where necessary, return your Product or the affected part (if it is not the entire Product) to a Nokia care centre or Nokia designated ser vice location. Information about Nokia care centres, Nokia designated servi ce locations and Nokia call cen tres can be found at local Nokia web pages where available. You must return your Product or the affected part (if it is not the entire Product) to a Nokia care centre or Nokia designated service location before the expiry o f the Warranty Period. When making a Limited Warra nty claim you have to present: a) the Product (or a ffected part thereto), b) the legible and unmodified orig inal proof of purchase, which clearly indicates the name and address of the seller, the date and place of purchase, the product ty pe and the IMEI or other serial number. This Limited Warranty extends only to the orig inal first end-user of the Product and is not assignable or transferable to any subsequent purchaser/ end-user. What is not covered? 1. This Limited Warra nty does not cover user manua ls or any third party software, settings, con tent, data or links, whether included/downloaded in the Product, whether included during installment, assem bly, shipping or at any other time in the delivery chain or otherwise and in any way acquired by you. To the extent permitted by applicable law(s), Nokia does not warrant that any Nokia software will meet your requirements, will work in combination with any hardware or software applications provided by a third party, that the operation of the software will be uninterrupted or error free or that any defects in th e software are correctable or will be corrected. 2. This Lim ited Warranty does not cover a ) normal wear and tear (including, without limitation, wear a nd tear of camera lenses, batteries or displays), b) transport costs, c) defects caused by rough h andling (including, without limitation, defect s caused by sharp items, by bending, compressing or drop ping, etc.), d) defects or damage caused by misuse of the Product, including use that is contrary to the instructions provided by Nokia (e.g. as set out in the P rod uct's user guide) and/or e) other acts beyond the reasonable control of Nokia. 3. This Limited Warra nty does not cover defects or alleged defects caused by th e fact that the Product was used with, or connected to , a product, accessories, software and/or service no t manufactured, supplied or authorised by Nokia or was used otherwise than for its intended use. Defects can be caused by viruses from your or from a third party's una uthorised access to 164 MANUFACTURERâÂÂS LIMITED WARRANT Y
services, other accounts, computer syst ems or networks. This unau thorised access can take place through hacking, pa ssword-mining or t hrough a variety of other means. 4. This Limited Warranty do es not cover defects caused by the fact that the battery h as been short-circuited or by the fact that the seals of the battery enclosure or the cells are broken or show evidence of tampering or by the fact that the battery ha s been used in equipment other than those for whic h it has been specified. 5. This Limited Warranty does not apply if the Product has been opened, modified or repaired by anyone other than an aut horised serv ice centre, if it is repaired using unauthoris ed spare part s or if the ProductâÂÂs serial number, the mobile accessory date code or the IM EI number has been removed, erased, defaced, altered or are illegible in any way and this shall be determined in the sole discretion of Nokia. 6. This Limited Warranty does not apply if the Product has been exposed to moisture, to dampness or to extreme thermal or enviro nmental conditions or to rapid changes in such co nditions, to corrosion, to oxidation, to spillage of food or liquid or to influence from chemical products. Other important notices A third party, independent operator provides the SIM card and cellular and/or ot her network or system on which the Product operates. Therefore, Nokia will not accept responsibility un der this warranty for the operation, availability, coverage, services or range of the cellular or other networ k or system. Before the Product can be repaired or replaced, the operator may need to unlock any SIM-lock or other lock that may have been added to lock the p roduct to a specif ic network or operator. Accordingly, Nokia does not accept responsibility for any delays in warranty repairs or for the inability of Nokia to complete warranty repairs that are caused by the operator's delay or failure to unlock any SIM-lock or other lock. Please remember to make backup copies or keep written records of all important content and data stored in your Product, be cause content and data may be lost during repair or replacement of the Product. Nokia, in a manner consistent with the provisions of the section entitled âÂÂLimitation of Nokia's Liabilityâ below, to the extent permitted by applicable law (s), shall not under any circu mstances be liable, either expressly or implied, for any damages or losses of any kind whatsoever resulting fr om loss of, damage to, or corruption of, content or data during repair or replacement of the Product. All parts of the Product or other equipment that Nokia has replaced shall become the property of Nokia. If the returned Product is found not to be covered by the terms and conditions of the Limited Warranty, Nokia and its authorised service companies reserve the right to charge a handling fee. When repairing or replacing the Product, Nokia may use products or parts that are new, equivalent to new or r econditioned. 165 MANUFACTURERâÂÂS LIMITED WARRANT Y
Your Product may contain country specific elements, including software. If the Product has been re-exported from its original destin ation country to another country, the Product may conta in country specific elements that are not consid ered to be a defect under this Limited Warranty. Limitation of Nokia's liability This Limited Warranty is your sole and exclusive remedy against Noki a and Nokia's sole and exclusive liability in respect of defects in your Product. However, this Limited Warranty shall neither exclude nor limit i) any of your legal (statut ory) rights under the app licable national laws or ii) any of your rights against th e seller of the Pr oduct. This Limited Warranty replaces all other Nokia warranties and liabilities, wh ether oral, written , (non- mandatory) statutory, contractual, in tort or otherwise, including, without limitation, and where permitted by applicable law, any implie d conditio ns, warranties or other terms as to satisfa ctory quality or fitness for purpose. To the extent perm itted by applicable law(s) Nokia does not assume any liability for loss of or damage to or corruption of data, for any loss of profit, loss of use of Products o r fu nctionality, loss of business, loss of contracts, loss of revenue s or loss of anticipated savings, increase d costs or exp enses or for an y indirect loss or damage, consequential loss or damage or special loss or damage. To the extent permi tted by applicable law, NokiaâÂÂs liability shall be limited to the purchase value of the Product. The above limitations shall not apply to death or personal injury resulting from NokiaâÂÂs proven negligence. Statutory obligations This Limited Warranty must be read subject to any statutory provisions that imply warranties or conditions into this Limite d Warranty that cannot be excluded, restricted or modified or cannot be excluded, restricted or modified except to a limited extent. If such statutory provisions apply, to the extent to which Nokia is able to do so, its liability under those provisions will be limited, at its option to, in the case of goods : the replacement of the goods or the s upply of equivalent goods, the repair of the g oods, the payment of the cost of replacing the goods or of acquiring equivalent goods, or the payment of the cost of having the goods repaired; and in the case of services: the supplying of the services again or the pa yment of the cost of having the services supplied again . Note: Your Product is a sophisticated electronic device. Nokia strongly en courages you to familia rise yourself with the user guid e and instructions provided with and for the Product. P lease also note tha t the Product might contain high precision displays, camera lenses and other such part s, which could be scratched or otherwise damaged if not handled very carefully. 166 MANUFACTURERâÂÂS LIMITED WARRANT Y
All warranty information, product features and specifications are subject to change without noti ce. Nokia Corporation Keilalahdentie 2-4 FIN-02150 Espoo Finland 167 MANUFACTURERâÂÂS LIMITED WARRANT Y
Index Symbols/Numerics 3-D ringing tones 40 802.1x security settings 140 A access points creating 138 VPN 130 activation keys 127 Active notes 104 settings 104 alarm c lock 108 alert ton es 134 altitude cal ibration 102 animated s creen save r 40 antennas 20 application setting s 144 applications common actions 25 installing 126 modifying installations 126 attachments e-mail 68 multimedia messages 73 sound clips 74 audio fi les detail s 51 sending 5 1 autolock period 13 6 B background image 40 backing up data 124 barcodes 131 battery charge level 2 5 charging 18 inserting 17 blogs 57 Bluetooth authorising devices 114 pairing 114 passcode 114 receiving data 113 security 115 sending data 113 bookmarks 57 browsing intranet 58 offline 57 web 57 C cable 111 cache emptying 5 7 Calculator 105 Calendar settings 35 calendar entries creating 34 viewing 34 calendar key 33 calendar views changing 33 call barring 88 net calls 89 call divert 88 caller ID 137 calls answering 83 barring net calls 89 call waiting 137 caller ID 137 conference call 84 fixed dialling 122 making 83 making a call from Log 94 making a net call 87 muting the ringing tone 83 net call alert 137 PTT 92 rejecting 83 168 Index
rejecting wit h text message 137 selecting type 137 settings 137 speed dialling 88 voice commands 91 voice dialling 91 voice ma il 90 camera capturing images 41 image settings 43 playing videos 43 scenes 41 sequence mode 42 toolbar 41 video clips 42 video set tings 43 viewing images 42 car kit remote SIM access 115 cell broadcast 78 settings 82 certificates details 123 settings 123 charging the battery 18 Clock alarms 108 settings 109 world clock 109 conference calls 84 configuration messages 143 connec tion metho ds Bluetooth 113 data cable 111 infrared 112 modem 118 connecti ons ending 118 GPRS settings 60 PC connection 62 WLAN settings 61 connectors 14 contact groups adding ringing to nes 36 creating 35 making conference calls 35 contacts adding 35 adding ringing to nes 36 searching 35 settings 36 contacts directories managing 36 contacts key 3 3 converting currencies 106 measurements 106 currency conversions 106 D date settings 135 decrypting device memory and memory card 121 destination removing 102 setting 102 Device manager 124 display changing the look 4 0 indicators 25 settings 133 display rotation 15 settings 133 Download! managing items 58 purchase hist ory 59 search settings 59 settings 59 subscriptions 59 DTMF tones 89 E e-mail automatic retrieval settings 81 connecting to mailbox 6 8 connection setting s 80 creating folders 69 deleting 69 POP or IMAP 67 replying 68 retrieval settings 8 1 sending 69 169 Index
setting up 67 user settings 80 writing 69 e-mail key 33 e-mail key se ttings 136 EAP plug-in settings 141 using an EAP plug-in 141 encryptin g device memory and memory card 121 ending internet connections 57 network connections 118 enhancements remote SIM acces s 115 settings 136 equaliser 47 F feeds 57 File manager 105 files downloadi ng 49 flash files 51 sending 105 fixed dialling 122 free memor y 27 G Gallery 49 Genuine en hancements 151 GPRS access point settings 60 advanced access point settings 60 settings 139 H headset connecting 19 home key 32 home screen 31 settings 39, 134 switching 32 HSDPA (high-speed downlink packet access) 111 I IM application settings 77 blocking users 77 groups 76 settings 75 starting a conversation 75 images adding to contacts 50 display background 50 rotating 49 sending 5 0 sharing on line 48 zooming 49 indicators 25 infrared 112 inserting battery 17 memory card 18 SIM card 17 installation log 126 installing applications 126 internet 57 ending connect ions 57 internet calls 87 Internet radio listening 53 saving stations 54 searching 54 settings 54 intranet browsing 58 J jad files 126 jar files 126 Java applications 126 K key store 124 keyguard 16 keypad lock settings 136 locking 16 tones 134 keys 14 activation keys 127 170 Index
shortcuts 134 WEP keys 140 L landmarks categories 103 creating 102 editing 102 receiving 103 sending 103 language changing 29 settings 134 lock code 1 20, 136 locking device 120 device autolock 136 keypad 16, 136 Log 94 adding numbers to Contacts 94 deleting 94 making a call 94 sending messag es 9 4 settings 94 transfer log 24 logos operator logo 134 welcome logo 133 M mailboxes connecting 68 creating 67 making a call 83 Maps 97, 98 browsing 98 driving 100 finding locations 99 indicators 99 routes 99 traffic information 101 travel guides 101 walking 100 measuremen ts converting 106 measuring system changing 102 memory 27 memory card backing up data 124 formatting 28 inserting 1 8 locking 120 microSD 28 passwords 120 setting password 28, 105 unlocking 28 menu 23 message reader 64 selec ting voice 64 message s 63 call rejection messages 137 cell broadcast settings 82 configuration messages 143 other settings 82 sending sound clips 74 service messages 77 text message settings 79 Messaging folders 63, 64 microS DHC 28 modem 62, 118 multimedia messages attachments 73 creating 71 creating presentations 73 forwarding 74 receiving 72 replying to 72 sending 71 sending options 7 4 settings 79 multitas king 36 Music player Music Sto re 46 playing 45 playlists 46 transferring music 46 Music Store 46 N net calls 87 alert settings 137 171 Index
barring 89 connecting 86 making a call 87 profiles 86, 143 settings 143 network settings 137 Nokia PC Sui te 111 Notes 109 notific ation li ght 135 O One-touch keys 135 operato r logo 134 selecting 137 original settin gs 137 P packet data access point settings 60 advanced access point settings 60 restr icti ng 143 settings 139 pairing devic es 114 passcode 114 passwords memory card password 28, 105 PC Suite 111 PDF reader 107 personalisat ion 40 changing language 134 display 133 home screen 134 tones 134 picture messag es forwarding 71 viewing 71 PIN code changing 136 playing messages 64 recordings 48 video and audio 50 podcasting 44 directories 44 searching 45 settings 45 positioning settings 97 predict ive text in put 29, 134 presentations 73 printer settings 108 printin g 107, 108 profiles creating 38 customising 38, 39 net call profile 86, 143 selecting ringing tones 38 PTT contacts 93 created calls 9 3 creating a channel 93 exiting 93 logging in 92 making a call 92 settings 92 Q Quickoffice 106 R radio listening to 52 saved stations 53 settings 53 viewing visual content 52 RealPlayer playing media clip s 5 0 sending files 51 settings 51 viewing clip details 51 recorder playing recordings 4 8 recording a sound clip 48 settings 49 recording sound clips 48 remote configuratio n 124 remote lock 120 remote synchronisation 129 restoring original s ettings 137 ringing tones 134 3-D 40 172 Index
contacts and contact groups 36 in profiles 38 vibrating alert 134 S satellite si gnal strength 102 saving current position 102 files 25 settings 25 screen saver 40, 133 scroll key lights 16 search modes switching 35 searching available WLANs 119 security Bluetooth 115 device and SIM card 136 Java application 126 memory card 120 security module 124 sending files 25, 105 using Bluetooth 113 videos 85 service commands 78 service messages 77 settings 81 session initi ation protoc ol See SIP settings Active notes 104 advanced WLAN 139 application installations 126 applications 144 Calendar 35 calls 137 camera 43 cell broadcast 8 2 certificate 123 clock 109 contacts 36 date 135 display 133 Download! application 59 e-mail connection 80 e-mail key 136 e-mail retrieval 81 e-mail user 80 EAP plug-ins 141 enhancements 136 GPRS 60, 139 home screen 134 IM 75 Internet radio 54 Java application secu rity 126 keypad lock 136 language 134 Log 94 multimedia messages 79 net call 143 network 137 packet data 139 podcasting 45 positioning 97 printer 108 PTT 92 radio 53 RealPlayer 51 recorder 49 restoring 137 service messages 81 SIP 142 slide 135 text messages 79 time 135 tones 134 voice commands 92 web 58 WEP security 140 WLAN 139 WLAN access point 61 WLAN security 140 Settings wizard 22 shortcuts 145 keys 134 signal strength 25 silencing alarms and incom ing calls 15, 134 SIM access profile 115 SIM card inserting 17 text messages 70 SIP creating profiles 142 173 Index
editing profiles 142 editing proxy servers 142 editing registration servers 143 settings 142 sis files 126 sisx files 126 slide opening and closing 16 settings 135 software packages installation settings 126 installing 126 sound clips recor ding 48 sending 74 Speech 64 speed dialling 88 standby mode settings 134 switching device on and off 21 Symbian applications 126 synchronisation 24 settings 129 synchronisation profiles 129 synchronising applications 129 T tabs 25 text changing si ze 133 letter mode 28 number mode 28 predictive input 29 traditional input 28 text messages messages on SIM card 70 sending 7 0 sending options 70 settings 79 writing 70 themes changing 40 downloading 4 0 time settings 135 tones 134 settings 134 toolbar camera 41 traditional text input 28 Transfer log 24 transferring data 24 trip des tinatio n 102 trip meter 102 troubleshoot ing 152 U UPIN code changing 136 USB data cable 111 V vibrating alert 134 video playing 43 video calls making a call 84 switching to voice call 84 video clips details 51 playing 50 sending 51 video sharing 85 receiving invitations 85 virtual private network access points 130 use in applications 131 Voice aid 90 voice commands changing profiles 91 launching an ap plication 91 settings 92 voice mail calling 90 changing number 90 voice over I P 87 VoIP 87 volume 27 VPN access points 130 use in applications 131 174 Index
W wallpaper 50 warning tones 134 Web connection security 5 6 web settings 58 weblogs 57 Welcome applicati on 21 welcome note 133 WEP keys 140 security settin gs 140 wireless keyb oard 109 WLAN 802.1x security settings 140 access point settings 61 access points 117 advanced access point settings 61 advanced settings 139 availability 116 MAC address 116, 139 searching for networks 119 security settin gs 140 settings 139 WEP keys 140 WPA security set tings 141 WLAN wizard 1 17 world clock 109 WPA security sett ings 141 writing language 29 Z Zip manag er 107 175 Index